JP6889682B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

Conventionally, there is a gaming machine having a substrate on which electronic components are mounted, in which a connector is mounted as an electronic component in a narrow portion of the substrate (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2009-66081

However, in Patent Document 1, when an electronic component is mounted in a narrow portion of a substrate, the arrangement of signals and terminals is not considered, and redundant signal pattern wiring and these redundant signal pattern wiring are used. There is a problem that there is a fear that a malfunction may occur due to generated noise or the like.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a malfunction due to noise or the like caused by redundant signal pattern wiring.

(A) A gaming machine capable of playing games
A variable approach means that can change between a first state in which the game medium can enter and a second state in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult.
A special state control means that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a special state including the change of the variable approach means to the first state.
With a special state control means capable of controlling a special state in which the frequency of being controlled by the special state is higher than that of the normal state.
It is provided with a granting effect executing means capable of executing a granting effect when a game value is given based on the fact that the game medium has entered a predetermined area in accordance with the control of the special state.
The variable approach means is provided so as not to enter the game medium launched toward the variable approach means after being notified that the special state is controlled.
The variable display that does not trigger the control of the advantageous state in the special state is a first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period, and a second period in which the variable display period is longer than the first period. It is feasible with the second variable display pattern and
In the special state, the ratio controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. Lower than the percentage,
The special state includes a first special state and a second special state that is more advantageous than the first special state.
The granting effect executing means
In the second special state, when the game value is given based on the fact that the game medium has entered the predetermined area in accordance with the control of the special state, the granting effect is executed.
In the first special state, when the game value is given based on the fact that the game medium has entered the predetermined area in accordance with the control of the special state, the granting effect is not executed.
It is characterized by that.
In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the gaming machine of the means 1 of the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
A region located between the first region and the second region on which electronic components (for example, motor drive IC601, LED drive IC602, etc.) are mounted, and the first region and the second region, and the first region. A mounting substrate (for example, LED substrate 275) having one region and a connection region (for example, connection region 275C) narrower than the second region is provided.
In the connection region, a first signal pattern wiring (for example, a pattern) for transmitting a first electric signal (for example, a serial control signal) to an electronic component (for example, a motor driving IC601) mounted in the first region. Wiring L2, L3) and a second signal pattern wiring (for example, for example) for transmitting a second electric signal (for example, a serial control signal) to an electronic component (for example, LED drive IC602) mounted in the second region. A specific electronic component (for example, connector 603) having a plurality of connection terminals connected to each of the pattern wirings L11 and L12) is mounted.
The first signal pattern wiring is connected to the terminal on the first region side of the specific electronic component mounted in the connection region, and the second signal pattern wiring is connected to the terminal on the second region side (FIG. 22),
further,
Variable winning means (for example, variable winning ball device 9015 or special variable winning ball device 9022) capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can win a prize and a second state in which the game medium cannot win or is difficult to win, and an advantageous state Is a different state, and step S90358 in the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 90560) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) including the change of the variable winning means to the first state. A special state control means (for example, a KT state (1st KT state, 2nd KT state)) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a KT state (1st KT state, 2nd KT state)) that is more frequently controlled to the special state than the normal state. For example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 90560 for executing steps S902208A, S902211A, S902221A, S902209B, S902210B, S902213B, and S902214B) was provided, and it was notified that the variable winning means was controlled to the special state. A game medium launched later toward the variable winning means is provided so as not to win a prize (for example, a nail group 55 is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball, and a special variable winning ball device 9022 in a small hit game is provided. The first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period, the variable display that does not trigger the control to the advantageous state in the special state). (For example, the second variation pattern # 25, # 27 of the shortened variation) and the second variable display pattern (for example, the second variation pattern including the continuous effect) in which the variable display period is a second period longer than the first period. # 26,
The ratio that can be executed by # 28) and is controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern in the special state is such that the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. After that, it is lower than the rate controlled to the special state (for example, in the case of a small hit, the rate determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 28 having a relatively long fluctuation time is low (or not determined)). ).
According to this feature, redundant signal pattern wiring can be reduced, and malfunction due to noise or the like caused by redundant signal pattern wiring can be prevented. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the hobby from being lowered and enhance the effect of the production.

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The specific electronic component is characterized in that it is a connector (for example, connector 603) for connecting the mounting board (for example, LED board 275) to another board (for example, an effect control board 12).
According to this feature, signals input from other boards to the connector can be transmitted to electronic components in each region while being prevented from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The specific electronic component is an IC device for serial signals (for example, a motor drive IC601, an LED drive IC602, etc.) capable of outputting a serial signal to the electronic components mounted in the first region and the second region. It is characterized by being.
According to this feature, the serial signal can be transmitted to the electronic components in each region while being prevented from being affected by noise and the like.

The gaming machine of the means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 2.
In the connector (for example, connector 603), the first signal terminals (for example, "2" and "3" terminals) connected to the first signal pattern wiring (for example, pattern wirings L2 and L3) and A ground terminal (for example, "11" and "12") is connected between the second signal terminals (for example, "11" and "12") connected to the second signal pattern wiring (for example, pattern wirings L11 and L12). Terminals 4 and 10; "GND") are provided (see FIG. 22).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the influence of noise and the like can be further reduced.

The gaming machine of the means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 2 or the means 4.
In the connector (for example, connector 603), the first signal terminals (for example, "2" and "3" terminals) connected to the first signal pattern wiring (for example, pattern wirings L2 and L3) and A power terminal (for example, "11" and "12") is connected between the second signal terminals (for example, "11" and "12") connected to the second signal pattern wiring (for example, pattern wirings L11 and L12). Terminals "5" to "9") are provided (see FIG. 22).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the influence of noise and the like can be further reduced.

(A) A gaming machine capable of playing games
A variable approach means that can change between a first state in which the game medium can enter and a second state in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult.
A state different from the advantageous state including the change of the variable approach means to the first state, and a special state control means capable of controlling the special state including the change of the variable approach means to the first state. ,
The game value is given based on the special state control means capable of controlling the special state, which is more frequently controlled to the special state than the normal state, and the game medium entering the predetermined area with the control of the special state. It is equipped with a granting effect executing means that can execute the granting effect when it is performed.
The variable approach means is provided so as not to enter the game medium launched toward the variable approach means after being notified that the special state is controlled.
The variable display that does not trigger the control of the advantageous state in the special state is a first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period, and a second period in which the variable display period is longer than the first period. It is feasible with the second variable display pattern and
In the special state, the ratio controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. Lower than the percentage,
The special state includes a first special state and a second special state that is more advantageous than the first special state.
The granting effect executing means
In the second special state, when the game value is given based on the fact that the game medium has entered the predetermined area in accordance with the control of the special state, the granting effect is executed.
In the first special state, when the game value is given based on the fact that the game medium has entered the predetermined area in accordance with the control of the special state, the granting effect is not executed.
It is characterized by that.
In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the gaming machine of the means 1 of the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
A region located between the first region and the second region on which electronic components (for example, motor drive IC601, LED drive IC602, etc.) are mounted, and the first region and the second region, and the first region. A mounting substrate (for example, LED substrate 275) having one region and a connection region (for example, connection region 275C) narrower than the second region is provided.
In the connection region, a first signal pattern wiring (for example, a pattern) for transmitting a first electric signal (for example, a serial control signal) to an electronic component (for example, a motor driving IC601) mounted in the first region. Wiring L2, L3) and a second signal pattern wiring (for example, for example) for transmitting a second electric signal (for example, a serial control signal) to an electronic component (for example, LED drive IC602) mounted in the second region. A specific electronic component (for example, connector 603) having a plurality of connection terminals connected to each of the pattern wirings L11 and L12) is mounted.
The first signal pattern wiring is connected to the terminal on the first region side of the specific electronic component mounted in the connection region, and the second signal pattern wiring is connected to the terminal on the second region side (FIG. 22),
further,
Variable winning means (for example, variable winning ball device 9015 or special variable winning ball device 9022) capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can win a prize and a second state in which the game medium cannot win or is difficult to win, and an advantageous state Is a different state, and step S90358 in the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 90560) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) including the change of the variable winning means to the first state. A special state control means (for example, a KT state (1st KT state, 2nd KT state)) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a KT state (1st KT state, 2nd KT state)) that is more frequently controlled to the special state than the normal state. For example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 90560 for executing steps S902208A, S902211A, S902221A, S902209B, S902210B, S902213B, and S902214B) was provided, and it was notified that the variable winning means was controlled to the special state. A game medium launched later toward the variable winning means is provided so as not to win a prize (for example, a nail group 55 is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball, and a special variable winning ball device 9022 in a small hit game is provided. The first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period, the variable display that does not trigger the control to the advantageous state in the special state). (For example, the second variation pattern # 25, # 27 of the shortened variation) and the second variable display pattern (for example, the second variation pattern including the continuous effect) in which the variable display period is a second period longer than the first period. The ratio that can be executed by # 26 and # 28) and is controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern in the special state is variably displayed by the first variable display pattern. Is lower (or not determined) in the second variation pattern # 28, which has a relatively long variation time, than is controlled to a special state after the execution of (for example, in the case of a small hit). (See FIG. 59).
According to this feature, redundant signal pattern wiring can be reduced, and malfunction due to noise or the like caused by redundant signal pattern wiring can be prevented. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the hobby from being lowered and enhance the effect of the production.
(Means B) The means A includes a variable display execution means capable of performing variable display based on the determination result by the determination means and deriving and displaying the display result of the variable display, and the variable display execution means is extracted by the extraction means. When the first random number value is within a predetermined range, variable display is performed, and as the display result of the variable display, the first display result suggesting that the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state, or the control to the advantageous state. The second display result suggesting that the display is not performed is derived and displayed, and when the first random number value extracted by the extraction means is a value outside the predetermined range, the variable display is performed as the display result of the variable display without performing the variable display. The second display result may be derived and displayed.
(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a state in which the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to an open state), and is a predetermined range (for example, a state). , [3 to 13]), and a random number updating means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 560 that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number by executing step S25). By executing step S5112 in the extraction means for extracting the random number value (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560, the value of the normal symbol hit determination random number (random 4) is extracted when the game ball passes through the gate 32. A portion to be used) and a determination means (for example, a portion in the game control microcomputer 560 that executes step S5124) that can determine to control the advantageous state based on the random value extracted by the extraction means. The determining means does not determine to control in an advantageous state when the random number value extracted by the extracting means is a value outside the predetermined range, at least in a predetermined state (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 is a step. When it is N of S5124, the variable winning ball device 15 is not controlled to the open state), a display means capable of displaying an image (for example, an effect display device 909), and information related to the game (for example, the display means). An interface image including a hold display, a production probability change counter image, and a right-handed promotion notification image. In addition, information on a controlled production mode (for example, mode name) and information on output audio (for example, song title). , Information about services using communication terminals (for example, points earned, items, two-dimensional code), effect display associated with driving a movable accessory, mission display indicating that a mission has been completed (for example, "Super Reach A" Display such as "I saw", "I saw the reach continuously"), active display corresponding to the fluctuation during execution, operation promotion display, information on how to play and explanation of production.) A display control means capable of displaying a hold display by executing steps S90653, S90656, S90659, and S90662 in the effect control microcomputer 90100, and an effect probability variation counter image by executing step S90684D. And the right-handed promotion notification by executing step S90684A. An effect execution means (for example, a microscope for effect control) capable of executing a difficult-to-see effect (for example, a blackout notice) that makes a predetermined image displayed on the display means difficult to see (for example, a blackout notice). The 90100 includes a portion for executing steps S904510 and S904514), and the effect executing means is a first difficult-to-see effect (for example, an interface image, a right-handed promotion notification image) that does not make information about the game difficult to see as a difficult-to-see effect. And the first blackout notice that makes the images other than the effect probability variation counter image difficult to see, and the second difficulty-to-see effect that makes the information about the game difficult to see (for example, the interface image, the right-handed promotion notification image, and the effect probability variation counter image). It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a second blackout notice) that makes it difficult to visually recognize an image including. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately deal with the defect. Further, in the first difficult-to-see production, since the information related to the game is not difficult to see, it is possible to prevent the game from being enjoyed.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following means 7 to 11. Conventionally, the gaming medium is launched after being notified that the gaming machine is controlled to a special state (for example, after the small hit symbol is derived and displayed) as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-5513. Even so, it is conceivable to configure the variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device) so as not to win a prize. However, when the variable display with a long variable display period is being executed, it is conceivable that the player stops the firing operation. Therefore, if such a configuration is simply combined, even if the variable display with a long variable display period is executed and then controlled to a special state, the variable winning means cannot win the game medium, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. Instead of not being able to do it, there is a risk that it will be less interesting. In view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a decrease in interest and enhancing the effect of production.

The gaming machine of the means 7 of the present invention is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state), and the first state in which the gaming medium can win and the gaming medium cannot win or are difficult. The variable winning means (for example, the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022) that can be changed to the second state is different from the advantageous state, and the variable winning means is changed to the first state. A special state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) including the operation (for example, a portion that executes steps S90358 to S90360 in the game control microcomputer 90560) and the special state as compared with the normal state. Special state control means (for example, steps S902208A, S902211A, S902212A in the game control microcomputer 90560) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) that is frequently controlled by the state, S902209B, S902210B, S902213B, S902214B), and the variable winning means cannot win a gaming medium launched toward the variable winning means after being notified that it is controlled to the special state. (For example, it is realized by providing a nail group 55 as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball and setting the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game to 0.8 seconds. ), The variable display that does not trigger the control to the advantageous state in the special state is the first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period (for example, the second variable display pattern # 25, # 27 of shortened variation). And the second variable display pattern (for example, the second variable display patterns # 26 and # 28 including the continuous effect), which is the second period in which the variable display period is longer than the first period, can be executed, and the special state is described. In, the ratio controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is higher than the ratio controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. It is characterized by being low (for example, in the case of a small hit, the ratio determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 28 having a relatively long fluctuation time is low (or not determined). See FIG. 59).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the hobby from being lowered and enhance the effect of the production.

The gaming machine of the means 8 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 7, and is a promotion notification (for example, right-handed) that promotes the launch of the gaming medium to a predetermined route when controlled in the special state. The promotion notification means (which is realized by displaying a character display of "right-handed", an arrow display indicating the right direction, or the like on the effect display device 909) capable of executing the notification) is provided. The promotion notification may be executed in different modes depending on whether the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern and the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern. (For example, in the KT state, when the variation display is executed by the variation pattern having a relatively long variation time (that is, the second variation pattern # 26, # 28), the variation pattern of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation pattern). Compared to when the variable display is executed by # 25, # 27), the character display of "right-handed" and the arrow display indicating the right direction are displayed by reducing or making them transparent, and are more positive. You may not encourage right-handedness.)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable promotion notification according to the situation.

The gaming machine of the means 9 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 7 or the means 8, and the storage means (for example, the hitting ball supply tray 903 or the surplus ball receiving tray 904) capable of storing the game medium and the storage means It is realized by displaying a character of "full tank error" or outputting an error sound on the effect display device 909, which can execute a full tank notification indicating that the tank is full. ), The full tank notification means can make the execution mode of the full tank notification different between when it is controlled to the advantageous state and when it is controlled to the special state. (For example, in the second KT state, the full tank notification is executed in a conservative manner (for example, the character size of the "full tank error" is small, the error volume is small, etc.) as compared with the jackpot game state. Alternatively, in the jackpot gaming state, when the stored amount exceeds the first predetermined amount, a full tank notification is executed, and in the second KT state, when the stored amount exceeds the second predetermined amount, which is larger than the first predetermined amount, A full tank notification may be executed.)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable full tank notification according to the situation.

The gaming machine of the means 10 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 7 or the means 9, and the next variable display after being controlled to the special state is executed in the special state. Step S90933, S90944 according to the process table selected in step S90928 in the effect control microcomputer 90200 (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90200) that can execute the special effect (for example, continuous small hit effect) when controlled to the special state again. The part that executes) may be provided.
According to such a configuration, the monotonousness of the gametability related to the special state can be eliminated, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine of the means 11 of the present invention is the game machine according to the means 7 or the means 10, and is counted based on a predetermined opportunity (for example, a game ball has won a prize in a large winning opening or a special winning opening 9024). A counting display executing means (for example, a portion for executing step S90707 in the effect control microcomputer 90200) capable of updating and displaying a display (for example, a prize ball number display) is provided, and the counting display executing means is the updated counting result. Counting is displayed by the first pattern in which the period until displaying is the first specific period and the second pattern in which the period until displaying the updated counting result is the second specific period longer than the first specific period. Can be updated and displayed (for example, when the prize ball number display 90300 is displayed in the jackpot pattern, the number of prize balls is incremented by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 second), and the second KT is displayed. When displaying the prize ball number display 90305 in a pattern, the number of prize balls may be incremented by 1 at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds)).
According to such a configuration, by providing a plurality of types of patterns for updating and displaying the counting display, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the counting display is updated and displayed.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. The front view of the effect device ((A) is a view of the initial state, and (B) is a view of the state in which the movable body is advanced). It is an exploded perspective view of the production device seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the production device seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a movable body seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a movable body seen from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of a movable body seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a movable body seen from the front. (A) is a front view (initial state) of the movable body. (B) is a front view (initial state) of the inside of the movable body with the decorative body removed. (A) is a front view of the movable body (state when the first to fourth character members move). (B) is a front view of the inside of the movable body from which the decorative body and the like are removed (state when the first to fourth character members are moved). It is a figure explaining the relationship between the deformation of a decorative body and brightness. It is a figure which shows the LED substrate, (A) is a perspective view seen from the front, (B) is a plan view seen from the arrow B in (A). It is a figure which shows the LED substrate, (A) is the sectional view of the cutting line XIVA-XIVA in FIG. 13 (B), (B) is the sectional view of the cutting line XIVB-XIVB in FIG. 13 (B). It is a figure which shows the LED substrate, (A) is an enlarged view of "XVA part" in FIG. 13 (A), (B) is a sectional view seen from the arrow B in (A), (C) is (A). ) Cross-sectional view seen from the arrow C inside. It is a figure which shows the execution example of an effect. It is a figure which shows the other example of the LED substrate, (A) is a plan view, (B) is a sectional view of the cutting line BB in (A). It is a figure which shows the other example of the LED substrate, (A) is the sectional view of the cutting line XVIIIA-XVIIIA in FIG. 17 (A), (B) is the enlarged view of the "B part" in (A). It is a figure for demonstrating another example of an LED board, (A) is a figure which arranged electronic components without considering the curvature of a substrate body, (B) is a figure which arranged electronic components from the arrangement of (A), etc. The modified figure. It is a front view which shows the state which removed the cover body from a movable body. It is a detailed view which shows the LED substrate provided inside the movable body. It is a figure which shows the improved signal allocation form used in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the signal allocation form before improvement. It is a figure which shows the circuit structure as the modification 12 of this invention. (A) is a front view showing the first effect body, and (B) is a rear view. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which the 1st effect body was seen diagonally from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which the 1st effect body was seen obliquely from the back. 25 (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 25 (A). FIG. 25 (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 25 (A). FIG. 25 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 25 (B). 25 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. 25 (B). (A) is a rear view showing the light emitting mode of the first effect body, (B) is a front view showing the positional relationship between the first effect body and the second effect body, and (C) is a first effect body and the second effect. It is a schematic plan view which shows the positional relationship with a body. (A) is a front view of a main part showing a state in which the first effect body is viewed through a game board, and (B) is a view showing a main part of a substrate. FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE of FIG. 33 (B). (A) is a diagram showing a wiring connection state between the LED board and the effect control board, and (B) is a diagram showing a wiring connection state between the LED board and the effect control board as a modification 13 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd initialization process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of the operation control at the time of non-detection, the operation control at the time of detection, and the operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation speed example of the operation control at the time of non-detection, the operation control at the time of detection, and the operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is a figure for demonstrating the circuit structure of the shielding unit control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the circuit structure of the shielding unit control board in the modification 15. It is a figure for demonstrating the circuit structure of the shielding unit control board in the modification 16. It is a figure for demonstrating the circuit structure of the shielding unit control board in the modification 17. It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a front view of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the closed state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the open state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit configuration example of a relay board, an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination ratio of the variation pattern of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch passing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the hold storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the 1st special symbol change in the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for passing through the 1st gate. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol process process. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the production control microcomputer. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the hold continuous production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol change start processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the continuous small hit effect decision table. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the background symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit middle processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of KT notification and small hit notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of limitation of KT notification and small hit notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the relationship between the content of hold storage and the limitation of KT notification and small hit notification. It is a flowchart which shows the hold continuous production control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is a timing chart for explaining the production timing of the production in the small hit game in the second KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the continuous small hit effect. It is a timing chart for explaining the production timing of the continuous small hit production.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area 10 is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area 10. Further, the game machine frame 3 is provided with a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area 10 can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area 10 can be seen through the glass window 50a.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, and a methacrylic resin, and is formed in a substantially square shape in front view. It is composed of a board surface plate 2A provided with (not shown), a guide rail 2b, and the like, and a spacer member 2B integrally attached to the back surface side of the board surface plate 2A. The game board 2 is formed of a non-translucent member such as a veneer board in a substantially square shape in front view, and is provided on a board surface board provided with obstacle nails (not shown), guide rails 2b, etc. on the front game board surface. May be configured.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B for performing the above are provided. These are composed of 7-segment LEDs (light emitting diodes) or the like, and the special symbol may be a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to change (display the variable display) a plurality of types of special symbols by an update display or the like (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a derived display) as a display result (variable display result) (the same applies to other variable displays described later). It should be noted that scroll display, deformation, enlargement / reduction, and the like may be performed as fluctuations in the design (particularly, the decorative design described later).

In the following, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as the "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is referred to as the "second special symbol". Also called. Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game".

An effect display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The effect display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. The effect display device 5 is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 and can be visually recognized through the opening 2c formed in the game board 2. A frame-shaped center decorative frame 51 is provided in the opening 2c of the game board 2.

On the screen of the effect display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) that are different from the special symbols as a plurality of types of decorative identification information can be changed. The display is done. As an example, on the screen of the effect display device 5, each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. (For example, scroll display in the vertical direction or update display) is performed in the decorative pattern.

A display area 5H is also arranged on the screen of the effect display device 5. In the display area 5H, the first reserved display image (here, the circle image) corresponding to the first special figure game (variable display of the decorative symbol) whose execution is suspended is displayed right-justified, and the execution is suspended. The second hold display image (here, the circle image) corresponding to the second special figure game (variable display of the decorative pattern) is displayed left-justified.

The number of reserved special figures games is also referred to as the number of reserved special figures. In particular, the number of holdings of the first special figure game is referred to as the number of holdings of the first special figure. The number of holdings of the second special figure game is called the number of holdings of the second special figure. The number of the first reserved display images indicates the number of the first special figure reserved storage, and the number of the second reserved display images indicates the number of the second special figure reserved storage. The first hold display image and the second hold display image may be collectively referred to as a hold display image.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided to display the number of special figure hold storages in a identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B is configured to include a plurality of LEDs, and displays the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. To do.

Below the effect display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The ordinary winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening, the first start opening switch 22A (see FIG. 2) is turned on, whereby the entry of the game ball is detected (at this time, a predetermined number (for example, three). ) The prize ball is paid out, and the first special figure game can be started.)

The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B includes an ordinary electric accessory having a movable plate that is changed to a closed state as a protruding position and an open state as an retracted position by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2) for the ordinary electric accessory. Form the second start winning opening. In the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, for example, when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable plate is in the protruding position, so that the movable plate protrudes to the game area 10 side and the game ball enters the second starting winning opening. It will be in a closed state (also called the second start winning opening will be in a closed state). On the other hand, the normally variable winning ball device 6B is opened so that the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by being in the retracted position where the movable plate retracts to the game board 2 side when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state. It becomes a state (it is also called that the second start winning opening becomes an open state). When the game ball enters the second start winning opening, the second start opening switch 22B (see FIG. 2) is turned on, whereby the entry of the game ball is detected (at this time, a predetermined number (for example, three). ) The prize ball is paid out, and the second special figure game can be started.)

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2) for the large winning opening door, and is specified to change between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form a large winning opening as an area.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening, and the game ball enters the large winning opening (for example, Can't pass). On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When the game ball enters the large winning opening, the count switch 23 (see FIG. 2) is turned on, whereby the entry of the game ball is detected. At this time, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, for example.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and can display a variable display of an ordinary symbol (also referred to as "ordinary diagram" or "ordinary diagram") as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Do. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also referred to as a normal figure game (also referred to as a "normal figure game").

The normal drawing game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the gate switch 21 of FIG. 2 is turned on, whereby the passing of the game ball is detected.

On the right side of the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and further, an effect LED 9 for a game effect is provided around the game area. There is.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward a game area by a hitting ball launching device is provided. There is.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) An upper plate (ball hitting plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower plate is provided for holding (storing) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

An effect device 200 is arranged below the effect display device 5. The effect device 200 can perform the effect by operating in accordance with or independently of various effect images such as variable display of identification information. Further, a first effect body 800 and a second effect body 900 arranged on the back side of the first effect body 800 are provided on the left side of the effect device 200.

For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game or a normal figure game, management of various start prizes and various reserved memories, a big hit lottery or a normal figure hit lottery). It has a function of controlling execution, control of a jackpot game state, transmission of an effect control command to the effect control board 12, and a function of transmitting an effect control command to the effect control board 12. The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

As an example, the CPU 103 realizes the function of the main board 11 (control of the progress of the game) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data (data such as fluctuation patterns, effect control commands, and various tables) stored in the ROM 101 are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals are input and an output port for transmitting various signals.

The CPU 103 passes through the I / O 105 to the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, and the normal figure hold display. It outputs signals that control (drive) the device 25C and the like, and controls them.

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game medium passes through or a game medium passes through) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and variously based on the received effect control commands. It has a function to execute the effect (including variable display of decorative patterns and effect device).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

As an example, the effect control board 12 functions (executes the effect) by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 by the effect control CPU 120. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 121 (data used for the effect control pattern, data of various tables, etc.) are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The display control unit 123 outputs a video signal of the effect image to be displayed on the effect display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 5. As an example, the display control unit 123 may be equipped with VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), and the like.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used when controlling the effect operation. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals.

The voice control board 13 has a function of outputting voice (voice specified by the sound effect signal) from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound effect signal from the effect control board 12.

The LED control board 14 has a function of turning on / off the effect LED 9 (turning on / off according to the driving content indicated by the illumination signal) based on the illumination signal from the effect control board 12.

The effect display device 5 includes a display panel including a liquid crystal panel, an EL panel, and the like, and a driver circuit for driving the display panel. The video signal supplied from the display control unit 123 to the effect display device 5 via the I / O 125 is input to the driver circuit. The driver circuit displays the image represented by the video signal on the display panel. As a result, various effects images and the like are displayed on the effect display device 5.

The effect device 200 includes a drive mechanism 210 and a movable body 250, which are produced by exchanging signals (control signals, detection signals, etc., which will be described later) with the effect control board 12 to produce the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). Is controlled by.

(Progress of games, progress of production, etc.)
A game medium (game ball) is launched toward the game area by a player's rotation operation on the ball striking operation handle included in the pachinko game machine 1.

(Progress of the game controlled by the main board 11)
When the game ball that has flowed down the game area passes through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game (variable display of the normal symbol) is started. In addition, when the normal figure game cannot be started (when the start condition is not satisfied), such as when another normal figure game is already executed or during the following open control, the normal figure game is limited to four or the like. Execution is suspended. The held Fuzu game is executed when the start condition for starting the Fuzu game is satisfied (other Fuzu games are not executed, the release control is not in progress, etc.). When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 when the number of reserved memory of the normal figure has reached the upper limit, the number of stored memory of the normal figure does not increase and the passage is invalidated.

The variable display result that is stopped and displayed in the normal figure game includes a normal figure per symbol (for example, a normal figure such as "7") and a normal figure lost symbol (for example, a normal figure such as "-"). .. When the symbol per normal figure is stopped and displayed (derived), it is when the variable display result is "per normal figure". When the normal figure lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived), it is when the variable display result is "normal figure lost".

At the time of "normal drawing hit", the opening control (the second starting winning opening is opened) is performed so that the movable wing piece of the normally variable winning ball device 6B is set to the tilting position for a predetermined period. The opening control is not performed when the "normal figure is lost".

When the game ball that has flowed down the game area enters the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game is started. When the special figure game cannot be started (when the start condition is not satisfied), such as when another special figure game is already running or when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described later, four of each are used. The execution of the special figure game is suspended up to the upper limit. The reserved special figure game is executed when the start condition for starting the special figure game is satisfied (other special figure games are not executed, the jackpot game is not in progress, etc.).

When the game ball enters the first start winning opening when the first special figure reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value, the first special figure reserved memory number does not increase and the entry is invalidated (the entry is invalidated). There may be a prize ball). When the game ball enters the second start winning opening when the second special figure reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value, the second special figure reserved memory number does not increase and the entry is invalidated (the entry is invalidated). There may be a prize ball).

The entry (winning) of the game ball into the first starting winning opening, which increases the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, is also called the first starting winning. 2nd special figure The entry (winning) of a game ball that increases the number of reserved memories into the 2nd start winning opening is also called the 2nd starting winning. These prizes are collectively referred to as the start prize.

The variable display result that is stopped and displayed in the special figure game includes a jackpot symbol (for example, a special symbol such as "3" and "7") and a lost symbol (for example, a special symbol such as "-"). .. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed (derived), it is when the variable display result is "big hit". When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived), it is when the variable display result is "missed".

When the variable display result of the first special figure game or the second special figure game is "big hit" (specific display result), it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. When the variable display result is "missing", it is not controlled to the jackpot game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened. The open state is until the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9), whichever is earlier. Will be continued. Such an open state is called a round game (also simply called a "round"). In the jackpot game state, the round game is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, "15 times") is reached (the jackpot is closed during a period other than the round game).

For "big hit", big hit types such as "non-probable change" and "probable change" are set. When the jackpot type is "non-probability change", the jackpot symbol of "3" is stopped and displayed. When the jackpot type is "probability change", the jackpot symbol of "7" is stopped and displayed.

The "big hit" when the jackpot type is "probability variation" may be referred to as "probability variation jackpot", and the "big hit" when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" may be referred to as "non-probability variation jackpot". In addition, the jackpot game state based on the "probability change jackpot" may be referred to as the "probability variation jackpot game state". In addition, the jackpot game state based on the "non-probability change jackpot" may be referred to as the "non-probability variation jackpot game state".

Probability change After the big hit game state is finished, the probability that the variable display result becomes "big hit" (big hit probability) is controlled to be higher than the normal state. The probabilistic state continues until the next jackpot game state is started.

After the probabilistic jackpot gaming state or the non-probabilistic jackpot gaming state ends, the average variable display time (variable display period) is controlled to be shorter than the normal state. In the time saving state, the end condition of either one of the predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) of the special figure game being executed and the next big hit game state being started is satisfied first. Continue until you do.

In the time saving state, the normally variable winning ball device 6B is opened and closed in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting winning opening than in the non-time saving state such as the normal state. It may be changed to. For example, control to make the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal figure game (the period of variable display of the normal figure, also called the normal figure fluctuation time) shorter than in the normal state, or variable display in each normal figure game. The normal variable winning ball device 6B may be changed between the open state and the closed state in an advantageous change mode by controlling to improve the probability that the result will be "per normal figure" as compared with the normal state. Such control is referred to as high open control (also referred to as "time saving control" or "high base control"). By being controlled to such a time saving state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit" is shortened, and the gaming state becomes a state more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

The normal state is a gaming state other than an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probabilistic variation state, and the variable display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability of becoming a "hit" and the probability that the variable display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" is in the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the predetermined return processing is not executed after the closing).

The time saving state is also called "high base", and the gaming state that is not the time saving state is also called "low base" or "non-time saving state". The probabilistic state is also called "high probability", and the gaming state that is not the probabilistic state is also called "low probability" or "non-probability change".

(Progress of the game controlled by the effect control board 12)
In the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the effect display device 5, the first special figure game or the second special figure game is started. Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern (this is also a kind of production) is started. At the timing when the variable display result (also referred to as the fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (variable display result) that becomes the variable display display result of the decorative symbol (variable display result) The combination of the three decorative symbols) is also displayed as a stop (derivative display).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the effect display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later (“reach variation”). (Also referred to as "design") is a display mode in which fluctuations are continuing.

Further, in this embodiment, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display. As the reach effect, normal reach, super reach A, and super reach B, which have different production modes, are prepared. In this embodiment, the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of Super Reach B> Super Reach A> Normal Reach.

The jackpot expectation is, for example, the ratio at which the variable display result of the special figure game becomes a "big hit", and here, the percentage at which the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes a "big hit".

When the variable display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the effect display device 5. (The display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol on a predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" (for example, "7" at the time of probability variation jackpot, non-probability variation jackpot" At the time of, "6" etc.) are all displayed as a stop.

When the variable display result is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not become the reach mode, and the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. There is. When the variable display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss combination") that is not a jackpot combination. ”) May be stopped and displayed.

When the super reach is executed, the effect using the effect device 200 is executed (details will be described later).

(Direction device 200)
Next, the details of the effect device 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 15. In the following description, the direction in which the player is located is the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the opposite direction is the rear (see FIG. 4 and the like). Further, the up / down / left / right directions as viewed from the player located in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be defined as the up / down / left / right directions of the effect device 200 as they are (see FIGS. 3 and 4 and the like). Further, unless otherwise specified, each member constituting the effect device 200 is made of synthetic resin or metal. Further, unless otherwise specified, the mounting of each member may be performed by an appropriate method such as mounting using screws, screws or the like, or mounting such as fitting.

As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the effect device 200 includes a drive mechanism 210 and a movable body 250. The drive mechanism 210 moves the movable body 250 in the vertical direction. The movable body 250 is decorated with a decoration peculiar to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and such decoration can enhance the effect of the effect. The movable body 250 can move upward from the initial position (FIG. 3 (A)) and advance to the advance position (FIG. 3 (B)) by the drive mechanism 210 (returning from the advance position to the initial position). You can also). In the initial position of the movable body 250, most of the movable body 250 is located behind a transparent resin cover (attached to the game board 2 or the like) (not shown), and the movable body 250 is the resin cover. It is visually recognized through. On the other hand, the movable body 250 advances to the front of the effect display device 5 by moving to the advance position, and is visually recognized without the resin cover. The game board 2 may be transparent, and the movable body 250 may be located behind the game board 2 at least in the initial position and visually recognized through the game board 2.

(Structure of drive mechanism 210, etc.)
First, the drive mechanism 210 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5. The drive mechanism 210 includes a base body 211, a drive motor mounting member 213, a drive motor 215, first gear to sixth gear 217 to 222, a detection sensor 223, a rotary arm 225, a slide member 227, an elastic body 229, and the like (particularly). , See FIG. 5).

The base body 211 is the base of the drive mechanism 210 and supports various parts. The base body 211 is fixed to the game board 2 or the like of the pachinko game machine 1. A cover body CV (shown only in FIG. 3) that covers the drive motor 215 and the like from the front and hides it from the player is attached to the base body 211. The base body 211 includes supports 211A to 211F, concave rails 211J, guide holes 211K, and hooking portions 211L.

The supports 211A to 211F are formed of a cylindrical boss (which may be cylindrical; the same shall apply hereinafter for the columnar shape) protruding forward. Each of the supports 211A to 211E rotatably supports the second to seventh gears 218 to 222. Each gear has a through hole in the center thereof, and is rotatably supported by inserting a support into the through hole. Each gear can rotate about the central axis of each support as a rotation axis. The support 211F rotatably supports the rotary arm 225 (detailed later).

The concave rail 211J is a rail having a U-shaped cross section (the vertical line is the bottom surface), and extends in the vertical direction. A rack 251 included in the movable body 250 is slidably fitted to the concave rail 211J. The concave rail 211J guides the direction of movement of the rack 251 (that is, movement of the movable body 250) in the vertical direction.

The guide hole 211K is a through hole extending in the vertical direction, and is provided at a portion where the slide member 227 is attached. The slide member 227 is provided with a protrusion (not shown) extending rearward, and the protrusion is inserted into the guide hole 211K. Further, a retaining member (not shown) larger than the width (length in the left-right direction) of the guide hole 211K is attached to the rear end of the protrusion. As a result, the slide member 227 is attached to the base body 211 so as not to move in the forward direction (do not come off from the base body 211) and to be movable in the vertical direction (guided by the guide hole 211K).

The hook portion 211L is a protrusion having a notch, and one end of the elastic body 229 is hooked on the notch.

The drive motor 215 is attached to the base body 211 via the drive motor attachment member 213. The drive motor 215 has a rotating shaft 215A. The drive motor 215 is a stepping motor here, and its operation is controlled by the effect control board 12 (FIG. 2). The drive motor 215 rotates the rotation shaft 215A (FIG. 5) by a predetermined angle in synchronization with the control signal (here, the drive pulse) from the effect control board 12. A first gear 217 is fitted to the rotating shaft 215A. Therefore, the first gear 217 rotates together with the rotating shaft 215A. The first gear 217 meshes with the second gear 218.

The third gear 219 has a cylindrical columnar portion 219A whose internal portion is hollowed out, and an external gear 219B arranged behind the columnar portion 219A. The external gear 219B meshes with the second gear 218. Further, the third gear 221 includes a detection piece 219C having an arcuate outer edge protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 219A, and a columnar protrusion protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 219A and further protruding rearward. It has 219D and.

The detection piece 219C rotates together with the third gear 219 and is detected by the detection sensor 223 attached to the base body 211. The detection sensor 223 is, for example, a photo sensor (such as a sensor that detects that the space between the light receiving unit and the light emitting unit is shielded by a detection target), and when the detection piece 219C is detected, the detection indicates that the detection is detected. Output a signal. As will be described later, in this embodiment, the movable body 250 moves to the advanced position in conjunction with the rotation of the third gear 219. The detection piece 219C is arranged at a position detected by the detection sensor 223 when the rotating gear rotates until the movable body 250 is positioned at the advanced position.

The fourth gear 220 has a shape in which two small-diameter first gears (not shown) and a large-diameter second gear have a common rotation axis and are stacked. The first gear is located behind the second gear and meshes with the fifth gear 221. The second gear meshes with the teeth of the rack 251 included in the movable body 250. The fifth gear 221 and the sixth gear 222 mesh with the linear teeth 227A included in the slide member 227.

The rotary arm 225 has a fan shape. The rotary arm 225 has a long hole 225A into which the columnar protrusion 252A included in the movable body 250 is inserted, a long hole 225B into which the protrusion 219D is inserted, and a through hole 225C into which the support 211F is inserted. Be prepared. The through hole 225C is located at the center of a circle forming a fan in the shape of the rotary arm 225. The rotary arm 225 is rotatably attached to the base body 211 with the central axis of the support body 211C as the rotation axis. The elongated hole 225A is arranged on the first hypotenuse of the fan (the side formed by the radius of the circle), and is elongated in the direction in which the first hypotenuse extends. The elongated hole 225B is arranged on the second hypotenuse of the fan, and is elongated in the direction in which the second hypotenuse extends. The width of the elongated hole 225A (length in the short direction) is substantially the same as the diameter of the columnar protrusion 252A (the diameter is slightly shorter). The width of the elongated hole 225B is substantially the same as the diameter of the columnar protrusion 219D (the diameter is slightly shorter).

The slide member 227 includes linear teeth 227A (extending in the vertical direction) that mesh with the fifth gear 221 and the sixth gear 222, and functions as a rack having the fifth gear 221 and the sixth gear 222 as pinions. Further, the slide member 227 is provided with a hook portion 227B having a notch at the lower portion (below the hook portion 227B of the slide member 227), and the other end of the elastic body 229 is hooked. As described above, the slide member 227 can move (slide) in the vertical direction with respect to the base body 211. As described above, the fifth gear 221 meshes with the fourth gear 220 and the teeth 227A of the slide member 227, and the fourth gear 220 (pinion) meshes with the teeth of the rack 251 included in the movable body 250. ing. Therefore, the slide member 227 is interlocked with the movable body 250. Specifically, when the slide member 227 moves upward, the movable body 250 also moves upward (see FIG. 3 and the like). The sixth gear 222 guides the slide member 227 so that the slide member 227 does not tilt.

The elastic body 229 includes a coil spring, rubber, and the like. One end of the elastic body 229 is hooked on the hooking portion 211L of the base body 211, and the other end of the elastic body 229 is hooked on the hooking portion 227B of the slide member 227. Then, the elastic body 229 is in an extended state when the slide member 227 is located at the lowest position (when the slide member 227 is in the state of FIGS. 3A and 5 to 4). That is, the slide member 227 is urged upward (received an upward force) by the elastic force of the elastic body 229. Since the slide member 227 and the movable body 250 are interlocked as described above, the movable body 250 is also urged upward by the elastic force of the elastic body 229. That is, the elastic body 229 assists the movable body 250 to move upward.

(Action of drive mechanism 210, etc.)
When the drive motor 215 rotates the rotating shaft 215A in the forward direction (rotates counterclockwise), the first gear 217 also rotates in the forward direction. Since the second gear 218 meshes with the first gear 217 and the second gear 218 meshes with the third gear 219, the second gear 218 rotates in the reverse direction (clockwise rotation) due to the forward rotation of the rotating shaft 215A. ), And the third gear 219 rotates in the forward direction. Due to the forward rotation of the third gear 219, the protrusion 219D also moves while drawing an arc. The protrusion 219D pushes the inner wall of the elongated hole 225B as it moves. As a result, the rotary arm 225 rotates upward (counterclockwise) about the support 211F. The rotation of the rotary arm 225 causes the protrusion 252A included in the movable body 250 inserted in the elongated hole 225A to move upward. As a result, the movable body 250 moves upward (advanced position). When the drive motor 215 reversely rotates the rotating shaft 215A, the movable body 250 moves downward (initial position) (the rotation direction of each gear may be reversed). In this way, the drive mechanism 210 converts the rotational force of the drive motor 215 into a drive force that moves the movable body 250 in the vertical direction. As described above, the upward movement of the movable body 250 is assisted by the elastic body 229. Further, the elastic body 229 acts as a resistance against the downward movement of the movable body 250. As a result, the load on the drive motor 215 due to the weight of the movable body 250 can be reduced, and the movable body 250 can be smoothly moved in the vertical direction.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, the movable body 250 may be stopped at the advanced position. As a result, the period of the stretched state of the elastic body 229 can be shortened, and it is possible to reduce that the elastic force of the elastic body becomes weaker with the passage of time.

The movable body 250 is moved in the vertical direction under the control of the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). Specifically, when the movable body 250 is moved from the initial position to the advanced position, the effect control board 12 controls the drive motor 215 to rotate the rotating shaft 215A, and detects the detection piece 219C by the detection sensor 223. When (when the detection signal is received from the detection sensor 223 or when the detection signal is received for a certain period of time), that is, when the movable body 250 moves to the advanced position, the rotation of the rotation shaft 215A is stopped. As a result, the movable body 250 can be stopped at the advanced position. When the movable body 250 is returned from the advance position to the initial position, the drive motor 215 is driven by the same amount as the rotation angle when the movable body 250 is moved from the initial position to the advance position (for example, the information is held in the RAM 122). The rotation shaft 215A is rotated in the reverse direction. For example, the number of supplied drive pulses is counted, and the same number of drive pulses are supplied at the time of reverse rotation to reverse-rotate the rotation shaft 215A. A detection sensor (same sensor as the detection sensor 223, for example, a photo sensor) is provided corresponding to the position of the detection piece 219C when the movable body 250 is in the initial position, and the detection sensor 219C is used. When detected, the reverse rotation of the rotation shaft 215A may be stopped.

(Structure of movable body 250, etc.)
Next, the structural details of the movable body 250 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 15. The movable body 250 has a heart-shaped decorative body 269 and a member representing the LOVE character provided in front of the heart-shaped decorative body 250, and the decorative body 269 is deformed or each character of the LOVE is moved to produce an effect. Perform highly effective production.

The movable body 250 includes a rack 251, a plate-shaped member 252, a substrate 253, a base body 255, an LED substrate 256, a drive motor 257, a detection sensor 259, and first to third gears 261 to 263. The first and second slide members 265 to 266, the first and second mounting members 267 to 268, the decorative body 269, the predetermined mechanism X (the member forming the "LOVE" and the mechanism for moving each character of the "LOVE"". ) And.

(Structure other than the predetermined mechanism X in the movable body 250)
First, configurations other than the predetermined mechanism X will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 7.

The rack 251 has vertically extending teeth that mesh with a fourth gear 220 (such as FIG. 5). As can be seen from the above, the rack 251 is urged upward by the elastic body 229 (FIG. 5 and the like) via the fourth gear 220 and the like.

The plate-shaped member 252 is integrally formed with the rack 251. The plate-shaped member 252 has a columnar protrusion 252A projecting rearward from the plate-shaped main body.

The board 253 is a circuit board having a predetermined circuit and electrically connected to the effect control board 12. The board 253 relays control signals supplied from the effect control board 12 to the drive motor 257, the drive motor 273 described later, the LED board 275 described later, and the like, and also performs effect control from the detection sensor 259 described later and the detection sensor S described later. The detection signal supplied to the substrate 12 is relayed. The substrate 253 is attached to the rear surface of the base body 255. The substrate 253 has through holes and notches, and the plate-shaped member 252 is attached to the rear surface of the base body 255 with screws, screws, etc. via the through holes and notches. As a result, the rack 251 is also attached to the base body 255.

The base body 255 serves as the base of the movable body 250 and supports various parts on the front surface and the rear surface. The base body 255 includes rack portions 255A and 255B extending in the left-right direction on the front surface (these are used in the predetermined mechanism X). Further, the base body 255 includes protrusions 255C to 255H made of a columnar boss or the like protruding rearward from the periphery (rear surface or the like). The base body 255 includes protrusions 255I to 255L composed of columnar bosses or the like protruding forward from the periphery (front surface or the like) (these are used in the predetermined mechanism X). The base body 255 also includes a fixing portion 255J to which a detection sensor (referred to as a detection sensor S for explanation) (not shown) is fixed. The detection sensor S detects the detection piece 266D of the second slide member 266, which will be described later, and may be a photo sensor or the like like the detection sensor 223. Further, the LED substrate 256 is inserted into the upper portion of the base body 255, and a plurality of insertion portions 255M for fixing the LED substrate 256 are formed.

The LED substrate 256 is held on the curved upper surface of the base body 255 by the insertion portion 255M and the insertion portion 271C (see FIG. 8). The substrate body 256B of the LED substrate 256 has a curved shape that matches the shape of the base body 255. The LED board 256 is electrically connected to the board 253, and various circuits, an LED 256A that emits light, and a connector 256C are mounted on the board body 256B. A light source other than the LED 256A may be used as the light source. The LED substrate 256 causes the LED 256A to emit light based on the control signal from the effect control substrate 12 relayed by the substrate 253. The light emission of the LED 256A illuminates the upper part of the decorative body 269. Since the decorative body 269 can transmit light, the upper part of the decorative body 269 appears to be emitted by the light from the LED 256A. The details of the LED substrate 256 will be described later.

The drive motor 257 is attached to the front surface of the base body 255. The rotation shaft 257A of the drive motor 257 passes through a through hole provided in the base body 255 and extends to the rear of the base body 255. The drive motor 257 operates by a control signal (drive pulse or the like) from the effect control board 12.

The detection sensor 259 is attached to the front surface of the base body 255. The detection target of the detection sensor 259 and the like will be described later (used by the predetermined mechanism X). The detection sensor 259 may be a photo sensor or the like like the detection sensor 223.

The first gear 261 is fitted to the rotating shaft 257A of the drive motor 257 and rotates together with the rotating shaft 257A. The second gear 262 and the third gear 263 arranged on the left and right sides of the first gear 261 mesh with the first gear 261. The second gear 262 is rotatably supported by the base body 255 by inserting the protrusion 255C into the through hole formed in the center thereof. The third gear 263 is rotatably supported by the base body 255 by inserting the protrusion 255D into the through hole formed in the center thereof. Each gear can rotate about the central axis of each protrusion as a rotation axis. The second gear 262 includes a columnar protrusion 262A projecting rearward. The third gear 263 includes a columnar protrusion 263A projecting rearward.

The first slide member 265 is provided with an elongated hole 265A elongated in the vertical direction at the right end portion and an elongated hole 265B elongated in the horizontal direction at the center. A protrusion 262A is inserted into the elongated hole 265A. The width (length in the left-right direction) of the elongated hole 265A is substantially the same as the diameter of the protrusion 262A (the diameter is slightly shorter). The protrusion 262A can move in the elongated hole 265A. In the elongated hole 265B, protrusions 255E and 255F arranged in the left-right direction as an example are inserted. The width (length in the vertical direction) of the elongated hole 265B is substantially the same as the diameter of the protrusions 255E and 255F (the diameter is slightly shorter). The protrusions 255E and 255F can move in the elongated hole 265B. The protrusions 255E and 255F regulate the first slide member 265 from moving in a direction other than the left-right direction. The first slide member 265 has two small holes 265C at the left end.

The second slide member 266 includes an elongated hole 266A elongated in the vertical direction at the left end portion and an elongated hole 266B elongated in the horizontal direction at the center. A protrusion 263A is inserted into the elongated hole 266A. The width (length in the left-right direction) of the elongated hole 266A is substantially the same as the diameter of the protrusion 263A (the diameter is slightly shorter). The protrusion 263A can move in the elongated hole 266A. In the elongated hole 266B, protrusions 255G and 255H arranged in the left-right direction as an example are inserted. The width (length in the vertical direction) of the elongated hole 266B is substantially the same as the diameter of the protrusions 255G and 255H (the diameter is slightly shorter). The protrusions 255G and 255H can move in the elongated hole 266B. The protrusions 255G and 255H regulate the second slide member 266 from moving in a direction other than the left-right direction. The second slide member 266 has two small holes 266C at the right end.

Further, the second slide member 266 includes a detection piece 266D detected by the detection sensor S. The detection piece 266D is arranged at a position detected by the detection sensor S when the second slide member 266 is in the initial position (when the decorative body described later is not deformed. The state shown in FIG. 12A). .. When the detection sensor S detects the detection piece 266D, the detection sensor S supplies a detection signal to that effect to the effect control board 12.

The first mounting member 267 is arranged inside the decorative body 269 (details will be described later). The first mounting member 267 has two small diameter rods 267A protruding rearward. The two small diameter rods 267A pass through each of the two small holes 269F provided in the overhanging portion 269E of the decorative body 269, and are fitted into the two small holes 265C of the first slide member 265, respectively. Therefore, the first attachment member 267 is attached to the left end portion of the first slide member 265 by sandwiching the overhanging portion 269E of the decorative body 269. The first mounting member 267 has a through hole 267B extending in the left-right direction. The portion of the first mounting member 267 that forms the through hole 267B has a shape that enters the through hole 269A of the decorative body 269 (see also FIG. 8 and the like. The first mounting member 267 is a part of the decorative body 269. Visible from the outside). Therefore, the through hole 267B is arranged inside the through hole 269A.

The second mounting member 268 is arranged inside the decorative body 269 (details will be described later). The second mounting member 268 has two small diameter rods 268A protruding rearward. The two small diameter rods 268A pass through each of the two small holes 269G provided in the overhanging portion 269E of the decorative body 269, and are fitted into the two small holes 266C of the second slide member 266, respectively. Therefore, the second attachment member 268 is attached to the right end portion of the second slide member 266 by sandwiching the overhanging portion 269E of the decorative body 269. The second mounting member 268 has a through hole 268B extending in the left-right direction. The portion of the second mounting member 268 that forms the through hole 268B has a shape that enters the through hole 269D of the decorative body 269 (see also FIG. 8 and the like. The second mounting member 268 is partly of the decorative body 269. Visible from the outside). Therefore, the through hole 268B is arranged inside the through hole 269D.

The decorative body 269 has a heart shape bulging forward and is a member capable of transmitting light. The decorative body 269 is provided with a predetermined decoration. The decorative body 269 is made of, for example, natural rubber or various synthetic rubbers including silicone rubber, and is elastically deformable. The decorative body 269 is provided with through holes 269A and 269D on the side thereof and through holes 269B and 269C on the front portion thereof. The ends of the first mounting member 267 and the second mounting member 268 are inserted into the through holes 269A and 269D, respectively. The decorative body 269 has an overhanging portion 269E overhanging inward from the rear end of its side portion. The overhanging portion 269E of the decorative body 269 is provided with two small holes 269F and two small holes 269G, and these are provided with a small diameter rod 267A of the first mounting member 267 (two small holes 265C of the first slide member 265). The small diameter rod 268A of the second mounting member 268 (fitted into the two small holes 266C of the second slide member 266) passes through. Therefore, the decorative body 269 is connected to the first mounting member 267 and the first slide member 265 at the left end portion provided with the small hole 269F, and the second mounting member 268 at the right end portion provided with the small hole 269G. And is connected to the second slide member 266. Further, a substantially triangular notch 269H and a notch 269I are formed in the upper part of the overhanging portion 269E of the decorative body 269. When a compressing force acts on the decorative body 269 from the left-right direction, the notch 269H and the notch 269I close the notched portion. As a result, the decorative body 269 is easily deformed by the compressive force from the left-right direction. The decorative body 269 houses the base body 255 and the like inside. Therefore, the size of the configuration for operating the movable body 250 is made compact.

(Operation for deformation of decorative body 269)
When the drive motor 257 rotates the rotation shaft 257A in the forward direction (rotation to the right), the first gear 261 also rotates in the forward direction. The second gear 262 and the third gear 263 are engaged with the first gear 261, and the rotation shaft 257A rotates in the forward direction, so that the second gear 262 and the third gear 263 rotate in the reverse direction (rotation to the left). Here, the protrusion 262A of the second gear 262 is provided on the upper portion of the second gear 262, while the protrusion 263A of the second gear 263 is provided on the lower portion of the second gear 263. ing. Therefore, when the second gear 262 and the third gear 263 rotate in the reverse direction, the protrusion 262A moves to the left side and the protrusion 263A moves to the right side. That is, the protrusions 262A and the protrusions 263A move in directions away from each other by being at the target positions with respect to the rotation axis of each gear. The protrusion 262A that moves to the left pushes the inner wall of the elongated hole 265A of the first slide member 265 and slides the first slide member 265 to the left (the first mounting member 267 also moves together). The protrusion 263A that moves to the right pushes the inner wall of the elongated hole 266A of the second slide member 266 and slides the second slide member 266 to the right (the second mounting member 268 also moves together). In this way, the first slide member 265 (and the first mounting member 267) and the second slide member 266 (and the second mounting member 268) move in a direction away from each other along the left-right direction.

When the drive motor 257 reversely rotates the rotating shaft 257A, the operation in the opposite direction to the above is performed, and the first slide member 265 and the first mounting member 267 and the second slide member 266 and the second mounting member 268 are separated from each other. It moves in the direction of approaching each other along the left-right direction.

Since the first slide member 265 and the first mounting member 267 are connected with the left end portion of the decorative body 269 sandwiched between them, the left end portion also moves left and right as they move left and right. Since the second slide member 266 and the second mounting member 268 are connected with the right end portion of the decorative body 269 sandwiched between them, the right end portion also moves left and right as they move left and right. Therefore, when the drive motor 257 rotates the rotary shaft 257A in the forward direction, the decorative body 269 elastically deforms so as to be pulled from both the left and right sides (see the figure on the left side in FIG. 12B), and the rotary shaft 257A rotates in the reverse direction. Then, the decorative body 269 elastically deforms as if pressed from both the left and right sides (see the figure on the left side in FIG. 12C). As described above, a substantially triangular notch 269H and a notch 269I are formed in the upper portion of the overhanging portion 269E of the decorative body 269. As a result, when the decorative body 269 is pushed and compressed from both the left and right sides, the notch formed in a substantially triangular shape is closed, and the decorative body 269 is easily deformed.

As described above, the drive motor 257 is controlled by the effect control board 12. By supplying the control signal to the drive motor 257, the effect control board 12 repeats rotating the rotating shaft 257A in the forward direction and rotating it in the reverse direction. Then, the decorative body 269 is elastically deformed so as to be pulled to the left and right, and elastically deformed to be pushed from the left and right. As a result, the heart-shaped ornament 269 appears to beat like a heart (see FIGS. 12 and 16). The effect control board 12 detects that the second slide member 266 is in the initial position (that is, the decorative body 269 is in the initial state (state in FIG. 12A)) by the detection sensor S. When the effect control board 12 receives the detection signal from the detection sensor S (or receives it over a predetermined period of time), the effect control board 12 detects that the second slide member 266 is in the initial position. A detection sensor is provided at the position of the detection piece 266D when the second slide member 266 is at the position of FIGS. 12 (B) and 12 (C), and the movable body 250 is in the state of FIGS. 12 (B) and (C). It may be detected that there is, and the rotation direction of the rotation shaft 257A of the drive motor 257 may be controlled based on this detection.

(Structure of predetermined mechanism X, etc.)
Next, the detailed structure of the predetermined mechanism X will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 11 and the like. The predetermined mechanism X includes a cover body 271, a drive motor 273, an LED substrate 275, a cover body 277, first to fourth character members 281 to 284, and a driving force transmission mechanism X1 (see FIG. 8). ).

The cover body 271 covers the base body 255 from the front by being attached to the base body 255 to which the driving force transmission mechanism X1 or the like is attached from the front. The cover body 271 has through holes 271A to 271B (these uses and the like will be described later). Further, the LED substrate 256 is inserted into the upper portion of the cover body 271, and a plurality of insertion portions 271C for fixing the LED substrate 256 are formed.

The drive motor 273 is attached to the front surface of the cover body 271. The rotation shaft of the drive motor 273 passes through a through hole provided in the cover body 271 and extends to the rear of the cover body 271. The drive motor 273 operates by a control signal (drive pulse or the like) from the effect control board 12.

The LED substrate 275 is electrically connected to the substrate 253. The LED board 275 mounts various circuits and the LED 275A that emits light in front (decorative body 269). A light source other than the LED 275A may be used. The LED substrate 275 causes the LED 275A to emit light based on the control signal from the effect control substrate 12 relayed by the substrate 253. The decorative body 269 is illuminated by the light emission of the LED 275A (irradiation of light from the LED 275A). Since the decorative body 269 can transmit light, it appears to emit light by such illumination. The LED substrate 275 has a large notch 275B extending from above to the center. It should be noted that the way of emitting light appears to change due to the elastic deformation of the decorative body 269. This point will be described later.

The cover body 277 has through holes 277A and 277B (these uses and the like will be described later). The cover body 277 covers the front of the LED substrate 275, the drive motor 257 (FIG. 6), and the drive motor 273, and is interposed between these and the decorative body 269. Further, the cover body 277 covers the upper part of the LED substrate 256. Since the cover body 277 is made of a translucent synthetic resin, the light from the LED 275A mounted on the LED substrate 275 passes through the cover body 277 and illuminates the front surface of the decorative body 269. Further, the light from the LED 256A mounted on the LED substrate 256 passes through the cover body 277 and illuminates the upper part of the decorative body 269. The cover body 277 prevents the decorative body 269 from coming into contact with the LED substrate 256, the LED substrate 275, the drive motor 257 (FIG. 6), and the drive motor 273. As a result, it is possible to prevent the heat generated from these electronic components from being transmitted to the decorative body 269 and causing damage to the decorative body 269. Further, the contact between the electronic component and the decorative body 269 is prevented, and the electronic component is prevented from being damaged. The cover body 277 is attached to the cover body 271 via the LED substrate 275. For example, as shown in FIG. 8, a through hole is provided in the cover body 277 and the LED substrate 275 to communicate with each other when both are overlapped, and a screw, a screw, or the like is passed through the through hole and screwed into the cover body 271. The cover body 277 and the LED substrate 275 are attached to the cover body 271. At the time of this installation, the drive motor 257 (FIG. 6) and the drive motor 273 pass through the notch 275B of the LED substrate 275.

The first character member 281 is a member representing the letter "L", the second letter member 282 is a member representing the letter "O", and the third letter member 283 is the letter "V". The fourth character member 284 is a member expressing the character "E". Each of these members includes fitting rods 281A to 284A extending rearward (these uses and the like will be described later).

The third character member 283 has an LED substrate 283B, a diffusion plate 283C, and a cover body 283D in addition to the fitting rod 283A (see FIG. 8). The LED substrate 283B is electrically connected to the LED substrate 275 or the substrate 253. The LED board 283B mounts various circuits and an LED (which may be another light source) that emits light forward. The LED board 283B causes the LED to emit light based on the control signal from the effect control board 12 relayed by the board 253 or the LED board 275. The diffuser plate 283C diffuses the light from the LED (light emitted from the LED) of the LED substrate 283B. The cover body 283D is a transparent or translucent member, and the diffuser plate 283C transmits the diffused light. With such a configuration, the third character member 283 can emit light in order to enhance the effect of effect. The first character member 281, the second character member 282, and the fourth character member 284 have the same configuration. Therefore, the first to fourth character members 281 to 284 can emit light individually or simultaneously.

The driving force transmission mechanism X1 includes rack portions 255A and 255B, as well as first to third pinion gears 291 to 293 and first to fourth rack members 295 to 298.

The first pinion gear 291 is fitted to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 273 and rotates together with the rotation shaft. The second pinion gear 292 is rotatably supported by the first rack member 295. The third pinion gear 293 is rotatably supported by the third rack member 297. The second pinion gear 292 and the third pinion gear 293 have a shape in which two small-diameter first gears (located in the front) and a large-diameter second gear (located in the rear) are overlapped with a common rotation axis. The first gear of the second pinion gear 292 meshes with the teeth of the rack portion 255A extending in the left-right direction (see also FIGS. 10 and 11). The first gear of the third pinion gear 293 meshes with the teeth of the rack portion 255B extending in the left-right direction (see also FIGS. 10 and 11). The meshing destination of the second gear of each gear will be described later.

The first rack member 295 has a long shape in the left-right direction, and functions as a rack that moves in the left-right direction with the rotation of the first pinion gear 291. The first rack member 295 includes protrusions 295A to 295C, a mounting portion 295D, a detection piece 295E, teeth 295F, and elongated holes 295I and 295J.

The protrusions 295A to 295C are formed of a columnar boss or the like that protrudes rearward. The protrusion 295A rotatably supports the second pinion gear 292. Specifically, the protrusion 295A is supported by inserting the protrusion 295A into the through hole at the center of the second pinion gear 292. The second pinion gear 292 can rotate with the central axis of the protrusion 295A as the rotation axis. The protrusions 295B to 295C are arranged in the left-right direction and are inserted into the elongated holes 296B described later in the second rack member 296.

The mounting portion 295D is composed of a cylindrical boss or the like having a fitting hole. The fitting rod 282A of the second character member 282 is fitted into the fitting hole of the mounting portion 295D. The fitting rod 282A passes through the through hole 269B of the decorative body 269, the through hole 271A of the cover body 271, the through hole 277A of the cover body 277, and the notch 275B of the LED substrate 275, and is fitted with the mounting portion 295D. As will be described later, the second character member 282 moves in the left-right direction as the first rack member 295 moves. Therefore, the shape of the notch 275B is a shape that does not hinder the movement of the second character member 282, and the through hole 269B, the through hole 271A, and the through hole 277A cause the movement of the second character member 282. It is long in the left-right direction to allow it.

The detection piece 295E is a portion protruding upward and is a detection target by the detection sensor 259. The detection sensor 259 may be, for example, the same as the detection sensor 223. The presence (that is, the initial position) of the detection piece 295E is detected when the first rack member 295 is in the initial position (initial state of the movable body 250) (see FIG. 10). That is, the detection sensor 259 detects the initial position of the first rack member 295 (the initial state of the movable body 250).

The teeth 295F extend in the left-right direction and mesh with the first pinion gear 291 from above.

The elongated holes 295I and 295J are elongated in the left-right direction, and the protrusion 255I is inserted into the elongated hole 295I, and the protrusion 255J is inserted into the elongated hole 295J. The width (length in the vertical direction) of the elongated holes 295I and 295J is substantially the same as the diameter of the columnar protrusions 255I and 255J (the diameter is slightly shorter). Therefore, the first rack member 295 can slide in the left-right direction, but does not move in any other direction.

The second rack member 296 has a long shape in the left-right direction and is arranged in front of the first rack member 295. The second rack member 296 functions as a rack that moves in the left-right direction as the second pinion gear 292 rotates, as will be described later. The second rack member 296 includes teeth 296A, elongated holes 296B, and mounting portion 296C.

The tooth 296A extends in the left-right direction and meshes with the large-diameter second gear of the second pinion gear 292 from below.

In the elongated hole 296B, protrusions 295B and 295C arranged side by side in the left-right direction are inserted. The width (length in the vertical direction) of the elongated hole 296B is substantially the same as the diameter of the columnar protrusions 295B and 295C (the diameter is slightly shorter). Therefore, the second rack member 296 can slide in the left-right direction, but does not move in any other direction.

The protrusions 295B and 295C are provided on the left side of the first rack member 295, and the elongated holes 296B are provided on the right side of the second rack member 296. Therefore, the left end of the second rack member 296 is located on the left side of the left end of the first rack member 295. The left side portion of the second rack member 296 passes through the through hole 267B of the first mounting member 267 (through hole 269A of the decorative body 269) (see FIGS. 10 and 11).

The mounting portion 296C is composed of a cylindrical boss or the like having a fitting hole. The fitting rod 281A of the first character member 281 is fitted into the fitting hole. The mounting portion 296C is provided at the left end of the second rack member 296 and is always exposed from the decorative body 269 or the like (see FIGS. 10 and 11). Therefore, unlike the second character member 282, the first character member 281 is fitted and attached to the attachment portion 296C without passing through a through hole or the like.

The third rack member 297 has a substantially L-shape, and functions as a rack that moves in the left-right direction as the first pinion gear 291 rotates. The third rack member 297 includes protrusions 297A to 297C, a mounting portion 297D, teeth 297F, and elongated holes 297K and 297L.

The protrusions 297A to 297C are formed of a columnar boss or the like that protrudes rearward. The protrusion 297A rotatably supports the third pinion gear 293. Specifically, the protrusion 297A is supported by inserting the protrusion 297A into the through hole at the center of the third pinion gear 293. The third pinion gear 293 can rotate with the central axis of the protrusion 297A as the rotation axis. The protrusions 297B to 297C are arranged in the left-right direction and are inserted into the elongated holes 298B described later in the fourth rack member 298.

The mounting portion 297D is composed of a cylindrical boss or the like having a fitting hole. The fitting rod 283A of the third character member 283 is fitted into the fitting hole of the mounting portion 297D. The fitting rod 283A passes through the through hole 269C of the decorative body 269, the through hole 271B of the cover body 271, the through hole 277B of the cover body 277, and the notch 275B of the LED substrate 275, and is fitted with the mounting portion 297D. As will be described later, the third character member 283 moves in the left-right direction as the third rack member 297 moves. Therefore, the shape of the notch 275B is a shape that does not hinder the movement of the third character member 283, and the through hole 269C, the through hole 271B, and the through hole 277B cause the movement of the third character member 283. It is long in the left-right direction to allow it.

The tooth 297F extends in the left-right direction and meshes with the first pinion gear 291 from below.

The elongated holes 297K and 297L are elongated in the left-right direction, and the protrusion 255K is inserted into the elongated hole 297K, and the protrusion 255L is inserted into the elongated hole 295L. The width (length in the vertical direction) of the elongated holes 297K and 297L is substantially the same as the diameter of the columnar protrusions 255K and 255L (the diameter is slightly shorter). Therefore, the third rack member 297 can slide in the left-right direction, but does not move in any other direction.

The fourth rack member 298 has a long shape in the left-right direction and is arranged in front of the third rack member 297. The fourth rack member 298 functions as a rack that moves in the left-right direction as the third pinion gear 293 rotates, as will be described later. The fourth rack member 298 includes teeth 298A, elongated holes 298B, and a mounting portion 298C.

The teeth 298A extend in the left-right direction and mesh with the large-diameter second gear of the third pinion gear 293 from below.

In the elongated hole 298B, protrusions 297B and 297C arranged side by side in the left-right direction are inserted. The width (length in the vertical direction) of the elongated hole 298B is substantially the same as the diameter of the columnar protrusions 297B and 297C (the diameter is slightly shorter). Therefore, the fourth rack member 298 can slide in the left-right direction, but does not move in any other direction.

The protrusions 297B and 297C are provided on the right side of the third rack member 297, and the elongated holes 298B are provided on the left side of the fourth rack member 298. Therefore, the right end of the fourth rack member 298 is located on the right side of the right end of the third rack member 297. The left side portion of the fourth rack member 298 passes through the through hole 268B of the second mounting member 268 (through hole 269D of the decorative body 269) (see FIGS. 10 and 11).

The mounting portion 298C is composed of a cylindrical boss or the like having a fitting hole. The fitting rod 284A of the fourth character member 284 is fitted into the fitting hole. The mounting portion 298C is provided at the right end of the fourth rack member 298 and is always exposed from the decorative body 269 or the like (see FIGS. 10 and 11). Therefore, unlike the third character member 283, the fourth character member 284 is fitted and attached to the attachment portion 298C without passing through a through hole or the like.

(Operation of predetermined mechanism X, etc.)
The operation and the like of the predetermined mechanism X will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. The state shown in FIG. 10 (the state in which the first rack member 295 and the second rack member 296 are in the rightmost position and the third rack member 297 and the fourth rack member 298 are in the leftmost position) is defined as the initial state. To do.

When the drive motor 273 rotates the rotation shaft forward (leftward rotation) from the initial state of FIG. 10, the first pinion gear 291 fitted to the rotation shaft also rotates forward. Due to this forward rotation, the first rack member 295 having teeth 295F meshing with the first pinion gear 291 from above slides to the left, and the third rack member 297 having teeth 297F meshing with the first pinion gear 291 from below slides to the right. ..

When the first rack member 295 moves to the left, the second pinion gear 292 supported by the protrusion 295A of the first rack member 295 also moves to the left. Since the small-diameter first gear of the second pinion gear 292 meshes with the immovable rack portion 255A from below, the second pinion gear 292 moves to the left while rotating in the reverse direction (rotating clockwise). Since the large-diameter second gear of the second pinion gear 292 meshes with the teeth 296A of the second rack member 296 from above, the second rack member 296 also moves to the left due to the movement and reverse rotation of the second pinion gear 292. To do. Due to the use of the second pinion gear 292, the amount of movement of the second rack member 296 is larger than that of the first rack member 295.

When the third rack member 297 moves to the right, the third pinion gear 293 supported by the protrusion 297A of the third rack member 297 also moves to the right. Since the small-diameter first gear of the third pinion gear 293 meshes with the immovable rack portion 255B from below, the third pinion gear 293 moves to the right while rotating forward. Since the large-diameter second gear of the third pinion gear 293 meshes with the teeth 298A of the fourth rack member 298 from above, the fourth rack member 298 also moves to the right due to the movement and reverse rotation of the third pinion gear 293. To do. Due to the use of the third pinion gear 293, the amount of movement of the fourth rack member 298 is larger than that of the third rack member 297.

The first character member 281 is attached to the leftmost second rack member 296 (mounting portion 296C), and the second character member 282 is attached to the second rack member 295 (attachment portion 295D) second from the left. The third character member 283 is attached to the third rack member 297 (mounting portion 297D), which is the third from the left, and the fourth character member 284 is attached to the rightmost fourth rack member 298 (attachment portion 298C). Is attached, so that each character member moves as each rack member moves.

FIG. 11 shows a state after the first to fourth rack members 295 to 298 and the first to fourth character members 281 to 284 have moved. The amount of movement of the second rack member 296 (first character member 281) is larger than that of the first rack member 295 (second character member 282). The amount of movement of the fourth rack member 298 (fourth character member 284) is larger than that of the third rack member 297 (third character member 283). Due to such a relationship, in this embodiment, the distance between each member when the first character member 281 to the fourth character member 284 moves increases with the same degree of change (at any timing during movement). Each member is lined up at approximately equal intervals).

The through holes 269B and through holes 269C of the decorative body 269 allow the second character member 282 and the third character member 283 to move without interfering with the decorative body 269 and the like. Further, since the mounting portion 296C to which the first character member 281 is attached and the mounting portion 298C to which the fourth character member 284 is attached are always outside the decorative body 269, they also do not interfere with the decorative body 269 or the like. It is possible to move to. That is, the first character member 281 to the fourth character member 284 can move independently of the deformation of the decorative body 269.

In the state of FIG. 11, when the drive motor 273 reversely rotates its rotation axis, an operation opposite to the operation described above is performed, and the process returns to the initial state of FIG.

The drive motor 273 is controlled by the effect control board 12. By supplying the control signal to the drive motor 273, the effect control board 12 rotates the rotation axis of the drive motor 273 in the forward direction by a predetermined rotation angle, and changes from the state of FIG. 10 to the state of FIG. 11 in "LOVE". Change the spacing between letters (increase the spacing). Further, the effect control board 12 supplies a control signal to the drive motor 273 to rotate the rotation axis of the drive motor 273 in the reverse direction, and changes the spacing between the letters of LOVE from the state of FIG. 11 to the state of FIG. Reduce the interval). The effect control board 12 detects the detection piece 295E by the detection sensor 259 (when the detection signal is received from the detection sensor 259 or when the detection signal is received for a certain period of time), that is, each rack such as the first rack member 295. The drive of the drive motor 273 is terminated when the member or the like reaches the initial position (when the state shown in FIG. 10 is reached).

The effect control board 12 repeatedly rotates the rotation shaft of the drive motor 273 in the forward direction and in the reverse direction, and the spacing between the letters "LOVE" (the spacing between the first to fourth character members 281 to 284). ) May be continuously changed a plurality of times.

A detection sensor is provided at the position of the detection piece 295E in the state of FIG. 11, and the effect control board 12 detects that the current state is the state of FIG. 11 by detecting the detection piece 295E by the detection sensor. You may. The effect control board 12 may control the drive motor 273 based on the detection.

(Relationship between deformation of movable body 250 and light emission)
The relationship between the deformation of the movable body 250 and the light emitting mode of the movable body 250 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12A shows the initial state of the movable body 250. The movable body 250 (decorative body 269) at this time is not deformed. The effect control board 12 controls the drive motor 257 (FIG. 6 and the like), and changes the movable body 250 in the order of FIG. 12 (A) → (B) → (C) → (A) → (B) → ... (Thus, the decorative body appears to be beating with excitement) (Strictly speaking, the state of (A) is also inserted between (B) and (C) in FIG. This is because it is a state between the state of B) and the state of (C).) Further, when the movable body 250 is deformed, the effect control board 12 supplies a control signal to the LED board 275 via the board 253 to cause the LED 275A to emit light (that is, the decorative body 269 is illuminated from behind). .. In the following description, it is assumed that the brightness of the LED 275A is constant.

The effect control board 12 supplies a control signal to the LED board 283B or the like via the board 253 and / or the LED board 275 in accordance with the light emission of the LED 275A or regardless of the light emission, and the first to first steps are made. The four-character members 281 to 284 may be made to emit light individually or simultaneously to enhance the effect.

When the rotating shaft 257A of the drive motor 257 (FIG. 6 etc.) is rotated forward (clockwise) from the initial state, the first gear 261 also rotates forward as described above, via the second gear 262 and the third gear 263. The first slide member 265 and the first mounting member 267 move in a direction away from the second slide member 266 and the second mounting member 268 (see FIG. 12B). As a result, the decorative body 269 extends in the left-right direction (elastically deforms in such a manner that it is pulled from both the left and right directions). Then, the thickness of the decorative body 269 is reduced, the light transmittance is improved, and more light of the LED 275A is transmitted, so that the movable body 250 (decorative body 269) at this time looks brighter than in the initial state.

After that, when the rotating shaft 257A of the drive motor 257 (FIG. 6 etc.) is rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise rotation), the first gear 261 also rotates in the reverse direction via the second gear 262 and the third gear 263 as described above. The first slide member 265 and the first mounting member 267 and the second slide member 266 and the second mounting member 268 move in the approaching direction (see FIG. 12C). As a result, the decorative body 269 contracts in the left-right direction (elastically deforms in such a manner that it is pushed from both the left and right directions). Then, the thickness of the decorative body 269 becomes thicker, the light transmittance decreases, and the light of the LED 275A is transmitted less, so that the movable body 250 (decorative body 269) at this time is in the state of FIG. 12 (B). It looks darker than the initial state.

As described above, in this embodiment, the decorative body 269 of the movable body 250 expands and contracts in the left-right direction as shown in FIGS. 12 (A) to 12 (C), thereby changing the light transmittance and the decorative body. Since the brightness of the 269 changes according to its own beating movement, the effect of the effect is increased. The brightness of the LED 275A may be changed depending on the degree of deformation of the decorative body 269. For example, even if the brightness is increased when the light transmittance is high (FIG. 12 (B)) and the brightness is decreased when the light transmittance is low (FIG. 12 (C)). Good. As a result, the brightness of the decorative body 269 changes more greatly according to the heartbeat of the decorative body 269, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. The light from the LED 256A mounted on the LED substrate 256 illuminates the upper part of the decorative body 269. Therefore, in FIG. 12, which shows the state of the front surface of the decorative body 269, the state of being illuminated by the LED 256A is not shown. On the other hand, the player can visually recognize the upper part of the decorative body 269 illuminated by the light from the LED 256A. In the upper part of the decorative body 269, the light transmittance changes as the decorative body 269 expands and contracts in the left-right direction. Therefore, the brightness of the light from the LED 256A also changes according to the beating movement of the decorative body 269.

(Structure of LED board 256, etc.)
13A and 13B are views showing an LED substrate, (A) is a perspective view seen from the front, and (B) is a plan view seen from the arrow B in (A). 14A and 14B are views showing an LED substrate, FIG. 14A is a cross-sectional view of the cutting line XIVA-XIVA in FIG. 13B, and FIG. 14B is a cutting line XIVB-XIVB in FIG. 13B. It is a cross-sectional view of.

The LED board 256 has a board body 256B, a plurality of LEDs 256A soldered to the board body 256B, and a connector 256C. Hereinafter, the plurality of LEDs 256A and the connector 256C may be collectively referred to as electronic components 256D.

The substrate body 256B has a shape that matches the shape of the curved upper surface of the base body 255 on which it is installed. The substrate main body 256B has a curved portion 285 and a curved portion 287, and a non-curved portion 286 that is not curved. The curved portion 285 has a substantially bow-shaped curved shape in the cross section shown in FIG. 14 (A) cut by the cutting line XIVA-XIVA parallel to the left-right direction. The curved portion 287 has a shape substantially line-symmetrical with the curved portion 285 with respect to the center of the substrate main body 256B, and has a substantially bow-shaped curved shape in the cross section cut by the cutting line XIVA-XIVA. There is. The non-curved portion 286 connects both of the curved portion 285 and the curved portion 287. The non-curved portion 286 is not curved and is shown as a flat plate in the cross section cut by the cutting line XIVA-XIVA.

As shown in FIG. 14B, the curved portion 285 is not curved in a cross section cut by a cutting line XIVB-XIVB (cutting line orthogonal to the cutting line XIVA-XIVA) parallel to the front-rear direction and is a flat plate. It is illustrated in the shape. Similarly, the non-curved portion 286 and the curved portion 287 are not curved in the cross section cut by the cutting lines parallel to the front-rear direction.

In the LED substrate 256 of the present embodiment, five LEDs 256A are soldered to the curved portion 285, and five LEDs 256A and one connector 256C are soldered to the curved portion 287. On the other hand, the non-curved portion 286 is not provided with any electronic component 256D.

Next, a mounting mode of the electronic component 256D provided on the substrate main body 256B will be described. 15A and 15B are views showing an LED substrate, FIG. 15A is an enlarged view of the “XVA portion” in FIG. 13A, and FIG. 15B is a cross-sectional view seen from arrow B in FIG. ) Is a cross-sectional view seen from the arrow C in (A).

FIG. 15 Each figure focuses on one LED 256A provided on the substrate main body 256B. As shown in FIG. 15A, the LED 256A has a rectangular parallelepiped shape and is soldered to the mounting position Z0 on the substrate body 256B. The rectangular parallelepiped LED 256A can define a short direction having a short dimension and a longitudinal direction having a long dimension. In FIG. 15, Cartesian coordinates are defined with the mounting position Z0 as the origin, the lateral direction of the LED 256A being the X-axis direction, and the longitudinal direction being the Y-axis direction. The LED 256A is soldered onto the substrate body 256B so that the X-axis direction, which is the lateral direction, coincides with the left-right direction, and the Y-axis direction, which is the longitudinal direction, coincides with the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 15B, in the cross-sectional view cut along the cross-sectional lines parallel to the left-right direction, the substrate main body 256B is curved. The LED 256A is mounted on the board body 256B so that the X-axis in the lateral direction coincides with the tangent line on the board body 256B passing through the mounting position Z0. Two tangents are shown in FIG. 15B, the first being a tangent 288 passing through point Z1 on the substrate body 256B corresponding to point X1 advancing from point X0 in the −X axis direction. .. The second line is a tangent line 289 passing through the point Z2 on the substrate body 256B corresponding to the point X2 advanced from the point X0 in the + X axis direction. Looking at the tangent line 288, the X axis, and the tangent line 289 on the substrate body 256B in order, the direction of the straight line gradually changes. From this, it can be seen that the substrate main body 256B in the curved portion 285 has a curvature along the X-axis direction (the lateral direction of the LED 256A). The magnitude of the curvature of the substrate body 256B in the X-axis direction can be determined by the degree of change in the direction of the tangent line. If the change in the direction of the tangent line is large, the degree of curvature of the substrate body 256B is large, and the curvature in the X-axis direction is large. On the other hand, if the change in the angle of the tangent line is small, the degree of curvature of the substrate body 256B is small, and the curvature in the X-axis direction is small.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15C, the substrate main body 256B is not curved in the cross-sectional view cut along the cross-sectional lines parallel to the front-rear direction. The LED 256A is provided on the substrate body 256B so that the Y-axis in the longitudinal direction coincides with the tangent line on the substrate body 256B passing through the mounting position Z0. Further, in FIG. 15C, it corresponds to a tangent line passing through the point Z3 on the substrate main body 256B corresponding to the point Y1 advanced in the −Y axis direction from the point Y0, and the point Y2 extending in the + Y axis direction from the point Y0. The tangent line passing through the point Z4 on the substrate body 256B coincides with the Y axis. As described above, the direction of the tangent line on the substrate body 256B in FIG. 15C does not change even if the position on the Y axis is changed. From this, the substrate main body 256B has a curvature of 0 in the Y-axis direction (longitudinal direction of the LED 256A).

In this way, the LED 256A is soldered at the mounting position Z0 on the substrate body 256B in the lateral direction (X-axis direction) toward a large curvature and in the longitudinal direction (Y-axis direction) toward a small curvature direction. ing. In particular, in the present embodiment, the lateral direction (X-axis direction) of the LED 256A is the direction in which the curvature is maximized at the mounting position Z0, the longitudinal direction of the LED 256A (Y-axis direction) is defined as the minimum curvature at the mounting position Z0. (The direction in which the curvature is 0). In addition, also in the electronic component 256D other than the LED 256A shown by the “XVA portion” in FIG. 13 (A), at the mounting position on the substrate main body 256B, the lateral direction has a large curvature and the longitudinal direction has a small curvature. It is soldered so that it faces the front (longitudinal direction faces the front-back direction).

(Overall operation of the effect device 200)
The effect using the effect device 200 is executed, for example, at the time of super reach. For example, as shown in FIG. 16, the effect control board 12 operates the movable body 250 at a predetermined timing of super reach. Specifically, by controlling the drive motor 257 and the drive motor 273 at the same time, the decorative body 269 can be expanded and contracted in the left-right direction (see above for detailed operations), and the first character member 281 to the fourth character. The distance between the members of the member 284 is increased or decreased (see above for detailed operations). As a result, the operations (deformation of the movable body 250) as shown in FIGS. 16B and 16C are repeated. At this time, the effect control board 12 displays the effect images EG1 and EG2 emphasizing that the movable body 250 is beating on the effect display device 5 according to the deformation of the movable body 250.

After that, the effect control board 12 sets the movable body 250 in the initial state before deformation, and then controls the drive mechanism 210 (drive motor 215) to advance the movable body 250 to the advance position (detailed operation is described above. reference). At this time, the effect control board 12 displays the effect image EG3 that makes the drive motor 273 stand out on the effect display device 5 (FIG. 16 (D)). At this time, the mode of the movable body 250 may be changed (illumination of the decorative body 269, deformation of the decorative body 269, change in the character spacing of LOVE, etc.).

(Effects of this embodiment, etc.)
As in the above embodiment, the decorative body 269 is deformed by moving the left and right ends of the decorative body 269. Therefore, the decorative body 269 can be changed in an unprecedented form, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this way, by applying forces in a plurality of directions to the decorative body to change the decorative body, the decorative body is changed into a form (for example, complicatedly) that the player is interested in. It is possible to improve the effect of production.

Further, in this embodiment, the light transmittance of the decorative body 269 is changed by deforming the decorative body 269 (changing the thickness by the deformation). As a result, the brightness of the decorative body 269 that is illuminated later can be changed according to its shape. In particular, since the transmittance can be changed according to the degree of deformation of the decorative body 269, the brightness of the decorative body 269 can be continuously changed by continuously changing the shape of the decorative body 269. (No complicated control is required). Therefore, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, by changing the brightness of the LED 257A according to the deformation of the decorative body 269, the effect of the deformation of the decorative body 269 and the effect of the light can be simultaneously related and executed, so that the effect of the effect can be improved. The effect can be improved.

Further, in this embodiment, since the effect image EG1 or the like corresponding to the change of the decorative body 269 is displayed on the effect display device 5, the display image of the effect display device 5 can be linked with the deformation of the decorative body 269. , The effect can be improved.

Further, the upward movement of the movable body 250 is assisted by the elastic body 229. Further, the elastic body 229 acts as a resistance against the downward movement of the movable body 250. As a result, the load on the drive motor 215 due to the weight of the movable body 250 can be reduced, and the movable body 250 can be smoothly moved in the vertical direction.

Further, the electronic component 256D on the curved substrate body 256B is soldered at the mounting position in the lateral direction toward the direction in which the curvature of the LED substrate 256 is large and in the longitudinal direction toward the direction in which the curvature of the LED substrate 256 is small. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent cracks from occurring in the solder that fixes the electronic component 256D. Such an effect is not limited to the manufacturing process of the LED substrate, and even in the LED substrate formed by soldering electronic components to the curved substrate body, the electronic components such as LEDs are soldered to the flat plate-shaped substrate body and then. The same effect can be obtained with an LED substrate formed by bending the substrate body.

It is difficult to bend an electronic component such as an LED according to the shape of a curved substrate body from the viewpoint of cost and manufacturing. Therefore, the non-curved electronic component is soldered to the substrate body, but an unavoidable gap is generated between the non-curved electronic component and the curved substrate body. Due to this unavoidable gap, when an electronic component is soldered to a curved substrate body, the fixing by the solder is insufficient, and unexpected thermal stress or stress concentration occurs in the solder. As a result, cracks are likely to occur in the solder that fixes the electronic components. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the longitudinal direction of the electronic component is directed to the direction in which the curvature of the substrate body is small, so that the gap generated between the electronic component and the substrate body is made small. On the other hand, by directing the lateral side of the electronic component to the direction in which the curvature of the substrate body is large, the electronic component is arranged so that the gap is as small as possible even in the direction in which a large gap is generated. As a result, the soldering of electronic components can be ensured, unexpected thermal stress and stress concentration can be reduced, and cracks generated in the solder can be suppressed.

Next, a case where a flat plate-shaped substrate body to which electronic components are soldered is bent to form a curved LED substrate will be described. When an electronic component is soldered to a substrate body on a flat plate, there is no gap between the electronic component and the board body, and defects in soldering are unlikely to occur. However, when the substrate body to which the electronic components are soldered is bent, a tension region and a compression region are formed on the substrate body with the neutral axis as a boundary. At this time, the surface of the substrate body on the tension region side expands, and the surface on the compression region side shrinks. However, electronic components and solder on the surface of the substrate body try to resist expansion and contraction of the surface of the substrate body. Therefore, cracks are likely to occur in the solder by bending the substrate body. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the electronic component is arranged so that the lateral direction coincides with the direction in which the surface expands and contracts greatly due to the bending process of the substrate body (the direction in which the tensile force and the compressive force act and the direction in which the curvature is large). Is placed. As a result, the range in which the surface of the substrate body restrains expansion and contraction can be reduced, the stress acting on the solder can be reduced, and cracks generated in the solder can be suppressed.

Further, a substantially triangular notch 269H and a notch 269I are formed in the upper part of the overhanging portion 269E of the decorative body 269. When a compressing force acts on the decorative body 269 from the left-right direction, the notch 269H and the notch 269I close the notched portion. As a result, the decorative body 269 can be easily deformed by the compressive force from the left-right direction, and the operation of the decorative body 269 can be made natural.

Further, the first slide member 265 and the first mounting member 267 are connected so as to sandwich the left end portion of the decorative body 269, and the second slide member 266 and the second mounting member 268 are connected to the right end portion of the decorative body 269. Are connected with the. By connecting the decorative body 269 in a sandwiched state in this way, it is possible to suppress a problem that stress is concentrated on a specific place and the decorative body 269 is torn when the decorative body 269 is deformed. ..

(Modification example)
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment and the like, and various modifications and applications can be made to the above-mentioned embodiment and the like. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and is a part described in the above-described embodiment so as to be able to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have the structure of. Examples of modifications of the above-described embodiment will be illustrated below, but at least a part of each modification can be combined as long as there is no contradiction.

(Modification example 1)
In the above, the driving of the first character member 281 to the fourth character member 284 and the deformation of the decorative body 269 are performed by independent and separate mechanisms, but both may be interlocked. For example, the second rack portion 296 and the fourth rack member 298 are directly fixed to the through holes 269A and 269D of the decorative body 269, or are fixed to the first mounting member 267 and the second mounting member 268 to form the second rack. The slide of the part 296 and the fourth rack member 298 and the deformation of the decorative body 269 may be interlocked with each other. In such a case, the drive motor 257 and various members for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 257 become unnecessary. With such a configuration, a plurality of types of members used for the effect can be easily interlocked, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

(Modification 2)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 may perform a so-called initial operation at the time of initial setting when the power is turned on. In the initial operation, (1) whether the movable body 250 or the like is in the initial state (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is normally turned off, it can be said that the movable body 250 is in the initial state) is used by various sensors. If it is not in the initial state, the process of returning the movable body 250 etc. to the initial state is executed, and (2) whether or not the movable body 250 etc. moves normally is determined by the clerk at the amusement park or at the time of shipment from the factory. A process of actually operating the movable body 250 or the like to return it to the initial state (for example, the same operation as when performing an effect using the movable body 250 or the like during a game) so that a worker or the like can visually check it. (Processing to be performed by the movable body 250 or the like), and at least one of the above are included. The initial state is, for example, (1) a state when no external force is applied to the decorative body 269 or the like, (2) a normal state where there is no abnormality (for example, a state when the power is turned on normally without any abnormality). , The state in which the effect is not executed), as long as it is in the state before the decorative body 269 or the like operates. Then, when the initial operation at the time of turning on the power (movement of the movable body 250, deformation of the decorative body 269, movement of the first character member 281 to the fourth character member 284, etc.) is performed, the effect control board 12 is used for the effect display device 5. In addition, the image to be displayed when the effect normally performed by the movable body 250 such as the effect image is not displayed (for example, the image is not displayed on the effect display device 5 or only a predetermined initial screen is displayed). Or to display the recovery screen when the power is restored). Thereby, the visibility of the operation of the movable body 250 when the power is turned on can be improved (in particular, the above (2)).
During initial operation including).

(Modification example 3)
Even if an external force required for the deformation does not act during the deformation of the decorative body 269 (for example, even if the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like), the decorative body 269 is being deformed due to its elastic force (restoring force). It may be closer to the initial state (initial shape) than the state. For example, a stepping motor having a weak detent torque may be used as the drive motor 257 to increase the elastic force of the decorative body 269 (restoring force required to rotate the rotating shaft 257A of the drive motor 257 that is not turned on). It is good that the decorative body 269 has). The decorative body 269 and the first character member 281 to the fourth character member 284 may approach the initial state when the power is turned off by the force of an elastic body such as a spring provided in the mechanism for driving them. .. The approaching to the initial state includes both the return of the decorative body 269 to the initial state and the return to the state (shape) close to the initial state. If the decorative body 269 approaches the initial state to some extent, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience caused by the deformed decorative body 269 being left as it is (for example, the decorative body 269 is difficult to return to the initial state due to an unintended habit).

(Modification example 4)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 may include means for monitoring the voltage of the power supply. In this case, when the voltage value of the power supply falls below a predetermined value, it is determined that the power supply is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the movable body 250 and the drive mechanism 210 are controlled to bring the effect device 200 closer to the initial state. May be done. The predetermined value may be a value that secures the voltage required to operate the movable body 250 and the drive mechanism 210 (various drive motors) (a value larger than the threshold value when determining the power failure at the end). It is good to say). For example, the effect control board 12 controls the drive motor 273 to bring the first slide member 265 and the first mounting member 267 and the second slide member 266 and the second mounting member 268 closer to their original positions (move to the initial position). (Including moving to the vicinity of the initial position, etc.). As a result, a force in the direction of returning the decorative body 269 to the initial state can be applied to the decorative body 269, and the decorative body 269 can be brought closer to the initial state (at this time, the first character member 281 to the fourth character). The member 284 should also be brought closer to the initial state). The explanation of "initial state" and "approaching the initial state" and the effect of the modified example 4 are based on the modified example 3. A backup power supply or the like is provided, and after the power supply is actually cut off and power is no longer supplied from the outside, the effect control board 12 controls the drive motor 273 by the backup power supply to control the first slide member. The 265 and the first mounting member 267 and the second slide member 266 and the second mounting member 268 may be brought closer to their original positions. The decorative body 269 does not have to be an elastic body. In this case, it is preferable to perform the above process for bringing the effect device 200 closer to the initial state.

(Modification 5)
The decorative body 269 may have a force acting in the vertical direction or an oblique direction, or may have a force acting in three or more directions. The decorative body 269 may be one in which a force acts in one direction. When a force in a plurality of directions is applied to the decorative body 269, the forces in the plurality of directions may be applied at the same time or may be applied at different timings. For example, a force may be applied to the right end portion of the decorative body 269 and then a force may be applied to the left end portion. The magnitude of the force in multiple directions may be the same, or at least one may be different from the others. The direction and number of the acting forces, the timing of action, etc. may be adjusted to the shape of the decorative body 269 (in the above embodiment, since the shape of the decorative body 269 is a heart shape, the decorative body 269 beats. To make it look like it is doing, the force is applied at the same time on the left and right).

The decorative body 269 may, for example, set the initial state in FIG. 12 (A) and shift only to the state in FIG. 12 (B). As described above, the decorative body 269 does not expand and contract from the initial state, but may only extend from the initial state (it may be specified by the rotation angle of the drive motor or the like). Further, the decorative body 269 may, for example, set the initial state in FIG. 12 (A) and shift only to the state in FIG. 12 (C). As described above, the decorative body 269 may only perform the operation of contracting from the initial state (it may be specified by the rotation angle of the drive motor or the like).

(Modification 6)
For example, when the light transmittance of the decoration body 269 is the first transmittance due to the extension of the decoration body 269, the brightness of the LED 257A (illumination from the rear) is set as the first brightness, and the decoration body 269 shrinks. When the light transmittance of the decorative body 269 is a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance, the brightness of the LED 257A may be set to a second brightness higher than the first brightness. For example, the brightness may be low in FIG. 12 (B) and high in the case of FIG. 12 (C). By doing so, for example, even if the decorative body 269 is deformed, the apparent brightness of the decorative body 269 may not change. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, the speed of movement of the decorative body 269 (such as the speed of beating) may be changed, and the change in the brightness of the LED 257A may be adjusted to match the speed of the movement. For example, when the brightness (brightness) is changed according to the movement (beat) of the decorative body 269, the faster the movement, the faster the change in brightness (faster the cycle of light and darkness), and the slower the movement, the faster the change. The change in brightness may be slowed down (the cycle of light and dark may be slowed down). For example, by making the relationship between the state of the decorative body 269 and the brightness at that time always the same, the deformation period of the decorative body 269 and the period of change in the brightness of the LED 257A can be matched. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced. The emission color of the LED 257A may be changed in addition to or in addition to the change in brightness (the faster the color, the darker the color, etc.). Various modes (shape, color, blinking cycle, size, number of images, etc.) of the effect images EG1 and EG2 displayed on the effect display device 5 may be changed according to the speed of movement of the decorative body 269. (The effect image may be changed to another image according to the speed of movement of the decoration body 269). The brightness and emission color (illumination color) of the LED 257A, the mode of the effect image, etc. are changed according to the mode of movement of the decorative body 269 (direction of movement (extension / contraction direction, etc.), amount of movement, speed of movement, etc.). May be good.

(Modification 7)
The effect using the effect device 200 may be executed not only when the effect of the super reach is executed, but also in the advance notice effect, the look-ahead advance notice, the effect in the big hit game state, and the like. An appropriate shape or the like of the movable body 250 can be adopted. The present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines such as slot machines and enclosed gaming machines.

(Modification 8)
The above-mentioned LED substrate 256 has a curvature in the left-right direction, but does not have a curvature in the front-rear direction orthogonal to the left-right direction. The electronic components on the substrate body are arranged in the longitudinal direction toward the front-rear direction where the curvature is zero. The present invention can be applied not only to a substrate having such a shape, but also to a case where an electronic component is soldered to a substrate having a curvature in any direction. 17A and 17B are views showing another example of the LED substrate, where FIG. 17A is a plan view and FIG. 17B is a sectional view taken along line BB in (A). 18A and 18B are views showing another example of the LED substrate, FIG. 18A is a cross-sectional view of the cutting line XVIIIA-XVIIIA in FIG. 17A, and FIG. It is an enlarged view of.

The LED substrate 300 includes a substrate main body 301, a plurality of LEDs 302 soldered to the substrate main body 301, and a connector 303 (hereinafter, these may be simply referred to as electronic components 304). ..

The substrate main body 301 is different from the above-mentioned LED substrate 256 in that the substrate main body 301 has a rectangular shape in a plan view and its surface is curved in any direction. The substrate main body 301 has a highly curved high-curved section 311 and a low-curved section having a smaller curvature than the high-curved section 311 in the cross section shown in FIG. 17B cut along the cutting lines BB parallel to the left-right direction. It has 310 and a low curvature section 312. The low-curvature section 310 and the low-curve section 312 have a line-symmetrical relationship with respect to the center of the LED substrate 300. On the other hand, the substrate main body 301 is also curved in the cross section shown in FIG. 18A cut by the cutting lines XVIIIA-XVIIIA parallel to the front-rear direction. However, the degree of curvature is smaller than the degree of curvature in any section of the cross section shown in FIG. 17 (B). That is, the substrate main body 301 of the LED substrate 300 has a curved surface having a large curvature of the cross section cut by the cutting line parallel to the left-right direction and a small curvature of the cross section cut by the cutting line parallel to the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 17A, the LED 302 is defined with a lateral direction X1 and a longitudinal direction X2. In the LED 302, the lateral direction X1 coincides with the direction in which the curvature of the substrate body 301 is large (FIG. 17B), and the longitudinal direction Y1 coincides with the direction in which the curvature of the substrate body 301 is small (FIG. 18 (FIG. 18)). A)) Arranged. By arranging the LED 302 in this way, it is possible to suppress cracks that occur in the solder that fixes the LED 302, as in the above embodiment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 17A, the connector 303 is defined with the lateral direction X2 and the longitudinal direction Y2. The dimensions of the connector 303 in the lateral direction and the dimensions in the longitudinal direction are both larger than the respective dimensions of the LED 302. In the connector 303, the lateral direction X2 coincides with the direction in which the curvature of the substrate body 301 is large (FIG. 17B), and the longitudinal direction Y2 coincides with the direction in which the curvature of the substrate body 301 is small (FIG. 17). (A)) Arranged. As a result, cracks that occur in the solder that fixes the connector 303 can be suppressed. Further, as shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 17B, the connector 303 is soldered to the low curvature section 312 having a small curvature, and is not soldered to the high curvature section 311. As described above, the various dimensions of the connector 303 are larger than the dimensions of the LED 302. Therefore, in order to make the gap between the connector 303 and the substrate main body 301 smaller, it is soldered to a portion having a small curvature. This does not preclude that the LED 302 is soldered to the low curvature section 312. That is, the smaller the size of the electronic component, the more the soldering to the portion having the larger curvature is allowed. On the other hand, the larger the size of the electronic component, the more the soldered portion is limited to the portion having the smaller curvature.

Although LEDs and connectors have been described as examples of electronic components to be soldered to a substrate, the present invention is also applied to other electronic components such as transistors, resistors, diodes, and capacitors. be able to.

(Modification 9)
Further, in the above-mentioned LED substrate, since the direction having a large curvature and the direction having a small curvature coincide with each other between the mounting locations of a plurality of electronic components, the longitudinal direction of each electronic component is also regularly aligned in the front-rear direction. Was soldered. However, the present invention can also be applied to a substrate in which the substrate body is twisted and curved in various directions. Also in this case, at the mounting position of the electronic component, the electronic component may be soldered so that the longitudinal direction coincides with the direction in which the curvature is large and the lateral direction coincides with the direction in which the curvature is small.

(Modification example 10)
As shown in FIG. 18B, in the curved LED substrate 300, the mode is different between the wiring 330 on the surface on the bending portion 301a side and the wiring 340 on the surface on the bending portion 301b side. You may. Here, the bending portion 301a means a portion on which a tensile force acts on the neutral axis when the substrate main body 301 is bent, and the bending portion 301b means a portion on which a compressive force acts on the neutral axis as a boundary. Refers to the part. The wiring 330 on the surface of the bent portion 301a receives a tensile force when bending the LED substrate 300 and a thermal stress when soldering an electronic component. In order to prevent defects such as breakage in the wiring 330 due to these external forces, each cross section of the wiring 330 arranged on the bending portion 301a side is arranged on the bending portion 301b side. It is larger than the cross section of the wiring 340. As a result, it is possible to prevent the solder 320 from being cracked due to the disconnection of the wiring 330. On the other hand, a compressive force mainly acts on the wiring 340 on the surface of the curved portion 301b side, but problems such as breakage of the wiring 340 are unlikely to occur due to the compressive force. Therefore, each cross section of the wiring 340 arranged on the bending portion 301b side can be made smaller than the cross section of the wiring 330 on the extending portion 301a side.

The difference between the cross section of the wiring 330 and the cross section of the wiring 340 is not limited to the case where the substrate is different in a curved state as shown in FIG. 18 (B). For example, in a flat substrate before bending, the cross section is different by the amount of expansion and contraction of the wiring, and when the substrate is curved after that, the wiring of the extension portion and the wiring of the contraction portion have almost the same cross section. It may be configured as such. Further, as a difference in wiring between the bent portion and the contracted portion, not only the size of the cross section of one wiring but also the number of wirings, the material of the wirings, and the like may be different. For example, the cross section of each wiring may be made the same size in the bent portion and the contracted portion, and the number of wires in the extended portion may be larger than the number of wires in the curved portion. Further, the wiring of the bending portion may be formed by using a material that is easier to stretch than the wiring of the bending portion. When soldering an electronic component to each of the bent portion and the bent portion, the amount of solder of the electronic component arranged in the bent portion is calculated from the amount of soldered of the electronic component arranged in the bent portion. May be more. As a result, cracks generated in the solder can be suppressed.

(Modification 11)
Further, in the LED substrate provided in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to realize an appropriate arrangement of electronic components capable of suppressing solder cracks by considering the functions and performance of the electronic components to be mounted. 19A and 19B are views for explaining another example of the LED substrate, FIG. 19A is a diagram in which electronic components are arranged without considering the curvature of the substrate body, and FIG. 19B is a diagram in which electronic components are arranged from the arrangement of (A). It is the figure which changed the arrangement of parts. The substrate main body 401a shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B has the same shape as the substrate main body 301 shown in FIG. That is, the LED substrate 400a has a highly curved high-curvature section 411 with a large curvature, and a low-curvature section 410 and a low-curvature section 412 having a smaller curvature than the high-curvature section 411. Further, the substrate main body 401a is curved in the front-rear direction as well, but the degree of curvature is smaller than that of the low-curved section 410 and the low-curved section 412.

As shown in FIG. 19A, LEDs 420a to 420g, resistors 430a to 430b, and LEDs 421a to 421c are mounted on the substrate body 401a of the LED substrate 400a. The LEDs 421a to LED421c have higher brightness of the emitted light and larger dimensions than the LEDs 420a to 420g. Further, the resistor 430a and the resistor 430b each have the same resistance value and the same dimensions. Here, for example, it is judged that the solder for fixing the electronic components in the low-curvature section 410 and the low-curvature section 412 is unlikely to crack because the degree of curvature of the substrate main body 401a is small, and the high-curvature section 411 is set. It is assumed that the solder for fixing the LEDs 420c to 420e is judged to have a low possibility of cracking because the size of the electronic component itself is small. On the other hand, it is assumed that there is a high possibility that cracks will occur in the solder that fixes the LED 421b in the highly curved section 411 and the resistors 430a and 430b. In this case, it is necessary to change the type and arrangement of the electronic components shown in FIG. 19A to suppress solder cracks.

Since it is unlikely that cracks will occur in the solder fixing the LEDs 420a to 420g, it is not necessary to change the position or type of the electronic component. However, as shown in FIG. 19B, the LED 422a may be provided at an intermediate position instead of the LED 420a and the LED 420b. The LED 422a to be arranged in this way is selected from those that emit light having the same brightness as the combined brightness of the lights emitted from the LED 420a and the LED 420b. Although the LED 422a has a larger dimension than the LED 420a and the LED 420b, it is judged that cracks are unlikely to occur in the solder in the low curvature section 410. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 19B, the LED 422b may be provided at an intermediate position instead of the LED 420f and the LED 420g.

As shown in FIG. 19B, four LEDs 422a can be provided in place of the LEDs 421b provided in the highly curved section 411, where cracks are likely to occur in the solder to be fixed. These LEDs 422a are selected from among the LEDs whose combined brightness of the four lights is comparable to the brightness of the light emitted from the LED 421b alone. The dimensions of the four LEDs 422a are smaller than the dimensions of the LED 421b, and the solder to be fixed is less likely to crack. In this way, by substituting a plurality of small-sized LEDs (electronic parts) for the large-sized LEDs (electronic parts) without reducing the brightness of the light as a whole (without reducing the function), soldering is performed. It is possible to suppress the cracks that occur in the solder. Further, the LED 422a having a small size is mounted around the mounting position of the substitute LED 421b. Therefore, the mode of the light emitted from the four LEDs 422a and the mode of the light emitted from the LED 421b alone can be made the same.

Further, when it is judged that the solder for fixing the resistor 430a provided in the highly curved section 411 is likely to have a crack, the crack is generated by changing the wiring or the like formed on the substrate main body 401a. The resistor 430a can be moved to a position where it is difficult to move. That is, as shown in FIG. 19B, the mounting position of the resistor 430a is changed from the high-curved section 411 to the low-curved section 410. This makes it possible to suppress cracks that occur in the solder that fixes the resistor 430a.

Further, unlike the resistor 430a, when it is difficult to change the mounting position, a plurality of small resistors can be substituted without changing the mounting position. As shown in FIG. 19B, two small resistors 431a can be provided in place of the resistor 430b provided in the highly curved section 411 where the solder is likely to crack. The two resistors 431a provided instead are selected from those in which the combined resistance value is about the same as the resistance value of the substitute resistor 430b. The size of the resistor 431a is smaller than the size of the resistor 430b, and the possibility of cracking in the solder is low. In this way, by substituting a plurality of small-sized resistors (electronic parts) for a large-sized resistor (electronic component) without changing the resistance value as a whole (without changing the function), Cracks that occur in the solder can be suppressed.

In this way, changing a large-sized electronic component to a plurality of small-sized electronic components to suppress cracks may result in the formation of a new curved portion in the substrate body, especially at the design stage of the LED substrate. In the case where a change is made to increase the degree of curvature or an unexpected crack occurs after manufacturing, the solder crack can be dealt with without making a major design change. As described above, as electronic components capable of dealing with solder cracks, not only the above-mentioned LEDs and resistors but also capacitors and connectors, for example, can be used.

(A configuration in which at least a part of the above embodiment is taken as an example)
Next, a configuration in which at least a part of the above-described embodiment and modification is used as an example, a further modification, and the like will be described. However, the following configuration may be partially omitted or only a part may be adopted. The gaming machine may be configured. Further, at least a part of each configuration may be combined.

(1) In a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1), a curved portion (for example, a curved portion 285 and a curved portion 287) having a curved surface is provided, and an electronic component (for example, a curved portion 287) is provided in the curved portion. For example, the electronic component includes a substrate (for example, LED substrate 256, LED substrate 300) in which a mounting location (for example, mounting position Z0) of the LED 256A and the connector 256C) is set, and the electronic component is located at the mounting location in the lateral direction. It is mounted at the mounting location so that the curvature is large (for example, as shown in FIG. 15B, the LED 256A is mounted so that the lateral direction X is the direction in which the curvature of the substrate body 256B is large). , A gaming machine characterized by that.

(2) Wiring is provided on the front surface (for example, the front surface of the LED substrate 300 on the bending portion 301a side) and the back surface (for example, the front surface of the LED substrate 300 on the bending portion 301b side), and the curvature is described. In the section, the wiring patterns of the front surface and the back surface may be different (for example, as shown in FIG. 18B, the cross-sectional sizes of the wiring 330 and the wiring 340 are different).

(3) A plurality of types of mounting locations for the electronic components are set on the board (for example, as shown in FIG. 17, electronic components such as an LED 302 and a connector 303 are mounted on the LED board 300. ), Among the plurality of types of the electronic components, the electronic component having a short lateral direction is attached to the mounting location having a larger maximum value of curvature (for example, the LED 302 having a short lateral direction is attached. The connector 303 is attached to the high-curved section 311 having a large curvature, but the connector 303 having a long lateral direction is not attached to the high-curved section 311 but is attached to the low-curved section 312).

(4) A specific decorative body (for example, decorative body 269) that performs a directing operation by being deformed by receiving a force, and
The first acting means (for example, the first slide member 265 and the first mounting member 267) that exerts a force on the specific decorative body in a first direction (for example, a left direction) and the specific decorative body. A second acting means (for example, a second slide member 266 and a second mounting member 268) for applying a force in a second direction (for example, the right direction) different from the first direction is provided.
Both the first acting means and the second acting means can exert a force on the specific decorative body in a predetermined period (for example, the first slide member 265 and the first mounting member 267, and the second slide. The member 266 and the second mounting member 268 slide at the same time to deform the decorative body 269),
A gaming machine characterized by that.

(5) A specific decorative body (for example, decorative body 269) that performs a directing operation by being deformed by receiving a force, and
The means of action for exerting a force on the specific decorative body (for example, the first slide member 265 and the first mounting member 267) and
The specific decorative body is provided with a light emitting means (for example, a first slide member 265 and a first mounting member 267) that irradiates the specific decorative body with light from the back side thereof.
Due to the action of the means of action, the amount of light transmitted through the specific decorative body changes (for example, the decorative body 269 is elastically deformed so as to be pulled to the left or right, so that its thickness changes and the light transmittance changes. Etc.),
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The means of action in (4) and (5) above may be anything that presses, pulls, or otherwise acts on the decorative body. The action direction may be any of the left-right direction, the front-back direction, the up-down direction, or a combination thereof (diagonal direction).

The above-mentioned (5) "change in the amount of transmitted light" includes that the specific decorative body is physically deformed by the action of the means of action and changes by changing its thickness and the like.

(6) The light emitting means may be made to emit light (for example, the brightness of the LED 275A may be changed according to the change of the decorative body 269) according to the light emitting pattern according to the effect operation of the specific decorative body. ..

(7) A special decorative body (for example, first character member 281 to fourth character member 284) provided on the front side of the specific decorative body is provided.
At least one of the first acting means and the second acting means exerts a force on the specific decorative body by driving the special decorative body to perform an effect operation, or the acting means. May exert a force on the specific decorative body (for example, modification 1) by driving the special decorative body to execute an effect operation.

The special decorative body does not have to represent characters or the like, and may be one such as the decorative body 269 that is deformed without including characters or the like to produce an effect. The special decoration may consist of a plurality of members. The first acting means and the second acting means may each exert a force on each of a plurality of members constituting the special decoration.

(8) A display device (for example, an effect display device 5) for displaying an effect is provided.
The display device may perform a corresponding display corresponding to the effect operation of the specific decorative body (see, for example, FIG. 16).

The "corresponding display corresponding to the effect operation of the specific decorative body" may be any one that constitutes one effect by the effect operation of the specific decorative body and the image or the like displayed by the corresponding display.

(9) When operating the specific decorative body when the power is turned on, the corresponding display may not be executed (for example, modification 2). The power is turned on by resetting or the like.

(10) The specific decorative body has elasticity, and when the external force does not act in the deformed state, the specific decorative body may approach the initial shape by the restoring force (for example, deformation example 3).

(11) When the power supply is stopped in the deformed state of the specific decorative body, the first acting means and the second acting means apply a force in a direction of returning the specific decorative body to the initial shape (for example, deformation). Example 4 etc.) or
When the power supply is stopped in the deformed state of the specific decorative body, the acting means may apply a force in a direction of returning the specific decorative body to the initial shape (for example, modification 4 or the like).

When the power supply is stopped, both when a drop in the power supply voltage before the power supply is stopped is detected and when the power supply is actually stopped are included.

(Circuit configuration of LED board 275 of movable body 250)
Next, the circuit configuration of the LED substrate 275 of the movable body 250 will be described. FIG. 20 is a front view showing a state in which the cover body is removed from the movable body. FIG. 21 is a detailed view showing the LED substrate 275 provided inside the movable body 250. 21 (A) is a component mounting surface (front surface) on which various surface mount components such as a plurality of LED elements and protective resistors are mounted, and FIG. 21 (B) is a back surface (also referred to as a solder surface) thereof. Is.

First, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the shape of the LED substrate 275 will be described. The LED substrate 275 has a substantially heart-shaped shape according to the shape of the movable body 250, and as described above, the cover. It can be fixed to the front of the body 271 without protruding from the cover body 271.

In the central portion of the LED substrate 275, as described above, in order to change the spacing between the drive motor 257 for deforming the synthetic rubber decorative body 269 covering the front surface of the movable body 250 and the character member of "LOVE". A large notch 275B for arranging the drive motor 273 of the LED substrate 275 is formed so as to substantially traverse the central portion of the LED substrate 275 in the vertical direction, and is located slightly below the center corresponding to the first rack member 295. Has a horizontally long shape so as not to hinder the movement of the second character member 282.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 21, the LED substrate 275 is separated from the first region on the right side of the LED substrate 275 and the second region on the left side of the LED substrate 275 by the notch 275B, and these first regions are separated from each other. The first region and the second region are significantly narrower than the first region and the second region, and have a special shape that is electrically and mechanically connected by the connection region 275C formed below the notch 275B.

The 275D is an insertion hole for preventing a member projecting forward from the back surface side of the LED substrate 275 from coming into contact with the LED substrate 275.

A large number of LEDs 275A are evenly mounted on the component mounting surface (surface) of the LED substrate 275 over almost the entire surface so that the player can see that the entire decorative body 269 is emitting light. The lighting / extinguishing of the LED 275A is controlled by the LED driving IC 602 mounted in the second region. The LED 275A is also mounted in the connection area 275C so that the lower end portion of the decorative body 269 is not darker than the other portions.

Further, on the component mounting surface (surface) of the LED board 275, not only a large number of LEDs 275A but also a protective resistor for limiting the current supplied to the LED 275A, a diode, a capacitor, and the like are mounted.

The LED drive IC 602 emits not only a large number of LEDs 275A mounted on the component mounting surface (surface) but also each character member of "LOVE" like the LED board 283B of the third character member 283 of "V". In order to make the first character member 281 to the fourth character member 284, each LED board provided inside is also connected via a connector, and the lighting / extinguishing of the LEDs mounted on each of these LED boards is also controlled. .. Therefore, on the component mounting surface (surface), the connector for connecting to each LED board provided inside the first character member 281 to the fourth character member 284 is also cut out in each of the first region and the second region. The 275Bs are mounted one by one so as to face the horizontally elongated portion.

Further, in the first region, there are two motor drive ICs 601 for driving the drive motors 257 and 273 arranged inside the notch 275B, and two for connecting the drive motors 257 and 273 and the LED substrate 275. The connector CN is mounted.

The motor drive IC 601 mounted in the first region and the LED drive IC 602 mounted in the second region receive the LED 275A by receiving the serial control signal including the operation instruction output from the effect control board 12. Etc. are turned on / off, and the rotation / stop of the drive motors 257 and 273 is controlled.

Further, on the back surface (solder surface) of the connection region 275C, a connector 603 having 13 connection terminals for connecting the LED substrate 275 and the substrate 253 is mounted. In this way, the connector 603 is mounted on the back surface by mounting it on the surface facing the substrate 253 arranged on the rear side of the movable body 250, thereby reducing the wiring length and as described above. This is because the LED 275A is mounted on the component mounting surface (surface) of the connection region 275C, so that the connector 603 cannot be mounted.

The connector 603 can be inserted and removed from the lower side of the LED substrate 275 with a fitting attached to the end of the connecting electric wire in order to facilitate the assembly of the movable body 250 and prevent the movable body 250 from coming off during assembly. It is supposed to be.

By being connected to the board 253 by the connector 603 in this way, the serial control signal output from the effect control board 12 is transmitted to the motor drive IC 601 and the LED drive IC 602 via the board 253 and the connector 603, and the LED board. It is transmitted through the wiring on the 275.

Here, a signal allocation form for each connection terminal in the connector 603 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. Note that FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the improved signal allocation form used in this embodiment, and FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the signal allocation form before the improvement.

In FIGS. 22 and 23, the left side of the figure is the mounting part of the connector No. 1 terminal, and the right side of the figure is the mounting part of the connector No. 13 (No. 12 in FIG. 23) terminal. The numbers correspond to the connectors "1" to "13" ("12" in FIG. 23) in the circuit diagrams of FIGS. 22 (B) and 23 (B).

As for the allocation of signals to the terminals of these connectors, as shown in FIG. 23 (B), in the circuit diagram, usually, a control circuit such as an LED having a large number is given priority over a control circuit such as a drive motor. By assigning the signals transmitted to the control circuits such as LEDs to the upper (low number) terminals, the circuit diagram is made so that the signal lines from the connector to each control circuit do not intersect, and there are multiple control signals. In some cases, it is common to group the other power signals at the top without interposing other signals between each control signal and assign the other power terminals to the low-numbered terminals. When implemented, it seems that there is no problem on the wiring diagram.

However, when the board is actually manufactured, as shown in FIG. 23A, since the connector 603 is mounted on the back surface of the connection region 275C, it is transmitted to the LED drive IC 602 mounted in the second region. The terminals of the LED drive serial signal pattern wiring L2 and L3 (ASIBADT, ASIBACLK) are assigned to the "2" and "3" terminals located on the opposite side of the second area, and further. , The terminals of the motor drive serial signal pattern wirings L5 and L6 (S1TXD, S1SCK) transmitted to the motor drive IC601 mounted in the first region are also assigned to the LED drive serial signal pattern wirings L2 and L3. Since it is assigned to the "5" and "6" terminals that are farther than the "2" and "3" terminals, the length of the wiring pattern on the LED board 275 becomes longer. In addition to being easily affected by noise, the pattern withdrawal direction is set to each serial in order to prevent interference between the LED drive serial signal pattern wiring L2 and L3 and the motor drive serial signal pattern wiring L5 and L6. The pattern becomes complicated, for example, each signal has a different direction. That is, the number of redundant signal pattern wirings increases, and there is a fear that a malfunction may occur due to noise or the like generated by these redundant signal pattern wirings.

Therefore, as a feature of the improved signal allocation form, as shown in FIG. 22 (A), the pattern wiring L2 of the motor drive serial signal transmitted to the motor drive IC 601 mounted in the first region , L3 (S1TXD, S1SKK) are assigned to the "2" and "3" terminals near the first area, and are transmitted to the LED drive IC 602 mounted in the second area. The two terminals of the LED drive serial signal pattern wiring L11 and L12 (ASIBADT, ASIBACLK) are assigned to the "11" and "12" terminals near the second region. The "1" number closest to the first area and the "13" number closest to the second area are used as the "4" terminal and the "11" terminal adjacent to the "3" terminal. The reason why it is set to "GND" together with the adjacent "10" terminal is to reduce the adverse effect of noise on the pattern wiring L2 and L3 of the motor drive serial signal and the pattern wiring L11 and L12 of the LED drive serial signal. However, when the adverse effect of noise is low, for example, the two terminals of the pattern wiring L2 and L3 of the motor drive serial signal are assigned to the "1" and "2" terminals, and the LED drive serial signal is used. The two terminals may be assigned to the "12" and "13" terminals.

Further, in this embodiment, the terminal between the motor drive serial signal terminal and the LED drive serial signal terminal is assigned to various electric power terminals, whereby the motor drive serial signal and the LED drive serial signal are assigned. The signal is isolated by various power terminals, and it is possible to prevent the motor drive serial signal and the LED drive serial signal from interfering with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22 (B), the VCS (DC5V generated by the power supply IC) for operating the motor drive IC601 and the LED drive IC602 at the terminals "5" and "9" ), And LEDs (DC12V generated by the power supply IC) are provided at the terminals "6" and "7", and inside the first character member 281 to the fourth character member 284 at the terminal "8". VSL (DC power obtained by rectifying and smoothing AC24V) is assigned to the LEDs mounted on each of the LED boards.

The "5" terminal near the first region of the connector 603, that is, the "5" terminal on the first region side of the connector 603 is the operating power of the motor drive IC 601 mounted in the first region. The power supply pattern wiring for supplying the VCS is connected, and the terminal "9" near the second area of the connector 603 provides the operating power VCS to the LED drive IC 602 mounted in the second area. It is connected to the power supply pattern wiring for supply, and by doing so, redundant pattern wiring is also reduced for the power supply pattern wiring.

In this embodiment, although the LED board 275 is a multi-layer board, the wiring pattern for the signal for transmitting the motor drive serial signal and the LED drive serial signal, the terminal No. 5 and the terminal "9" The present invention is not limited to this, although the multi-layer substrate is formed in the same layer as the wiring pattern for power supply to which the terminal number and the like are connected and the power such as VCS is supplied. By using a multilayer board in which the wiring pattern for signals and the wiring pattern for power supply are formed in different layers, it is possible to reduce the adverse effects of noise and the like from the wiring pattern for power supply on the wiring pattern for signals. You may try to do it.

Further, in this embodiment, a form in which a specific electronic component mounted in the connection area 275C is used as a connector is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these specific electronic components are a plurality of specific electronic components. Any one having terminals may be used, and for example, an integrated circuit (IC) having a plurality of terminals at different positions, for example, a motor drive serial signal (S1TXD, S1SCK) or an LED drive serial signal (ASIBADT, ASIBACLK) is transmitted. It may be an IC device for serial signals that can be (output).

Further, in this embodiment, the "2" and "3" terminals to which the motor drive serial signals (S1TXD, S1SCK) are assigned and the LED drive serial signals (ASIBADT, ASIBACLK) are assigned. By assigning the "4" and "10" terminals located between the "11" and "12" terminals to the LED, the influence of noise etc. is further reduced. The invention is not limited to this, and GND may not be assigned to the terminal between the terminal to which the serial signal for driving the motor is assigned and the terminal to which the serial signal for driving the LED is assigned. ..

Further, in this embodiment, the terminal between the terminal to which the serial signal for driving the motor is assigned and the terminal to which the serial signal for LED driving is assigned is used as a power supply terminal for a VCS or the like to drive the motor. Although the embodiment in which the influence of noise and the like is further reduced by isolating the serial signal for driving and the serial signal for driving the LED is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and these serial signals for driving the motor are assigned. The terminal between the terminal and the terminal to which the LED drive serial signal is assigned may not be a power terminal.

(Modification 12)
Here, a modification 12 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a circuit configuration as a modification 12 of the present invention.

(Board noise countermeasure 1)
For example, in the above-mentioned effect device 200 or the like, electronic components (for example, motor drive IC601, drive motor 257, 273, LED drive IC602, LED275A) in which noise, static electricity, etc. are mounted or connected to the LED substrate 275 of the movable body 250. ) Is adversely affected, there is a problem that the electronic components may malfunction.

Therefore, as a noise countermeasure, for example, the boss 844C in the first effect body 800 described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 34 near the substrate 801 is not subjected to plating treatment (or metal vapor deposition) so that the boss 844C is not subjected to plating treatment (or metal vapor deposition). The LED drive IC connected to the front LED 810 and the front LED 810 is prevented from being destroyed by the discharge due to the discharge from the boss 844C to the front LED 810. For example, FIG. 24 shows. When an electronic component such as a front LED 810 (angle LED) is mounted at a position close to the boss 844C as in the present modification 12 shown, an outer peripheral ground X is formed along the outer periphery of the substrate and the periphery of the electronic component is formed. Betagland electrodes Y having a relatively large area are provided so as to surround them, electronic components are mounted inside these Betagland electrodes Y, and these outer peripheral grounds X and Betagland electrodes Y are connected to one connection point on the substrate 801. For example, by making an electrical connection at one terminal of the substrate side connector KCN, even if a discharge from the boss 844C occurs, the mounted parts such as the front LED 810 and the LED drive IC are destroyed or malfunction. You may try to prevent it from happening.

In the above-described modification 12, the outer peripheral ground X and the betaland electrode Y are electrically connected at the terminal 1 of the substrate side connector KCN to electrically connect the outer peripheral ground X and the betaland electrode Y. Although the wiring on the mounting board can be reduced, these outer peripheral grounds X and the betaland electrode Y may be electrically connected at one connection point on the board different from the board side connector KCN. The outer peripheral ground X and the betaland electrode Y may be electrically connected to another substrate to which the outer peripheral ground X and the betaland electrode Y are connected via the substrate side connector KCN, or the outer peripheral ground X and the betaland electrode Y may have a sufficient area or the like. When the influence of the noise signal is low, the outer peripheral ground X and the betagland electrode Y are electrically connected by not electrically connecting the outer peripheral ground X and the betagland electrode Y. The wiring on the substrate may be reduced.

Further, as described above, the above-described modification 12 may be performed together with measures for not performing plating treatment (or metal vapor deposition) on the boss 844C. That is, both the above-mentioned countermeasures by the outer peripheral ground X and the betaland electrode Y and the countermeasures in which the boss 844C is not plated (or metal vapor deposition) may be implemented, or only one of the countermeasures may be taken. May be good.

When the shape of the substrate 801 can be changed, for example, the boss 844C and the substrate 801 are separated by a sufficient distance (specific distance) that makes it difficult for electric discharge to occur. And may be separated by a specific distance.

When the boss 844C is plated (or metal-deposited), an electrically insulating member is interposed between the plated (or metal-deposited) boss 844C and the substrate 801. Therefore, the discharge from the boss 844C to the substrate 801 may be prevented.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the modification 12 of the present invention, the bosses 844A to 844E of the decorative members 803 as conductive members having at least a part of conductivity and the electronic components (for example, the front LED 810). ~ 812, 813, etc.) are provided as a mounting board 801 and the bosses 844A to 844E are arranged so as to be adjacent to the outer periphery of the board 801. The board 801 is close to the electronic component to be mounted. It has a beta land electrode Y as a first ground region formed at a position, and an outer peripheral ground X as a second ground region formed between the beta land electrode Y and an end portion of the substrate 801. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the malfunction of the electronic components mounted on the substrate 801.

Further, the outer peripheral ground X and the beta land electrode Y are electrically connected only at one connection point on the substrate 801 (for example, one terminal of the substrate side connector KCN on the substrate 801). By doing so, the outer peripheral ground X and the betta land electrode Y are electrically connected, so that malfunctions of electronic components can be further reduced, and a substrate for electrically connecting the outer peripheral ground X and the betta land electrode Y can be obtained. Wiring in 801 can also be reduced.

Further, a substrate-side connector KCN for electrically connecting the substrate 801 to another substrate (for example, an effect control substrate 12) is mounted on the substrate 801. It is electrically connected on the other substrate. By electrically connecting the outer peripheral ground X and the betta land electrode Y in this way, malfunctions of electronic components can be further reduced, and wiring on the substrate 801 for electrically connecting the outer peripheral ground X and the betta land electrode Y can be provided. It can be eliminated.

Further, a substrate-side connector KCN for electrically connecting the substrate 801 to another substrate (for example, an effect control substrate 12) is mounted on the substrate 801. It is electrically connected at the board side connector. By electrically connecting the outer peripheral ground X and the betta land electrode Y in this way, malfunctions of electronic components can be further reduced, and wiring on the substrate 801 for electrically connecting the outer peripheral ground X and the betta land electrode Y can be provided. It can be eliminated.

Further, by mounting the front side LED 810 (angle LED) inside the betta land electrode Y, the malfunction of the front side LED 810 (angle LED) can be further reduced.

Further, by providing an insulating member between the substrate 801 and the bosses 844A to 844E, the malfunction of the electronic component can be further reduced.

Further, by providing the substrate 801 and the bosses 844A to 844E apart by a specific distance, the malfunction of the electronic component can be further reduced.

In addition, in this modification 12, an example of the noise countermeasure of the substrate 801 in the first effect body 800 was described, but the conductive member (for example, the surface) so as adjacent to the outer periphery of the LED substrate 275 of the movable body 250 of the said embodiment. When a plated base body 255 or the like is arranged on the LED substrate 275, the LED substrate 275 has a first ground region formed at a position close to the electronic component to be mounted, and the first ground region and the mounting substrate. It may have a second ground region formed between the ends of the LED.

In particular, the conductive member is adjacent to the outer periphery of the LED substrate 275 of the movable body 250 on which the connector 603, which is an example of an electronic component to which the wiring from the control means such as the motor drive IC 601 and the LED drive IC 602 is connected, is mounted. When (for example, a base body 255 having a plated surface) is arranged, the LED substrate 275 has a first ground region formed at a position close to the connector 603, the first ground region, and the LED. By having a second ground region formed between the end portion of the substrate 275, the control by control means such as the motor drive IC 601 and the LED drive IC 602 connected to the connector 603 by noise is affected. Can be suppressed.

(Structure of the first directing body 800, etc.)
Next, the detailed structure of the first effect body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 34. 25 is a front view showing the first effect body, and FIG. 25B is a rear view. FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the first effect body is viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the first effect body is viewed from diagonally behind. FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 25 (A). FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 25 (A).

As shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the first effector 800 has a substrate 801 having a plurality of electronic components and wiring patterns formed on its front and rear surfaces, and a translucent substrate 801 arranged so as to cover the front surface of the substrate 801. A front lens member 802 made of a member, a decorative member 803 made of a non-translucent member arranged so as to cover the front surface of the front lens member 802, and a translucent member arranged so as to cover the back surface of the substrate 801. It has a rear lens member 804 made of the member, and is formed in a band shape along the lower left edge of the opening formed in the board surface plate when viewed from the front.

A plurality of electronic components including a plurality of front side LEDs 810 to 812 and 813 which are light emitting diodes (light emitting elements) are mounted on the front surface 801F of the substrate 801. The front side LEDs 810 to 812 are angle LEDs capable of irradiating light along the front surface 801F in a predetermined direction, and the front side LEDs 813 are LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the front side. In addition to the light emitting diode (light emitting element), the front 801F receives a serial control signal including an operation instruction output from the effect control board 12 to control lighting / extinguishing of each LED or the like. It includes a control means such as an LED drive IC to be performed.

A plurality of electronic components including a plurality of rear side LEDs 820 to 822, which are light emitting diodes (light emitting elements), are mounted on the back surface 801B of the substrate 801. The rear side LEDs 820 and 821 are angle LEDs capable of irradiating light along the back surface 801B toward the right side of the substrate 801 and the rear side LEDs 822 are along the back surface 801B toward the left side side of the substrate 801. It is an angle LED that can irradiate light. Further, on the upper part of the back surface 801B, a board side connector KCN for connecting a plurality of electronic components including the front side LEDs 810 to 812 and the rear side LEDs 820 to 822 mounted on the front side 801F and the back side 801B to the effect control board 12 is provided. Has been done.

Further, notches 824A to 824E for avoiding interference with bosses 844A to 844E and fitting portions 870A to 870E, which will be described later, are formed at predetermined positions on the edge of the substrate 801. Further, various electronic components mounted on the front surface 801F and the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 are mainly connected to the effect control board 12 and are electronic components controlled by the effect control CPU 120.

The front lens member 802 is made of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having a size capable of covering the front surface 801F of the substrate 801. On the front surface of the front lens member 802, a first light emitting unit 830 to 832 formed at a position corresponding to each of the plurality of front LEDs 810 to 812 and a substantially circular front view formed at a position corresponding to each of the plurality of front LEDs 813. The second light emitting unit 833 of the above is formed so as to project forward. The first light emitting unit 830 to 832 and the second light emitting unit 833 are formed so as to project forward so that a recess is formed on the back surface. Further, in the vicinity of the edge portion, a plurality of insertion holes 834A to 834E through which the bosses 844A to 844E described later are inserted are formed.

The decorative member 803 is formed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having a size capable of covering the front surface of the front lens member 802. An opening 840 to 843 into which each of the first light emitting unit 830 to 832 and the second light emitting unit 833 can be inserted is formed at a position corresponding to each of the first light emitting unit 830 to 832 and the second light emitting unit 833. The first light emitting unit 830 to 832 and the second light emitting unit 833 can each face forward through the openings 840 to 843.

Cylindrical bosses 844A to 844E as protrusions through which the insertion holes 834A to 834E of the front lens member 802 can be inserted are formed at a plurality of locations on the back surface of the decorative member 803 in the vicinity of the edge so as to project rearward. Has been done.

The decorative member 803 is made of a non-conductive synthetic resin material. As shown in FIGS. 28 to 30 and 32, the front and back surfaces of the region excluding the front surface of the bosses 844A to 844E are plated (metallized surface treatment) so that the conductive portion 850 (for example, FIG. While the portion indicated by the thick line 32 is formed, the non-conductive portion 851 (for example, the thick line in FIG. 32) is not plated (metallized surface treatment) on the surface region of the bosses 844A to 844E. The part not shown) is formed.

The rear lens member 804 is made of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having a size capable of covering the back surface B of the substrate 801. An LED opening 860 that opens the rear LED 820 to the back side is formed at a position corresponding to the rear LED 820 in the rear lens member 804, and a rear LED 821 is placed on the back side at a position corresponding to the rear LED 821. An LED opening 861 to be opened is formed, and an LED opening 862 to open the rear LED 822 to the back side is formed at a position corresponding to the rear LED 822.

The opening 860A is an opening in which one LED opening 860 and the LED opening 862 are integrated. Further, a molding opening 865 is formed on the right side of each LED opening 860.

A plurality of uneven portions are formed along the left and right sides of the rear lens member 804, and the light induced inside the rear lens member 804 is diffused and can be emitted to the outside. Diffuse parts 867L and 867R are formed. Further, the bosses 844A to 844E can be fitted at positions corresponding to the bosses 844A to 844E on the front surface of the rear lens member 804, and the fitting portions 870A to 870A to which the mounting holes 871 for the screws N1 are formed, respectively. 870E is formed. A mounting portion 866 for the vibration detection sensor MG is formed below the rear lens member 804.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, in the first effect body 800 configured in this way, the front lens member 802 and the decorative member 803 are arranged on the front side of the substrate 801 and the rear lens is arranged on the back side of the substrate 801. With the member 804 arranged, the bosses 844A to 844E of the decorative member 803 are inserted into the insertion holes 834A to 834E, and the inserted bosses 844A to 844E are fitted into the fitting portions 870A to 870E of the rear lens member 804, respectively. After fitting, the screw N1 attached to the mounting hole 871 from the back side of the rear lens member 804 is screwed into the screw hole formed at the tip of the bosses 844A to 844E to decorate the substrate 801 and the front lens member 802. The member 803 and the rear lens member 804 are integrated to form the first effect body 800.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 30, in a state where the substrate 801 and the front lens member 802, the decorative member 803 and the rear lens member 804 are integrated, the front lens member 802 is a distance from the front surface 801F of the substrate 801. The rear lens member 804 is arranged apart by L1 and the rear lens member 804 is arranged apart from the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 by a distance L2 shorter than the distance L1 (L1> L2).

Specifically, the front LED 813 capable of emitting light toward the front is mounted on the front surface 801F of the substrate 801. Therefore, when the front lens member 802 is too close to the front LED 813, the light from the front LED 813 spreads to the surroundings. It is locally emitted through the front lens member 802 in the front. In order to avoid this, it is preferable that the front LED 813 and the front lens member 802 are arranged at a distance longer than at least the protrusion length from the front surface 801F of the front LED 813.

On the other hand, an LED capable of emitting light toward the rear is not mounted on the back surface 801B of the substrate 801. Further, by forming LED openings 860 to 862 at positions corresponding to the rear LEDs 820 to 822 in the rear lens member 804, the rear lens member 804 interferes with the rear LEDs 820 to 822. It can be brought closer to the substrate 801 side (see FIG. 29).

Further, by arranging the decorative member 803 on the front surface of the front lens member 802, the region other than the first light emitting unit 830 to 832 and the second light emitting unit 833 in the front lens member 802 is covered, so that the first light emission is performed. Only the units 830 to 832 and the second light emitting unit 833 are conspicuous.

(Light emitting structure on the front side of the first effect body)
Next, the light emitting structure on the front side of the first effect body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 25 (A). FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 25 (B).

Since the structures of the first light emitting unit 830 to 832 and the second light emitting unit 833 are almost the same in the light emitting principle except for the shape of the member and the like, in FIG. 28, only the first light emitting unit 831 is used. The description of the first light emitting unit 830 and 832 will be omitted. Further, in FIG. 29, only one of the plurality of second light emitting units 833, the second light emitting unit 833, will be described, and the description of the other second light emitting unit 833 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 28, the front LED 811 is arranged slightly to the left of the rear of the first light emitting unit 831. The front LED 811 mainly irradiates light from the left side to the right side along the front surface 801F of the substrate 801 on the back side of the first light emitting unit 831, but with respect to the back surface of the first light emitting unit 831 of the front lens member 802. Since they are arranged at a distance L3 apart, that is, close to each other, some light is incident on the front lens member 802. Then, the light incident on the front lens member 802 is guided while being totally reflected inside the front lens member 802, and is projected from the front surface of the first light emitting unit 831 so as to face forward through the opening 841. It is emitted forward. As a result, the first light emitting unit 831 emits light. Since the front surface of the first light emitting portion 831 of the front lens member 802 is formed in an uneven shape, the light inside the front lens member 802 is diffused and emitted forward.

Further, the first light emitting portion 831 of the front lens member 802 is formed so as to project forward from the plate-shaped portion, and is inserted into the tubular opening 841 of the decorative member 803. Since the inner peripheral surface of the opening 841 is a conductive portion 850 that has been plated, the light induced from the plate-shaped portion to the first light emitting portion 831 side is totally reflected by the conductive portion 850. Since it is difficult to emit light from the front side, the light inside the front lens member 802 is likely to be emitted forward.

As shown in FIG. 29, the front LED 813 is a top-type LED that is arranged so as to be able to irradiate light from the rear position of the second light emitting unit 833 toward the front (direction orthogonal to the front surface 801F of the substrate 801). Since the front lens member 802 is separated from the back surface of the second light emitting unit 833 by the maximum distance L4, most of the light is incident on the back surface of the second light emitting unit 833. Then, the light incident on the front lens member 802 is emitted forward from the front surface of the second light emitting unit 833 that protrudes forward through the opening 843. As a result, the second light emitting unit 833 emits light. Since the front surface of the second light emitting portion 833 of the front lens member 802 is formed in a dome shape, the light inside the front lens member 802 is emitted forward so as to spread to the surroundings.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, when the first light emitting unit 831 and the second light emitting unit 833 are compared, the distance L3 (see FIG. 28) from the front LED 811 to the back surface of the first light emitting unit 831 is from the front LED 813. The distance to the back surface of the second light emitting unit 833 is shorter than the distance L4 (see FIG. 29) (L3 <L4).

Then, in the first light emitting unit 831 in which the distance L3 from the light emitting body to the light emitting portion is short, the front LED 811 is arranged as an angle LED at a position not corresponding to the first light emitting unit 831, and is different from the first light emitting unit 831. In the second light emitting unit 833, where the distance L4 from the light emitting body to the light emitting part is longer than the distance L3, the front LED 813 is used as an angle LED. Instead, it is arranged at a position corresponding to the second light emitting unit 833, and the second light emitting unit 833 is directly incident with light to cause the second light emitting unit 833 to emit light directly.

That is, the first light emitting unit 831 has a structure that emits light in a direction (forward) orthogonal to the light irradiation direction (left direction) from the front LED 811, whereas the second light emitting unit 833 has a front LED 813. Since the structure is such that the light is emitted in the same direction (forward) as the irradiation direction (front) of the light from, the first light emitting unit 831 and the second light emitting unit 833 provided on the front surface of the decorative member 803 are different light emitting modes. Can be made to emit light at. Further, it is possible to provide the first light emitting unit 831 and the second light emitting unit 833 having different protrusion lengths from the front surface 801F of the substrate 801 on the front surface of the decorative member 803.

(Light emitting structure on the back side of the first effector)
Next, the light emitting structure on the back surface side of the first effect body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32. FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 25 (B). FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. 25 (B). 32A and 32B are a rear view showing a light emitting mode of the first effector, FIG. 32B is a front view showing the positional relationship between the first effector and the second effector, and FIG. 32C is a first effector. It is a schematic plan view which shows the positional relationship between and a 2nd effect body.

As shown in FIG. 30, each rear LED 820 is housed one by one in each LED opening 860 formed in the rear lens member 804, and is housed from the left side to the right side along the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 toward the right side. Is arranged to irradiate light. Further, on the LED opening 860 side of the peripheral surface of the molding opening 865, an inclined surface portion 825 that gradually inclines backward toward the right side is formed.

Therefore, the light emitted from the rear LED 820 is incident inside from the wall surface on the inner peripheral surface of the LED opening 860 on the molding opening 865 side, and the light incident inside is directed rearward by the inclined surface portion 825. Is reflected, and is emitted rearward from between the molding opening 865 and the LED opening 860 on the back surface of the rear lens member 804.

As shown in FIG. 31, each rear LED 821 is housed one by one in each LED opening 861 formed in the rear lens member 804, and is housed one by one in each LED opening 861 formed in the rear lens member 804, and is housed from the left side to the right side along the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 toward the right side. Is arranged to irradiate light. Therefore, the light emitted from the rear LED 821 is incident on the inside from the right wall surface on the inner peripheral surface of the LED opening 861, and the light incident on the inside is directed toward the right side inside the rear lens member 804. After being guided while being totally reflected, it is emitted from the light diffusing unit 867R.

Further, although not particularly shown, each rear LED 822 is housed one by one in each LED opening 862 formed in the rear lens member 804, and is housed one by one in each LED opening 862 formed in the rear lens member 804. Is arranged to irradiate light. Therefore, the light emitted from the rear LED 821 is incident on the inside from the left wall surface on the inner peripheral surface of the LED opening 862, and the light incident on the inside is directed toward the left side inside the rear lens member 804. After being guided while being totally reflected, it is emitted from the light diffusing unit 867L.

As shown in FIG. 32 (A), a plurality of rear LED 820s are arranged in the vertical direction at substantially the center position of the left and right side sides of the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 and a plurality of rear side LEDs 820 are arranged near the right side side of the back surface 801B. The rear LED 821 is arranged in the vertical direction, and a plurality of rear LEDs 822 are arranged in the vertical direction at a position near the left side on the back surface 801B.

Then, when the rear LED 820 emits light, the inclined surface portion 825 between each LED opening 860 and the molding opening 865 in the rear lens member 804 emits light, and when the rear LED 821 emits light, the light diffusing portion 867R emits light. When the rear LED 822 emits light, the light diffusing unit 867L emits light. Since the inclined surface portion 825 and the light diffusing portions 867L and 867R can emit light toward the front-rear surface side and the side along the substrate 801, they are moved not only to the front-rear surface side but also to the effect position side. 2 The effect body 900 can be suitably illuminated (see FIG. 32 (C)).

As shown in FIGS. 32 (B) and 32 (C), in the present embodiment, the second effect body 900 is provided on the back side of the first effect body 800. Specifically, the second effect body 900 has an origin position positioned so as to be superimposed on the back side of the first effect body 800 when viewed from the front by a drive source (not shown), and an effect position diagonally upward to the right from the origin position. It is provided so that it can be moved (operated) between them. Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (C), the second effect body 900 is arranged at a position separated from the first effect body 800 by a predetermined distance at the origin position, and when moving to the effect position, the first effect body 900 is first. It is said that it can be moved in the direction along the substrate 801 of the effect body 800.

Therefore, when the second effect body 900 on the back side of the first effect body 800 is at the origin position, the rear side LEDs 820 to 822 provided on the back side of the first effect body 800 are made to emit light to produce the second effect. The front side of the body 900 can be suitably illuminated. Further, even when the second effect body 900 moves to the effect position diagonally upward to the right of the origin position, it can be suitably illuminated by the light from the light diffusing unit 867R.

Further, for example, when the rear side LEDs 820 to 822 are arranged so that light can be irradiated to the back side side in a direction orthogonal to the back surface 801B of the substrate 801, the rear side lens member 804 covers the back surface 801B of the substrate 801. In this case, it is necessary to arrange the rear lens member 804 at a position farther from the rear side LEDs 820 to 822, and the front-rear dimension of the second effect body 900 is increased by that amount, as in the present embodiment. The rear side LEDs 820 to 822 are arranged as angle LEDs so as to be irradiated in the direction along the back surface 801B, and the light is reflected rearward by the inclined surface portion 825 of the rear side lens member 804 arranged close to the substrate 801. , The second effect body 900 on the back side can be suitably illuminated while the front-rear dimension of the second effect body 900 is shortened.

(Board noise countermeasure 2)
Next, the antistatic structure of the first effect body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35. 33A and 33B are a front view of a main part showing a state in which the first effect body is viewed through a game board, and FIG. 33B is a view showing a main part of a substrate. FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE of FIG. 33 (B). FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an antistatic structure as a modification 13 of the present invention.

As shown in FIGS. 33A and 34, a plurality of metal obstacle nails K are provided on the front surface of the board surface plate 2A constituting the game board 2. Each obstacle nail K is erected so as to project forward in a state of being inclined in a predetermined direction with respect to the game board surface by press-fitting into a through hole 2d formed so as to penetrate the board surface plate 2A in the front-rear direction. ..

As shown in FIGS. 1, 33 (A) and 34, the first effect body 800 is on the left side of the game area 10, specifically, the lower left of the opening 2c formed in the board surface plate 2A of the game board 2. At the position, it is provided so as to be close to the back surface of the board surface plate 2A. Therefore, the static electricity generated in the game ball due to some factor may be discharged to the first effect body 800 on the back surface side of the board surface plate 2A through the through hole 2d.

Note that the static electricity is provided on, for example, the gaming board surface of the board surface plate 2A in which the gaming ball flowing down the game area 10 is made of an obstacle nail K and an acrylic resin material, the acrylic resin plate provided in place of the glass window 50a, and the board surface plate 2A. Contact with an obstacle or accessory made of a synthetic resin material, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 flows down, the game ball is charged, or the game ball is outside the pachinko game machine 1, for example. It is conceivable that a charged gaming ball enters the pachinko gaming machine 1 while circulating in the gaming island or the like. Further, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, the effect device 200, the second effect body 900, and other movable objects other than the game ball are charged due to friction and the like generated by the operation. It is also possible.

Here, when the entire front and back surfaces including the peripheral surfaces of the bosses 844A to 844E in the decorative member 803 of the first effect body 800 are plated and the front and back surfaces are conductive portions, the discharged electricity is generated. It is conceivable that the decorative member 803 wraps around from the front surface side to the back surface side (back surface side), and further wraps around to the peripheral surfaces of the bosses 844A to 844E.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 33B and 34, the bosses 844A to 844E project to the back surface side of the substrate 801 and are located on the side of the notches 824A to 824E formed in the substrate 801. Electricity wrapping around from the front surface side to the back surface side of the decorative member 803 may be discharged to the substrate 801 side via the bosses 844A to 844E.

As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 34, the periphery of the bosses 844A to 844E is covered with the front lens member 802 and the rear lens member 804, which are non-conductive members, but the back surface of the front lens member 802. If there is even a slight gap (not shown) between the periphery of the insertion holes 834A to 834E and the fitting portions 870A to 870E of the rear lens member 804, discharge will occur from the gap to the substrate 801 side.

When the electric discharge is performed on the substrate 801 side in this way, electricity flows through the wiring pattern formed on the surface 800F of the substrate 801 and emits light from the front LEDs 810 to 812 and 813 mounted on the surface 800F and the front LEDs 810 to 812 and 813. Problems (for example, inability to emit light, abnormal color development, abnormal light emission control, etc.) occur in the LED drive IC that controls and electronic components such as (control means), and in particular, as shown in FIG. 34, the surface 800F of the substrate 801 There is a possibility that the front LED 810 is discharged directly to the front LED 810 arranged in the vicinity of the boss 844C in the above, and a problem occurs in the front LED 810.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34, the bosses 844A to 844E protruding toward the substrate 801 have a non-conductive portion 851 whose surface is not plated, so that the rear lens is a rear lens. Since the electricity that wraps around the back surface side of the member 804 is less likely to be discharged to the substrate 801 side via the bosses 844A to 844E that project to the substrate 801 side, problems related to various electronic components mounted on the front surface 800F may occur. It can be suitably suppressed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the embodiment of the present invention, electronic components (for example, front side LEDs 810 to 812, 813, rear side LEDs 820 to 822, connector KCN, conversion IC, etc.) are mounted. The substrate 801 is provided with a decorative member 803 and a decorative member 803 arranged so as to cover the front surface 801F which is a mounting surface of the electronic component on the substrate 801. The decorative member 803 has conductive portions 850 on the front and back surfaces. The bosses 844A to 844E are formed as protruding portions protruding toward the substrate 801 side, and the bosses 844A to 844E have a non-conductive portion 851 on the substrate 801 side.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the electronic components from being defective due to the discharge from the conductive portion 850.

Specifically, the static electricity charged on the obstacle nail K is discharged to the conductive portion 850 of the decorative member 803, so that the static electricity charged on the game ball is discharged to the conductive portion 850 of the decorative member 803 via the conductive obstacle nail K. Since it can be released, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being charged with static electricity. Further, in the decorative member 803, the bosses 844A to 844E project toward the substrate 801 side as compared with other parts, that is, they are close to the substrate 801 but the surfaces of the bosses 844A to 844E are plated. Since the non-conductive portion 851 is formed without being applied, it is preferably suppressed that the electricity that wraps around to the back surface side of the decorative member 803 is discharged to the substrate 801 side via the bosses 844A to 844E.

Further, since the front lens member 802 made of a non-conductive member is arranged between the front surface 801F of the substrate 801 and the back surface of the decorative member 803, the electricity that wraps around to the back surface side of the decorative member 803 is bossed. It is possible to suppress the discharge to the front side of the substrate 801 without going through 844A to 844E.

Further, the bosses 844A to 844E are projected from the front lens member 802 toward the substrate 801 through the insertion holes 834A to 834E of the front lens member 802 whose tip end side is made of a non-conductive member. Since the non-conductive portion 851 is formed on the surface of the tip portion, it is possible to prevent electricity from flowing to the portion protruding toward the substrate 801 from the front lens member 802.

Further, the electronic component is a light emitting diode (for example, front side LEDs 810 to 812, 813, etc.). By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems in light emission. Further, in particular, angle LEDs such as the front side LEDs 810 to 812 can irradiate a member near the edge of the substrate with light, and therefore are often arranged closer to the peripheral edge of the substrate than the top type LED. Therefore, even in such a case, even when the front side LED 810, which is an angle LED, is arranged in the vicinity of the bosses 844A to 844E, it is possible to suppress the discharge of static electricity to the substrate 801 via the bosses 844A to 844E.

Further, the electronic component is a connector (for example, a substrate-side connector KCN or the like). By doing so, it is possible to prevent a defect from occurring not only in the electronic component on the front surface 801F of the substrate 801 on which the connector is mounted but also in the electronic component to which the connector is connected via the connector. Further, in particular, the connector is often arranged near the peripheral edge of the substrate so that the wiring connected to the connector does not run along the mounting surface. Therefore, even in such a case, even when the front side LED 810, which is an angle LED, is arranged in the vicinity of the bosses 844A to 844E, it is possible to suppress the discharge of static electricity to the substrate 801 via the bosses 844A to 844E.

Further, a control means (for example, a conversion IC) for controlling other electronic components including the electronic component is mounted on the substrate 801. By doing so, not only the electronic components mounted on the board 801 but also other electronic components such as, for example, a problem in controlling other electronic components mounted on the other board connected to the board 801 may occur. It is possible to prevent adverse effects on parts.

Further, a front lens member 802 as a non-conductive member is provided between the decorative member 803 and the substrate 801. The front lens member 802 can guide light from the front LEDs 810 to 812 and 815 provided on the substrate 801. It is a light guide member (translucent member).

By doing so, it is possible to suppress the discharge from the decorative member 803 to the substrate 801 by utilizing the front lens member 802, which is a light guide member capable of guiding the light from the front LEDs 810 to 812 and 813.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of the electronic component, an embodiment in which the front side LEDs 810 to 812 and 815, the rear side LEDs 820 to 822, the substrate side connector KCN, the conversion IC and the like are applied has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. It includes detection means such as sensors, drive sources such as motors and solenoids, storage means such as ROM and RAM, protection resistors, and various electronic components other than the above such as diodes and capacitors.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which electronic components such as front side LEDs 810 to 812 and 813, rear side LEDs 820 to 822, and board side connector KCN are connected to the effect control board 12 has been illustrated. It is not limited, and may be connected to a board other than the effect control board 12 (for example, the main board 11) or a control means (for example, CPU 103).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the conductive portion 850 is formed by plating the surface (front and rear surfaces) of the decorative member 803 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative member 803 may be formed of a synthetic resin material or the like having conductivity by mixing carbon fibers or the like so that a conductive portion is formed on the surface.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the bosses 844A to 844E into which the screw N1 for integrating the decorative member 803 and the rear lens member 804 covering the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 are screwed are applied as the protruding portion. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if it is a portion that protrudes from the decorative member 803 toward the substrate 801 side from other parts, the members are integrated as described above. A protruding portion other than the boss into which the screw is screwed (for example, a positioning boss for determining the mounting position of the substrate 801 or another member with respect to the decorative member 803) may be applied.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the bosses 844A to 844E as the protrusions have a protrusion length that passes through the side of the substrate 801 and reaches the back surface 801B side, but the present invention is limited thereto. The projecting portion may project so as to be closer to the substrate 801 than other parts of the decorative member. For example, the projecting portion is the front surface of the decorative member 803 from a position corresponding to the front surface 801F. It may be one that protrudes so as to be close to or in contact with 801F.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the non-conductive portion 851 is formed on the surface of the bosses 844A to 844E as the protruding portion, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the surface of the protruding portion is not limited to this. As long as the non-conductive portion 851 is formed at least in the portion corresponding to the substrate 801 in the above, the conductive portion 850 may be formed in the other region.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the decorative member 803 illustrates a form in which the decorative member 803 is arranged close to the back surface side of the board surface plate 2A of the game board 2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative member May be arranged at a position other than the above.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the decorative member 803 is arranged so as to cover the front surface 801F of the substrate 801. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative member 803 is the substrate 801. It may be arranged so as to cover the back surface 801B of the.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the embodiment of the present invention, the first effector 800 having the substrate 801 provided with the light emitting body (for example, the rear LED 820 to 822) on the back surface 801B and the substrate 801 The second effect body 900, which can operate on the back surface 801B side of the above, is provided, and the second effect body 900 can be irradiated by the light from the rear side LEDs 820 to 822.

By doing so, it is not necessary to mount the substrate 801 or the like on which the rear side LEDs 820 to 822 are mounted on the movable second effect body 900. It becomes possible to produce.

Further, the second effect body 900 can be moved in a direction along the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 (for example, in the left-right direction), and the rear LEDs 820 to 822 irradiate light in the moving direction of the second effect body 900. It is possible. Specifically, when the rear LED 821 emits light, the light diffusing unit 867R emits light, and when the rear LED 822 emits light, the light diffusing unit 867L emits light. Since the inclined surface portion 825 and the light diffusing portions 867L and 867R can emit light toward the back side and the side along the substrate 801, they move from the back side and the origin position to the effect position side diagonally upward to the right. It is possible to preferably illuminate the second effect body 900.

By doing so, even when the second effect body 900 moves to the side of the first effect body 800, the light can be suitably irradiated.

In the present embodiment, the rear LED 821 emits light from the light diffusing portion 867R on the right side, so that the second effect body 900 that has moved from the origin position to the effect position diagonally upward to the right can be suitably illuminated. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and although not particularly shown, the light from the rear LED 821 is moved to the right side effect position without guiding the rear lens member 804. 2 The directing body 900 may be illuminated directly.

Further, the rear lens member 804 as a light guide member having an LED opening 860 to 862 capable of covering at least a part of the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 and accommodating the rear side LEDs 820 to 822 in the covered state is provided. The rear side LEDs 820 to 822 can emit light from the side surface (peripheral wall) of the LED openings 860 to 862 into the inside of the rear lens member 804 in a state of being housed in the LED openings 860 to 862 (FIG. 30). reference).

By doing so, the substrate 801 can be covered by using the rear lens member 804 that guides the light from the rear LED 820 to 822, and the rear lens member 804 is arranged close to the substrate 801. Therefore, the thickness dimension of the first effect body 800 in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

Therefore, for example, when the rear side LEDs 820 to 822 of the first effect body 800 can illuminate the second effect body 900 on the back side, the front-rear dimension between the game board 2 and the effect display device 5 is set. Even if there is a limit, by making the thickness dimension of the first effect body 800 in the front-rear direction as thin as possible, the first effect body 800 and the second effect body 900 can be moved back and forth between the game board 2 and the effect display device 5. Can be arranged so as to overlap with each other.

In the present embodiment, the LED openings 860 to 862 are formed at positions corresponding to the respective rear LEDs 820 to 822 in the rear lens member 804, but the present invention is not limited thereto. By forming a recess in the rear lens member 804 corresponding to each of the rear LEDs 820 to 822 so as to accommodate the rear LEDs 820 to 822, the rear lens member 804 is brought close to the substrate 801. May be good.

Further, in the vicinity of the LED openings 860 to 862 in the rear lens member 804, there is an inclined surface portion 825 as a reflecting portion that reflects the incident light toward the second effect body 900 side.

By doing so, the light emitted from the rear LED 820 to 822 in the direction along the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 can be reflected to the back surface side, so that the protruding dimension from the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 is a normal LED. It is possible to preferably illuminate the second effect body 900 on the back side while reducing the thickness dimension of the first effect body 800 in the front-rear direction by using a smaller angle LED.

Further, the rear lens member 804 has light diffusing portions 867L and 867R as light emitting portions that emit light from the rear side LEDs 820 to 822 incident on the inside from the LED openings 860 to 862.

By doing so, the light radiated from the rear LED 820 to 822 can be circulated in the surroundings to illuminate, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, on the front surface 801F opposite to the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 are provided front side LEDs 810 to 812 and 813 different from the rear side LEDs 820 to 822.

By doing so, the front side of the first effect body 800 can also be appropriately illuminated.

Further, in the above embodiment, the second effect body 900 is operably arranged on the back side of the first effect body 800, and the second effect body 900 on the back side is operably arranged by the rear side LEDs 820 to 822 of the first effect body 800. Although a suitable illuminating form has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second effect body 900 is operably arranged on the front side of the first effect body 800, and the front LED 810 of the first effect body 800 is arranged. ~ 812 and 813 may be used to preferably illuminate the second effect body 900 on the front side.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second effect body 900 can move in the direction along the substrate 801 between the origin position on the back surface side of the first effect body 800 and the effect position diagonally to the upper right of the origin position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation mode of the second effector 900 is arbitrary and can be moved not only in the left-right direction but also in the front-back direction and the up-down direction. It may be movable.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the light from the rear side LEDs 820 to 822 of the first effect body 800 is reflected rearward by the inclined surface portion 825 of the rear lens member 804 to illuminate the second effect body 900 is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rear side LEDs 820 to 822 of the first effect body 800 may be not an angle LED but a light emitting body capable of irradiating light toward the back side.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the rear surface 801B of the substrate 801 is covered with the rear lens member 804, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 is the rear lens. It does not have to be covered by the member 804. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first effect body 800 is fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the game board 2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first effect is not limited to this. The body 800 may be operably provided.

Further, a first effect body 800 having a substrate 801 provided with a light emitting body (for example, rear side LEDs 820 to 822) on the back surface 801B and a second effect body 900 capable of operating on the back surface 801B side of the substrate 801 are provided. In the pachinko game machine 1 capable of irradiating the second effect body 900 with the light from the rear side LEDs 820 to 822, for example, the surface on the first effect body 800 side is subjected to a metallized surface treatment such as plating or metal deposition. The second effect body 900 is provided with a projecting portion that projects toward the substrate 801 of the first effect body 800 so that the projecting portion passes near the peripheral edge of the substrate 801 according to the operation of the second effect body 900. In this case, it is preferable to form a non-conductive portion on the surface of the protruding portion. By doing so, the electric discharge from the protruding portion of the second effect body 900 causes a problem in the electronic component (for example, the back surface 801B) mounted on the back surface 801B side of the substrate 801 of the first effect body 800. Can be suppressed.

Further, on the substrate 801, a first ground region formed at a position close to an electronic component to be mounted (for example, a back surface 801B) and a first ground region formed between the first ground region and a peripheral edge portion of the substrate 801. It may have two ground regions. By doing so, when the protruding portion of the second effect body 900 approaches the peripheral edge of the substrate 801 of the first effect body 800 according to the operation, the static electricity charged on the projecting portion of the second effect body 900 is generated. Even when the electric component is discharged to the substrate 801 of the first effect body 800, it is possible to prevent a defect from occurring in the electronic component (for example, the back surface 801B) mounted on the back surface 801B side of the substrate 801 of the first effect body 800.

(Modification 13)
Next, a modification 13 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 35. 35A and 35B are diagrams showing a wiring connection state between the LED board and the effect control board, and FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a wiring connection state between the LED board and the effect control board as a modification 13 of the present invention. is there.

As shown in FIG. 35 (A), for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present modification 13 includes an LED substrate 910 on which the LED 911 is mounted on one surface as a light emitting body for holding display and decoration. The LED board 910 and the effect control board 12 are connected by a connector via wiring 912. Further, as shown in FIG. 35 (B), a part of the wiring 912 extending from the back side of the LED board 910 and the LED board 910 is covered with a decorative member 913 that opens on the back side. The surface of the decorative member 913 is plated to form a conductive portion 914.

Then, when the periphery of a part of the wiring 912 is covered with the decorative member 913 provided with the conductive portion 914 on the surface, the static electricity charged in the conductive portion 914 is applied to the LED substrate 910 as described above. Since there is a possibility of discharging to the mounting surface 910F of the LED 911 and the LED 911, the front surface side of the LED substrate 910 is covered with a lens member 915 made of a non-conductive member.

Further, since a part of the wiring 912 extending from the back side of the LED board 910 is covered with the conductive portion 914, the static electricity charged in the conductive portion 914 is discharged to the wiring 912, thereby producing the effect control board. Since the LED drive control signal output from 12 is easily affected by noise, the position corresponding to the conductive portion 914 in the wiring 912 is an electrically insulating material such as a tube made of a rubber material made of a non-conductive stop member or the like. By covering with 916, a non-conductive member is arranged between the wiring 912 and the conductive portion 914, so that the LED drive control signal output from the effect control board 12 is less likely to be affected by noise. it can.

(Initialization process of movable body)
Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. First, the effect control CPU 120 starts executing the main process shown in FIG. 36 when the power is turned on. In the main process, first, the first initialization process (S50) for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 2 ms) of the effect control. , The second initialization process for returning the movable bodies 250 and 900 to the origin position and confirming the operation is performed (S51). After that, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S52). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag by the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on) in the main process, the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (S53) and executes the following process.

The effect control CPU 120 first performs a command analysis process (S54). In the command analysis process, which command (see FIG. 3) is the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the received command buffer is analyzed. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. Then, a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command is performed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control process process (S55). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the effect display device 5 is executed.

Next, an effect random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating an effect random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number is executed (S56), and then the process proceeds to S52.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the second initialization process (S51) of the present embodiment. In the second initialization process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the movable body to be operated first based on the setting data (S101). The setting data includes the order data of the movable bodies, and in the present embodiment, the order of the movable body 250 → the second effect body 900 → the third movable body (not shown) is preset as the order. There is. Therefore, when S101 is executed for the first time, the movable body 250 is specified as the target movable body.

Next, it is determined whether or not the movable body specified in S101 is an origin detection target accessory for which it is necessary to perform origin detection (S102).

In the present embodiment, the movable body 250 having the origin detection sensor and the second effect body 900 having the origin detection sensor correspond to the origin detection target accessory for which it is necessary to perform the origin detection, and the origin detection sensor is used. The third movable body (not shown) that does not have is not applicable. Therefore, when the movable body specified in S101 is the movable body 250 or the second effect body 900, it is determined as "Y" in the determination, while the movable body specified in S101 is the third movable body (not shown). ), It will be determined as "N".

If it is determined to be "N" in S102, the process proceeds to S130. On the other hand, when it is determined as "Y" in S102, the process proceeds to S103 to specify the detection state of the origin detection sensor corresponding to the operation target accessory (S103), and whether or not the origin detection sensor is in the detection state. That is, it is determined whether or not the target movable body is located at the origin position (initial position) (S104).

If it is not located at the origin position (initial position) (S104; N), the process proceeds to S105, and after setting 0 in the non-detection operation count counter for counting the number of executions of the non-detection operation control. (S105) As the control speed for operating the operation target accessory, the operation target is the same as the minimum speed (see FIGS. 39 and 40) in the actual operation confirmation operation control (long initialization operation control) described later. The minimum control speed for operating the accessory is set (S106), and when the drive motor of the operation target accessory, for example, the operation target accessory is the movable body 250, the drive motor is started to be driven in the direction of the origin position. (S107), the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer is started (S108). The timer count of the non-detection operation period timer may be performed, for example, by counting the number of signals output from the CTC initialized in the first initialization process at regular intervals. ..

Then, the origin detection sensor shifts to the detection state, and the non-detection operation period timer shifts to the monitoring state of monitoring whether or not the value corresponds to the upper limit time (S109, S110).

When the operation target accessory is positioned at the origin position (initial position) by driving the drive device (for example, the drive motor) of the operation target accessory toward the origin position, the origin detection sensor is in the detection state. The drive of the movable body drive motor is stopped and the process proceeds to S130. On the other hand, when the non-detection operation period timer reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit time, that is, when the operation target accessory is not located at the origin position (initial position) even after the upper limit time has elapsed, S112 Proceed to, 1 is added to the non-detection operation count counter (S112), and it is determined whether or not the value of the non-detection operation count counter after the addition reaches the operation error determination count (for example, 3). (S113).

When the value of the operation count counter at the time of non-detection reaches the operation error determination number in S113, the drive of the movable body drive motor is stopped, the origin return error of the operation target accessory is stored (S114), and S130. Proceed to. That is, when the operation target accessory is not located at the origin position (initial position) in the non-detection operation control, the operation control for actual operation confirmation described later is not executed for the operation target accessory (the relevant operation control). The origin return error is stored in order to put the operation target accessory in the dead end state), and the process proceeds to S130.

In the present embodiment, when the value of the operation count counter at the time of non-detection reaches the operation error determination number in S113, the mode in which the operation target accessory is in the dead end state is illustrated. The second initialization is performed by starting error processing and executing the error processing when the value of the operation count counter at the time of non-detection reaches the operation error determination number in S113. When the processing is interrupted, the effect control main process may be interrupted without proceeding to S52, and the effect control board 12 (such as the effect control CPU 120) may not be started (dead end state).

Further, when the operation target accessory is in the dead end state, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120 or the like) is activated, but for example, the effect control CPU 120 is an input signal (for example, indicating that the movable body is operated). , It is preferable to execute a process such as invalidating the reception of the detection signal of the effect button or the like, or preventing the movable body from operating even if the input signal is input.

On the other hand, if the value of the non-detection operation count counter has not reached the operation error determination count, the operation is performed by stopping the driving of the movable body drive motor, returning to S106, and performing the processes of S106 to S108 again. The operation of moving the target accessory to the origin position at the lowest speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control (long initialization operation control) (operation control at the time of non-detection) is started, and the above-mentioned monitoring states of S109 and S110 are set. Transition.

Therefore, even if it is determined in S110 that the error determination time has elapsed, the operation of repeatedly moving the operation target accessory to the origin position (initial position) (operation control at the time of non-detection) is executed until the number of operation error determinations is reached. If the operation target accessory is detected at the origin position (initial position) during the operation, the process proceeds to S130 without proceeding to S114.

On the other hand, when the determination is "Y" in S104 described above and the process proceeds to S120, 0 is set in the detection operation count counter, the detection operation process data is set (S121a), and the detection operation process timer is set. (S121b). As the timer count of the detection operation process timer, the signal output from the CTC initialized in the first initialization process at regular intervals is the same as the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer described above. It may be done by counting the number or the like. Further, in the detection operation process data of the present embodiment, as the control speed for operating the operation target accessory, the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control (long initialization operation control) described later (FIG. 39, FIG. The minimum control speed for operating the operation target accessory at the same operation speed as (see FIG. 40) is described (set).

Next, the operation target accessory is operated based on the minimum control speed set in the set detection operation process data (S122), and it is determined whether or not the process data is completed (S123), and the process data If is not completed, the process returns to S122, and the operation target accessory is operated based on the minimum control speed set in the detection operation process data.

In this way, in the operation control at the time of detection, the minimum speed based on the minimum control speed set in the operation process data at the time of detection, that is, the operation control for confirming the actual operation (long initial) until the operation process data at the time of detection is completed. At the minimum speed in the conversion operation control), the operation of temporarily moving away from the origin position (initial position) and returning to the origin position (initial position) from a position away from the origin position (initial position) is performed (see FIG. 39). The position away from the origin position is a position near the origin position, that is, a position where each origin sensor cannot detect the detected portion of each movable body, and a predetermined position (detection) closer to the origin position than each effect position. When operating position) is set.

If it is determined in the determination of S123 that the set detection operation process data is completed, the drive of the movable body drive motor is stopped and the process proceeds to S124 to determine whether the origin detection sensor is in the detection state. That is, it is determined (confirmed) whether or not the operation target accessory is located at the origin position (initial position).

When the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, when the operation target accessory is located at the origin position (initial position), the process proceeds to S130.

On the other hand, when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state, that is, when the operation target accessory is not located at the origin position (initial position), 1 is added to the detection operation count counter (S126). , It is determined whether or not the value of the detection operation number counter after the addition reaches the operation error determination number (for example, 3) (S127). When the value of the operation count counter at the time of detection has reached the operation error determination count, the process proceeds to S128 to store the origin return error of the operation target accessory (S128), and proceeds to S130. That is, when the operation target accessory is not located at the origin position (initial position) in the detection operation control, the operation control for actual operation confirmation described later is not executed for the operation target accessory (the operation). The origin return error is memorized in order to put the target accessory in the dead end state), and the process proceeds to S130.

In the present embodiment, when the value of the operation count counter at the time of detection reaches the operation error determination number in S127, the embodiment in which the operation target accessory is in the dead end state is illustrated. The second initialization process is performed by starting error processing and executing the error processing when the value of the operation count counter at the time of detection reaches the operation error determination number in S113. By being interrupted, the effect control main process may be interrupted without proceeding to S52, and the effect control board 12 may be put into a state in which it does not start (dead end state).

Further, when the operation target accessory is in the dead end state, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120 or the like) is activated, but for example, the effect control CPU 120 has an input signal (for example, an effect button) for operating the movable body. It is preferable to execute a process such as invalidating the reception of the detection signal) or preventing the movable body from operating even if the input signal is input.

In S130, which is executed when it is determined as "N" in S102, when it is determined as "Y" in S109, or when it is determined as "Y" in S124, it has not yet been targeted for operation among the movable bodies. It is determined whether or not the remaining movable body exists, and when the remaining movable body does not exist (specifically, when the moving target accessory is the third movable body (not shown)), FIG. 38 Move to the process of performing the operation control for checking the actual operation shown in. On the other hand, when the remaining movable body exists, the process proceeds to S131 to specify the movable body to be operated next, and then returns to S102 to perform the above-mentioned processing after S102 for the specified operation target accessory. Do the same.

When S131 is executed when the movement target accessory is the movable body 250, the second effect body 900 is specified as the operation target accessory based on the setting data, and the operation target accessory is the second effect. When S131 is executed in the case of the body 900, the third movable body (not shown) is specified as the operation target accessory based on the setting data.

Next, the process shown in FIG. 38 will be described. In S200 shown in FIG. 38, the effect control CPU 120 is a movable body (confirmation target accessory) whose operation is first confirmed based on the setting data, as in the case of S101 described above. (S200). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a memory of the origin return error of the target accessory (S201).

If there is a memory of the origin return error of the accessory to be confirmed, the process proceeds to S220 without executing the processes S202a to S213. By doing so, in the present embodiment, the operation control for confirming the actual operation is not performed for the movable body determined to have the origin return error in the operation control at the time of non-detection and the operation control at the time of detection. ..

On the other hand, if there is no memory of the origin return error of the accessory to be confirmed, the process proceeds to S202a and the process data for confirming the actual operation corresponding to the accessory to be confirmed is set. That is, if the confirmation target accessory is the movable body 250, the process data for confirming the actual operation of the movable body 250 is set, and if the confirmation target accessory is the second effect body 900, the actual operation of the second effect body 900 is set. The confirmation process data is set, and if the accessory to be confirmed is the third movable body (not shown), the actual operation confirmation process data of the third movable body (not shown) is set. In each of these actual operation confirmation process data, the control speed and the like are described (set) so that the movable body performs the same operation as the actual operation in the movable body effect in the effect.

Next, the timer count of the actual operation confirmation process timer is started (S202b). As the timer count of the process timer for checking the actual operation, a signal output from the CTC initialized in the first initialization process at regular intervals is the same as the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer described above. It may be done by counting the number of.

Then, in the set actual operation confirmation process data, the confirmation target accessory is operated at the control speed set corresponding to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer (S203), and the process data is completed. It is determined whether or not the process data has been completed (S204), and if the process data has not been completed, the process returns to S203 and the accessory to be confirmed is set according to the timer count value of the process timer for confirming the actual operation at that time. Operate based on the controlled speed.

In this way, until the actual operation confirmation process data is completed, the confirmation target accessory is operated at the control speed set in the actual operation confirmation process data corresponding to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer. By doing so, the control speed of the accessory to be confirmed can be sequentially changed in chronological order to accelerate or decelerate the same as the control speed set when the movable body is actually operated in the movable body effect. it can.

Then, in the determination of S204, when it is determined that the set actual operation confirmation process data is completed, the driving of the movable body drive motor is stopped, and whether or not the target accessory is the origin target accessory. (S204a). If the target accessory is not the origin detection target accessory, that is, if it is a third movable body (not shown), the process proceeds to S220, and if the target accessory is a third movable body (not shown), the process proceeds to S222. move on. On the other hand, if the target accessory is the origin detection target accessory, that is, if the movable body 250 or the second effect body 900, whether or not the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, the operation target accessory is It is determined (confirmed) whether or not it is located at the origin position (initial position) (S205).

When the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, when the accessory to be confirmed is located at the origin position (initial position), the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state, that is, when the accessory to be confirmed is not located at the origin position (initial position), the above-mentioned non-detection operation control (see FIG. 37) is performed. The process of S206 to S213 is performed in order to position the target accessory at the origin position (initial position).

Specifically, after setting 0 to the non-detection operation count counter for counting the number of executions of the non-detection operation control (S206), the actual operation confirmation operation control (long initialization operation control) is used as the control speed. Set the minimum control speed for operating the operation target accessory at the same operation speed as the minimum speed in (S207), and drive the drive device of the confirmation target accessory, for example, if the confirmation target accessory is the movable body 250. The motor is started to be driven in the direction of the origin position (initial position) (S208), and the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer is started (S209).

Then, the origin detection sensor shifts to the detection state, and the non-detection operation period timer shifts to the monitoring state of monitoring whether or not the value corresponds to the upper limit time (S210, S211).

When the target accessory is positioned at the origin position (initial position) by driving the drive device (for example, the drive motor) of the target accessory in the direction of the origin position (initial position) and the origin detection sensor is in the detection state. Is determined to be "Y" in S210 and proceeds to S220. On the other hand, when the non-detection operation period timer reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit time, that is, when the confirmation target accessory is not located at the origin position (initial position) even after the upper limit time has elapsed, S212 Proceed to, 1 is added to the non-detection operation count counter (S212), and it is determined whether or not the value of the non-detection operation count counter after the addition reaches the operation error determination count (for example, 3). (S213).

If the value of the non-detection operation count counter has reached the operation error determination count, the process proceeds to S220. In the present embodiment, when the value of the operation count counter at the time of non-detection reaches the operation error determination number in S213, the mode in which the operation target accessory is in the dead end state is illustrated. Not limited to this, when the value of the operation count counter at the time of non-detection reaches the operation error determination number in S213, the origin return error of the operation target accessory is stored, and the operation target accessory is After that, the actual operation may not be executed. Alternatively, by starting the error processing and executing the error processing, the second initialization process is interrupted, so that the effect control main process is interrupted without proceeding to S52, and the effect control board 12 does not start. (Dead end state) may be set.

Further, when the operation target accessory is in the dead end state, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120 or the like) is activated, but for example, the effect control CPU 120 has an input signal (for example, an effect button) for operating the movable body. It is preferable to execute a process such as invalidating the reception of the detection signal) or preventing the movable body from operating even if the input signal is input.

On the other hand, if the value of the non-detection operation count counter has not reached the operation error determination count, the operation is confirmed by returning to S207 and performing the processes of S207, S208, and S209 again. The operation of moving to the origin position (initial position) at the lowest speed in the operation control (long initialization operation control) (operation at the time of returning to the origin) is started, and the state shifts to the monitoring state of S210 and S211 described above.

Therefore, even if it is determined in S211 that the error determination time has elapsed, the operation of repeatedly moving the target accessory to the origin position (initial position) (operation control at the time of non-detection) is executed until the number of operation error determinations is reached. If the target accessory is detected at the origin position (initial position) during the process, the process proceeds to S220.

In S220 to be executed when it is determined as "Y" in S201, when it is determined as "N" in S204a, when it is determined as "Y" in S205, or when it is determined as "Y" in S210. , It is determined whether or not there is a remaining movable body among the movable bodies that has not yet been confirmed for operation confirmation, and if the remaining movable body does not exist (specifically, the target accessory for operation confirmation is the first. In the case of 3 movable bodies (not shown), the error record stored in S114 or S128 is cleared (S222), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the remaining movable bodies are present, S221 After identifying the movable body whose operation is to be confirmed next, the process returns to S201, and the above-described processing after S201 is similarly executed for the specified target accessory.

Here, the operation mode and the control content of the movable body by executing the second initialization process shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39 is a schematic explanatory view showing operation modes of non-detection operation control, detection operation control, and actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 120. 40A and 40B are explanatory views showing the control speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation, FIG. 40B is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the operation control during detection, and FIG. 40C is the control speed in the operation control during non-detection. It is explanatory drawing which shows.

In addition, in FIGS. 39 and 40, the non-detection operation control (short initialization operation control) and the detection operation control (short initialization operation control) of the movable body 250 and the second effect body 900, which are the origin detection target objects, are shown. ) And the operation control for confirming the actual operation (long initialization operation control), and the description of the third movable body (not shown) that is not the origin detection target accessory will be omitted. Further, although the reciprocating operating distance (rotation range) of the first movable portion 302 of the movable body 250 and the reciprocating operating distance (moving range) of the second movable portions 401 and 402 of the second effect body 900 are not the same, For convenience of explanation, the same conceptual diagram will be used for explanation.

As shown in FIG. 39, the first movable portion 302 of the movable body 250 and the second movable portions 401 and 402 of the second effect body 900 reciprocate between the origin position (retracted position, initial position) and the effect position, respectively. It is provided so that it can be operated, and the forward operation from the origin position to the effect position and the return operation from the effect position to the origin position are considered to be actual operations actually performed in the above-mentioned movable body effect and the like.

In the effect control CPU 120, when the detected portion of the movable body is not detected by the origin detection sensor when the second initialization process is executed, that is, the origin of the movable body is some reason (for example, when the movable body is transported or installed on a game island). If it has moved from the position, or if it was not possible to return to the origin during the previous operation (for example, during the execution of the effect, the origin return of the movable body cannot be confirmed or it can be operated due to step-out, failure, catching, etc. of the motor. Corresponds to the non-detection operation control in FIG. 39 due to a position other than the origin position (for example, when an accessory error (operation abnormality) such as disappearance occurs) or when the game machine moves from the origin position due to vibration of the game machine. When it is at a predetermined position between the origin position and the effect position, such as the position indicated by the black circle, the non-detection operation control for returning to the origin is executed. When this non-detection motion control is executed, since the movable body is located at a position away from the origin position, the motion is limited to the motion of moving the movable body in the direction of the origin position.

Further, in the effect control CPU 120, when the second initialization process is executed, the detected portions of the first movable portion 302 of the movable body 250 and the second movable portions 401 and 402 of the second effect body 900 are detected by the origin detection sensor. If it is detected, the operation control at the time of detection is executed.

For example, in order to ensure that the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor, a predetermined period is determined between the time when the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor and the time when the movement of the movable body in the origin position direction is restricted. When the operable range (for example, play) is set, the origin may be returned and the vehicle may stop at a position further backward from the position detected by the origin detection sensor. Therefore, even if the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor, the operation control at the time of detection is performed to return the movable body to the more accurate origin position.

In this detection operation control, it is necessary to move the movable body to a position away from the origin position and then return it to the origin position in order to temporarily release the detection state of the detected portion by the origin detection sensor. Since it is not necessary to move the movable body, the movable body is moved from the origin position to the detection operating position near the origin position, and then returned to the origin position. That is, the reciprocating operation is performed at a shorter distance than the actual operation (see FIGS. 18A and 18B).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the actual operation confirmation operation control after executing the non-detection time operation control or the detection time operation control in the second initialization process. The operation control for confirming the actual operation is the same as the actual operation actually performed by the movable body in various effects and the like.

Next, the control speeds set when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control will be compared. The speeds shown in FIGS. 40 (A), 40 (B), and 40 (C) are control speeds set by the effect control CPU 120 to operate each movable body, and are actual movements of the movable body. It is different from the operating speed of. That is, for example, when operating a predetermined movable body, even if the same control speed is set for one moving section and another moving section between the origin position and the effect position, one moving section and another The movable body was actually operated when the mode was different between the moving sections (for example, a section with and without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), and when the moving section was raised and lowered. The operating speed in the case may differ from the control speed. Even if the same control speed is set for the movable body, if there are differences in the size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, driving mechanism, etc. of each movable body, the actual operating speed of each movable body is not always the same. Not the same. When operating multiple movable bodies with stepping motors of the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body, the size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, driving mechanism, etc. of each movable body, etc. If there is a difference, the actual operating speeds of each movable body will not necessarily be the same.

As shown in FIG. 40 (A), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the actual operation confirmation operation control, the set actual operation confirmation process data corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer. Operate the accessory to be confirmed based on the set control speed. Specifically, control is performed so that after accelerating from the origin position, the vehicle decelerates and stops at the effect position, and after accelerating from the effect position, the vehicle decelerates and stops at the origin position. That is, in the actual operation confirmation operation control for confirming that each movable body can operate normally, the control speed of the movable body is changed in the order of low speed → high speed → low speed between the origin position and the effect position. Let me. That is, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the movable body effect of each movable body, the range is the range between the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed which is faster than the minimum speed. Since each movable body is controlled to operate at the speed within, even when the operation control for actual operation confirmation is executed, the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the second speed which is faster than the minimum speed are set. Control each movable body to operate at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) of.

That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operating speeds of the movable body, and the control speed is set so as to be the minimum speed or the maximum speed as the operating speed. Will be. In the following, it is assumed that when the movable body is operated based on the minimum control speed, it operates at the minimum speed, and when the movable body is operated based on the maximum control speed, it operates at the maximum speed. To do.

Here, the control speed is set so that the operation speed during acceleration and deceleration of the movable body becomes the minimum speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation. In addition, when returning to the origin position after moving to the effect position, the movable body is ensured by controlling so as to be the lowest speed in the operation control for actual operation check for a longer time than when stopping at the effect position. After decelerating to, the origin detection sensor detects the detected part.

As shown in FIG. 40 (B), when executing the operation control at the time of detection, the effect control CPU 120 always confirms the actual operation during the period of moving from the origin position to the effect position and the period of moving from the effect position to the origin position. The movable body is controlled to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control. That is, the effect control CPU 120 has a speed in which the maximum speed in the detection operation control as the first operation control is equal to or less than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (in the present embodiment, the actual operation). The moving body is always controlled to operate based on the lowest minimum control speed set in the actual operation confirmation operation control so as to be the same as the minimum speed in the confirmation operation control).

Further, in the case of the motion control at the time of detection, since the motion distance of the movable body is shorter than the motion control for the actual motion check, the origin detection is performed at the control speed when accelerated in the motion control for the actual motion check, that is, when the motion is operated at a high speed. Check the actual operation because the sensor may not be able to detect the detected part reliably, or the movable body may be damaged by the impact when the movable body returns to the origin position and the movement is restricted from a short distance. Control to operate at the lowest speed in the operation control.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40 (C), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection time operation control, the effect control CPU 120 always moves from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. It is controlled to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. That is, the effect control CPU 120 has a maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control, which is equal to or less than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (this implementation). In the form of, the movable body is always operated based on the lowest minimum control speed set in the actual operation confirmation operation control so as to be the same speed as the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control). Control to make it.

In this case, since it is unknown how far the movable body is from the origin position, if the movable body is located near the origin position, the control speed when accelerating in the operation control for actual operation confirmation In other words, when operated at high speed, when the movable body returns to the origin position, the origin detection sensor cannot reliably detect the detected part, or the movable body returns to the origin position from a short distance and movement is restricted. Since there is a risk that the movable body or the like may be damaged due to the impact at that time, the operation is controlled so as to operate at the minimum speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control as the first operation control, the minimum control speed set in the actual operation confirmation operation control Based on the above, control is performed so that the movable body always operates at a single (constant) operating speed. Since these minimum speeds are the minimum speeds in the actual operation confirmation motion control corresponding to each movable body and are not the operation speeds common to each movable body, the minimum speeds in each movable body may be different.

Specifically, since the movable body 250 and the second effect body 900 are different in size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, and driving mechanism including the driving motor, the movable body is movable even when the same control speed is set. The actual operating speed of is different. Further, even when different control speeds are set for each movable body, the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies are different. In this way, the minimum speed is the operating speed based on the control speed set for each movable body, and in order to control the operation so as to operate at the optimum minimum speed for the movable body, a plurality of movable bodies having different modes can be used. It is possible to reliably detect at the origin position.

(12) A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
Movable bodies (for example, movable body 250, second effect body 900, third movable body, etc.) provided so as to be movable between the origin position and a position away from the origin position.
A driving means for operating the movable body and
A control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) for controlling the operation of the movable body by the drive means is provided.
When the control means does not detect the first operation control for locating the movable body at the origin position (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 does not detect steps S105 to S114 of the second initialization process as the first operation control). The operation control and the part that executes the operation control at the time of detection in steps S120 to S128, and the second operation control for confirming that the movable body can operate normally (for example, the effect control CPU 120) As the second operation control, a part for executing the actual operation confirmation operation control in steps S201 to S213 of the second initialization process and a third operation control for performing the effect by the movable body (for example, for the effect control). As the third operation control, the CPU 120 can perform a period during which the variable display of the symbol is executed, a control for executing the movable body effect in the jackpot game state, and the like).
In the second operation control, the movable body is controlled to operate within a range of the first speed and the second speed faster than the first speed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is for checking the actual operation. When the motion control is executed, the movable body is controlled to operate at a speed within a range of the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed which is faster than the minimum speed. In the first operation control, the movable body is controlled to operate at a speed equal to or lower than the first speed in the second operation control (for example, the effect control CPU 120 serves as the first operation control. When executing the operation control at the time of non-detection or the operation control at the time of detection, the speed equal to or less than the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation as the second operation control (in this embodiment, the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation). The part that controls the movable body to move at the same speed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the first motion control, the movable body operates at a speed at which it can be stopped at any timing, so that it can be safely positioned at the origin position.

(Modification 14)
Next, although not particularly shown, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a shielding member 57L that can shield the left side of the front side of the effect display device 5 from the player invisible, and the right side of the front side of the effect display device 5. A shielding member 57R that can be shielded invisible from the player, a non-shielding position that makes the front side of the effect display device 5 in a non-shielding state that can be seen by the player, and an effect display device 5 A shielding member operating motor 57a for operating the front side of the machine to a shielding position that makes it invisible to the player, a left side LED 57b mainly arranged on the shielding member 57L and composed of a plurality of LEDs, mainly It is composed of a right-hand LED 57c arranged on the shielding member 57R and composed of a plurality of LEDs, a shielding unit control board 57d on which a circuit for driving and controlling the shielding member operating motor 57a, the left-side LED 57b, and the right-side LED 57c is mounted. The circuit configuration of the shielding unit control board 57d when the shielding unit 57 is provided will be described with reference to FIG. 41.

A shielding unit control board 57d is connected to the effect control board 12, and a shielding member operation motor 57a, a left side LED 57b, and a right side LED 57c are connected to the shielding unit control board 57d. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits a control signal for controlling the excitation mode of the shield member operation motor 57a and the lighting mode of the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c to the shield unit control board 57d. By doing so, the shielding member operation motor 57a, the left side LED 57b, and the right side LED 57c can be operated in a predetermined mode according to the control signal via the shielding unit control board 57d.

The control signal transmitted by the effect control CPU 120 to the shielding unit control board 57d includes a serial control signal 1 for controlling the lighting mode of the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c (for example, the LED drive serial signal of the above embodiment (for example, the LED drive serial signal of the above embodiment). ASIBADT), etc.), serial control signal 2 for controlling the excitation mode of the shielding member operating motor 57a (for example, corresponding to the motor driving serial signal (S1TXD), etc. of the above embodiment), serial control signal 1 The clock signal 1 for transmitting the serial control signal 1 (for example, corresponding to the LED drive serial signal (ASIBACLK) of the above embodiment) and the clock signal 2 for transmitting the serial control signal 2 (for example, the motor drive of the above embodiment). A signal line for transmitting each signal from the effect control board 12 is connected to the shielding unit control board 57d via a connector. Further, these serial control signals and clock signals are transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the shield unit control board 57d by the voltage supplied on the effect control board 12 side, and are shielded as described later. Regardless of whether or not the power supply VCS is connected to the unit control board 57d, a voltage corresponding to the output state of the signal from the effect control board 12 is supplied to the signal line of the serial control signal and the signal line of the clock signal. Will be done.

Further, power is supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d from the power supply board via a plurality of power supply lines, and each circuit or the like mounted on the shielding unit control board 57d is connected to the power supply line. Power supply line to supply the power supply VCS (5V) to be operated (hereinafter, may be referred to as power supply line VCS), power supply VDC (12V) used to operate the shielding member operation motor 57a, left side LED 57b, right side LED 57c, etc. Power supply line (hereinafter, may be referred to as power supply line VDC), power supply line of power supply VSL used for other circuits, electronic components, etc. (not shown) (hereinafter, may be referred to as power supply line VSL) Is included, and a power supply line for supplying each power source is connected to the shielding unit control board 57d via a connector.

Of the power supply lines that supply power to the shielding unit control board 57d, the power supply line VCS is branched into two power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2 before being connected to the shielding unit control board 57d, and is connected to the shielding unit control board 57d. It is supposed to be done.

In this modification, although the description of the ground is omitted in the block diagram of the shielding unit control board 57d, the ground is appropriately grounded.

As shown in FIG. 41, the shielding unit control board 57d is provided with a connector 57e to which the signal line of the control signal transmitted from the effect control CPU 120 and the power supply line of the power supply are connected. The connector 57e includes a plurality of terminals, and the signal line of the serial control signal 1, the signal line of the serial control signal 2, the signal line of the clock signal 1, and the signal line of the clock signal 2 are connected to the terminal group on one end side, respectively. The power supply line VCS1, the power supply line VCS2, the power supply line VDC, and the power supply line VSL are connected to the terminal group on the other end side, respectively.

Further, each power supply line is connected to each terminal of the terminal group to which the power supply line of the connector 57e is connected in the order of the power supply lines VCS1, VSL, VDC, and VCS2 from the terminal on the signal line side of the connector 57e. The power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2 are connected to both ends of the terminal group of the power supply line. That is, the power supply line VCS1 is connected to the terminal on one end side of the terminal group of the power supply line of the connector 57e, while the power supply line VCS2 is connected to the power supply line VCS2 of the terminal group of the power supply line of the connector 57e. It is designed to be connected to the terminal on one end side opposite to the terminal.

The power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2 connected to the different terminals of the connector 57e are connected on the shielding unit control board 57d, integrated into the power supply line VCS, and then various circuits and elements on the shielding unit control board 57d, for example, It is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 and the pull-up resistors 1 and 2 described later. Further, a light emitting diode 57f is connected to the integrated power supply line VCS so that a current flows from the connector 57e side to various circuits and the like side. The light emitting diode 57f emits light when at least one of the power supply line VCS1 or the power supply line VCC2 is connected to the connector 57e and the power supply VCS is supplied to various circuits on the shielding unit control board 57d, while the connector 57e emits light. Neither the power supply line VCC1 nor the power supply line VCC2 is connected to the power supply line VCC1 and does not emit light when the power supply VCS is not supplied to various circuits on the shielding unit control board 57d. It is possible to visually recognize whether or not the power supply VCC is supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d based on the light emitting state.

On the shielding unit control board 57d, the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 received via the connector 57e are used to control the lighting mode of the parallel control signal 1 and the right LED 57c for controlling the lighting mode of the left LED 57b. A serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that converts to a parallel control signal 2, an LED drive circuit 1 that outputs a drive signal 1 that drives the left LED 57b based on the parallel control signal 1, and a drive that drives the right LED 57c based on the parallel control signal 2. The serial control signal 2 received via the LED drive circuit 2 that outputs the signal 2 and the connector 57e is converted into parallel control signals 3 to 6 for controlling the excitation mode of each excitation phase of the shielding member operation motor 57a. Motor drive circuit 1 that outputs excitation signals 1 to 4 for exciting each excitation phase of the shielding member operating motor 57a based on the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 and parallel control signals 3 to 6 to drive the shielding member operating motor 57a. ~ 4, for pulling up the signal line to a predetermined voltage (voltage of power supply VCS (5V) or less) so that the High signal and Low signal in each signal line of the parallel control signals 1 to 6 can be accurately transmitted. Equipped with various circuits and elements including noise removal circuits 1 and 2 for releasing and removing electrical noise due to static electricity, etc. that enters from the outside of the circuit via pull-up resistors 1 and 2, connector 57e, etc. to the power supply side. Has been done.

In the shielding unit control board 57d, among the signal lines of the control signals connected via the connector 57e, the signal line of the serial control signal 1 and the signal line of the clock signal 1 are connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1. Further, the signal line of the parallel control signal 1 output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 is connected to the LED drive circuit 1. Then, the signal line of the drive signal 1 output from the LED drive circuit 1 is connected to the left side LED 57b. Further, the signal line of the parallel control signal 2 output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 is connected to the LED drive circuit 2, and the signal line of the drive signal 2 output from the LED drive circuit 2 is connected to the right LED 57c. Be connected.

Further, in the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1, each signal line of the serial control signal 1, the clock signal 1, the parallel control signal 1, and the parallel control signal 2 is connected, and the power supply line VCS is connected, so that the power supply VCS is connected. When supplied, the function can be normally exerted, the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 are converted into the parallel control signal 1 and the parallel control signal 2, and these parallel control signals 1 and 2 are converted into LEDs. It is possible to output to the drive circuits 1 and 2. When the power supply VCS is not supplied, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 does not operate and is in a stopped state, and the parallel control signal 1 and the parallel control signal 2 cannot be output.

Further, the left side LED 57b is connected to the signal line of the drive signal 1 output from the LED drive circuit 1 and is connected to the power supply VDC, and the drive signal 1 to light the left side LED 57b is input. , The left side LED 57b is turned on by using the power supply VDC. Further, the signal line of the drive signal 2 output from the LED drive circuit 2 is connected to the right LED 57c, and the power supply VDC is connected, so that the drive signal 2 for lighting the right LED 57c is input. Then, the right side LED 57c is turned on by using the power supply VDC.

Further, the signal line of the parallel control signal 1 and the signal line of the parallel control signal 2 are connected to the power supply line VCS via the pull-up resistor 1. As a result, when the power supply VCS is supplied, each signal line of the parallel control signal 1 and the parallel control signal 2 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage.

Further, the signal line of the serial control signal 1 and the signal line of the clock signal 1 are connected to the power supply line VCS via the noise reduction circuit 1. The noise reduction circuit 1 is composed of a plurality of diodes, and the diodes are connected so that a current can flow from the signal line side of the serial control signal 1 and the signal line side of the clock signal 1 toward the power supply line VCS side. ing. When the power supply VCS is normally supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d, the voltage of the signal line of the serial control signal 1 and the signal line of the clock signal 1 is higher than the voltage on the power supply line VCS side in the noise reduction circuit 1. When such noise occurs, a current flows from the signal line of the serial control signal 1 and the signal line of the clock signal 1 to the power supply line VCS side, so that the signal line of the serial control signal 1 and the signal line of the clock signal 1 become. The generated noise is emitted to the power supply VCS side and removed.

In the shielding unit control board 57d, among the signal lines of the control signals connected via the connector 57e, the signal line of the serial control signal 2 and the signal line of the clock signal 2 are connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2. Further, the signal line of the parallel control signal 3 output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 is connected to the motor drive circuit 1, and the signal line of the parallel control signal 4 output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 is a motor. The signal line of the parallel control signal 5 connected to the drive circuit 2 and output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 is a signal of the parallel control signal 6 connected to the motor drive circuit 3 and output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2. The wire is connected to the motor drive circuit 4. The signal line of the excitation signal 1 output from the motor drive circuit 1 is connected to the first phase of the excitation phase of the shielding member operating motor 57a, and the signal line of the excitation signal 2 output from the motor drive circuit 2 is The signal line of the excitation signal 3 connected to the second phase of the exciting phase of the shielding member operating motor 57a and output from the motor drive circuit 3 is connected to the third phase of the exciting phase of the shielding member operating motor 57a to drive the motor. The signal line of the excitation signal 4 output from the circuit 4 is connected to the fourth phase of the excitation phase of the shielding member operation motor 57a.

Further, in the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2, each signal line of the serial control signal 2, the clock signal 2, and the parallel control signals 3 to 6 is connected, and the power supply line VCS is connected, so that the power supply VCS is supplied. If so, the function can be normally exerted, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are converted into parallel control signals 3 to 6, and these parallel control signals 3 to 6 are connected to the motor drive circuits 1 to 4. Can be output. When the power supply VCS is not supplied, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 does not operate and is in a stopped state, and the parallel control signals 3 to 6 cannot be output.

Further, the signal lines of the excitation signals 1 to 4 are connected to each of the excitation phases of the first phase to the fourth phase of the shielding member operation motor 57a, and the power supply VDC is connected to each excitation phase. By inputting the excitation signals 1 to 4 to excite the engine, the corresponding excitation phase is excited by using the power supply VDC. The excitation phases of the first phase to the fourth phase are arranged in a predetermined order (for example, along the rotation direction of the shielding member operation motor 57a, the fourth phase, the first phase, and the first phase by the signal lines of the excitation signals 1 to 4. , Phase 1 and Phase 2, Phase 2, Phase 2 and Phase 3, Phase 3, Phase 3 and Phase 4, Phase 4, Phase 4, Phase 1, ..., etc. ), The shielding member operating motor 57a is driven in a predetermined mode.

When the excitation signals 1 to 4 are input so as to excite all the exciting phases (first to fourth phases) at the same timing, the shielding member operating motor 57a is excited in all phases. As a result, the current is maintained in a stopped state without rotating, but the current continues to flow from the power supply VDC to each exciting phase during the period in which the signal is input.

Further, each signal line of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 is connected to the power supply line VCS via the pull-up resistor 2. As a result, when the power supply VCS is supplied, each signal line of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage in the same manner as the parallel control signals 1 and 2 described above.

Further, the signal line of the serial control signal 2 and the signal line of the clock signal 2 are connected to the power supply line VCS via the noise reduction circuit 2. The noise removing circuit 2 has the same configuration as the noise removing circuit 1 described above, and when the power supply VCS is normally supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d, the noise removing circuit 2 has a signal line of the serial control signal 2. And when noise occurs such that the voltage of the signal line of the clock signal 2 becomes higher than the voltage of the power supply line VCS side, a current flows from the signal line of the serial control signal 2 and the signal line of the clock signal 2 to the power supply line VCS side. By flowing, noise generated in the signal line of the serial control signal 2 and the signal line of the clock signal 2 is emitted to the power supply VCS side and removed.

As described above, in the shielding unit control board 57d of the present modification, the power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2 branched from the power supply line VCS before being connected to the shielding unit control board 57d are connected to different terminals in the connector 57e, respectively. ing. That is, the power supply line VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 and the like is connected to the shielding unit control board 57d using two wirings and two terminals of the connector 57e.

The connector 57e includes a plurality of terminals, a signal line such as a serial control signal 1 is connected to a terminal group on one end side, and a power supply line such as a power supply line VCS1 or VCS2 is connected to a terminal group on the other end side. The power supply line VCS1 is connected to the terminal on one end side of the terminal group to which the power supply line is connected, and the power supply line VCS2 is connected to the terminal on the other end side.

The power supply lines VCC1 and 2 connected via the connector 57e are integrated into the power supply line VCC on the shielding unit control board 57d, and the light emitting diode 57f is connected to the integrated power supply line VCS to control the shielding unit. When the power supply VCC is supplied to the substrate 57d and a current flows from the connector 57e side to each circuit side such as the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1, the light emitting diode 57f emits light to indicate that the power supply VCC is supplied. Can be recognized.

In the shielding unit control board 57d, the power supply line VCS connected via the connector 57e is connected to each circuit or element such as serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2, noise elimination circuits 1 and 2, and pull-up resistors 1 and 2. By supplying a predetermined power supply (5V) by the power supply line VCS, the circuits such as the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 are in a state where they can normally function, and the shielding unit control board 57d from the effect control CPU 120. Based on the serial control signals 1 and 2 output to the above, the shielding member operating motor 57a, the left side LED 57b, and the right side LED 57c connected to the shielding unit control board 57d can be operated.

The noise reduction circuit 1 of the shielding unit control board 57d is connected to the signal lines of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 and the wiring of the power supply VCS, and the signal of the control signal is connected via the noise removal circuit 1. The wire is connected to the wiring of the power supply VCS. Further, the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 are input to each signal line at the voltage supplied from the effect control board 12, and the effect control board is on the control signal side of the noise removal circuit 1. A voltage corresponding to the output state of the signal from 12 is supplied. That is, the control signal side of the noise reduction circuit 1 has a predetermined High voltage when the signal is transmitted by the serial control signal 2, and a predetermined Low voltage when the signal is not transmitted. With the voltage changing to and the serial control signal 2, a voltage changing within a predetermined High voltage and a predetermined Low voltage range is applied in a predetermined cycle regardless of whether or not the signal is transmitted. .. Then, when the power supply VCS is not normally supplied to the noise removing circuit 1, the voltage applied to the noise removing circuit 1 due to the input of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 is a capacitance component in the noise removing circuit 1. By leveling with the voltage component and the inductance component, the voltage is output to the wiring side of the power supply VCC of the noise elimination circuit 1 at a substantially constant voltage. In such a case, an unintended voltage is applied to each of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 connected to the wiring of the power supply VCS via the pull-up resistor.

Further, the noise elimination circuit 2 of the shielding unit control board 57d is connected to the signal line of the serial control signal 2, the clock signal 2, and the wiring of the power supply VCS, and the signal of the control signal is connected via the noise elimination circuit 2. The wire is connected to the wiring of the power supply VCS. Further, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are input to each signal line at the voltage supplied from the effect control board 12, and the effect control board is on the control signal side of the noise removal circuit 2. A voltage corresponding to the output state of the signal from 12 is supplied. That is, the control signal side of the noise reduction circuit 2 has a predetermined High voltage when the signal is transmitted by the serial control signal 2, and a predetermined Low voltage when the signal is not transmitted. With the voltage changing to and the serial control signal 2, a voltage changing within a predetermined High voltage and a predetermined Low voltage range is applied in a predetermined cycle regardless of whether or not the signal is transmitted. .. Then, when the power supply VCS is not normally supplied to the noise removing circuit 2, the voltage applied to the noise removing circuit 2 due to the input of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 is a capacitance component in the noise removing circuit 2. By leveling with the voltage component and the inductance component, the voltage is output to the wiring side of the power supply VCS of the noise elimination circuit 1 at a substantially constant voltage. In such a case, an unintended voltage is applied to each of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 connected to the wiring of the power supply VCS via the pull-up resistor.

Then, the voltage output from the noise removal circuits 1 and 2 to the wiring side of the power supply VCS with the input of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 is a sufficiently high voltage (LED drive circuits 1 and 2 and motor drive circuits 1 and 2). When the parallel control signals 1 to 6 are input in 4 and the voltage is equal to or higher than the threshold voltage of the voltage determined to be ON), the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 output the parallel control signals 1 to 6. Despite the absence, the voltage output from the noise removal circuits 1 and 2 acts as parallel control signals 1 and 2 to operate the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 so as to light the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c. There is a risk that the motor drive circuits 1 to 4 may be operated so as to act as parallel control signals 3 to 6 to simultaneously excite each exciting phase of the shielding member operating motor 57a. In particular, the clock signals 1 and 2 are signals whose voltage becomes a high voltage in a predetermined cycle, and regardless of whether or not it is the timing to operate the shielding member operating motor 57a, the left side LED 57b, and the right side LED 57c, the effect control board. Since it is a signal that is continuously output from 12 to the shielding unit control board 57d, the LED drive circuit 1 and the LED drive circuit 1 and the voltage that are output from the noise removal circuits 1 and 2 with the input of the clock signals 1 and 2 are used. There is a risk that drive signals 1 and 2 may be output from 2 or excitation signals 1 to 4 may be output from motor drive circuits 1 to 4. That is, if the power supply VCS is not normally supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d, the shielding member operating motor 57a, the left side LED 57b, and the right side LED 57c may be operated unintentionally.

Some conventional gaming machines include a conversion circuit that converts a control signal output from a control board into a drive signal, and drive an electric component such as an LED based on the drive signal. In such a configuration, for example, the power supply used for the conversion circuit may be used for a circuit for removing noise of a control signal or a circuit for generating a drive signal. In such a case, the power supply line is disconnected. If the power supply is stopped due to such reasons, the clock signal superimposed on the control signal may be output from the control signal line to the drive signal line via the noise elimination circuit. In such a case, the drive signal is output. Even though it has not been done, the electric parts will operate.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present modification, the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 are converted into the parallel control signal 1. It is input from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that converts to 2 and 2 and outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b in response to the parallel control signal 1 and LED drive that lights the right LED 57c in response to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. A circuit 2 is provided, and a power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1, and the power supply VCS is a signal line of a serial control signal 1 and a clock signal 1 (No. 1). It is connected to a noise removal circuit 1 for removing noise of 1 signal line) and a pull-up resistor 1 that pulls up the voltage of the signal lines (2nd signal line) of parallel control signals 1 and 2, and the power supply VCS is The configuration is such that the power supply lines are supplied via the two power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 1 and 2 is a serial control signal. In the configuration connected to the noise reduction circuit 1 of the signal line (first signal line) of 1 and the clock signal 1 and the pull-up resistor 1 of the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, the power supply VCS Since the supply via the two power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2 makes it difficult to stop the supply of the power supply VCS, the left side LED 57b and the right side LED 57c operate unintentionally by stopping the supply of the power supply VCS. It can be prevented from being lost.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 into parallel control signals 3 to 6. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that is output to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 and the parallel control signal that is input from the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. Motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a are provided according to 3 to 6, and a power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2. The power supply VCS includes a noise removing circuit 2 for removing noise from the signal lines (first signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2, and signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. It is connected to a pull-up resistor 2 that pulls up the voltage of the power supply, and the power supply VCS is supplied via two power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 3 to 6 is a serial control signal. In the configuration connected to the noise removal circuit 2 of the clock signal 2 and the clock signal 2 (first signal line) and the pull-up resistor 2 of the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, there are two power supply VCSs. By being supplied via the power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2, it becomes difficult to stop the supply of the power supply VCS. Therefore, when the supply of the power supply VCS is stopped, the shielding member operation motor 57a operates unintentionally. Can be prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. In addition, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are converted into parallel control signals 3 to 6, and the parallel control signals 3 to 3 are provided. According to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 output to the signal line (4th signal line) of 6 and the parallel control signals 3 to 6 input from the signal lines (4th signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. Motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a are provided, and a power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2, and the power supply VCS is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2. , Pull up the voltage of the noise removal circuit 2 for removing the noise of the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 and the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2. It is connected to the pull-up resistor 1 and is supplied via two power supply lines, VCS1 and VCS2. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 3 to 6 is a serial control signal. In the configuration connected to the noise removal circuit 2 of the clock signal 2 and the clock signal 2 (third signal line) and the pull-up resistor 1 of the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, there are two power supply VCSs. Since the supply via the power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2 makes it difficult to stop the supply of the power supply VCS, the left side LED 57b and the right side LED 57c operate unintentionally when the power supply VCS is stopped. Can be prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. In addition, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal lines (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are combined with the signal lines of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 (first signal line). A serial / parallel conversion circuit that converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from) into parallel control signals 1 and 2 and outputs them to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b in response to the parallel control signal 1 input from the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, and the signal line of the parallel control signal 2 (second signal line). It is provided with an LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line), and is input from the signal lines (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2. A serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 into parallel control signals 3 to 6 and outputs them to the signal line (fourth signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, and a parallel control signal. A serial / parallel conversion circuit including motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a in response to parallel control signals 3 to 6 input from the signal lines 3 to 6 (fourth signal line). A power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to 1 and 2, and the power supply VCS removes noise from the signal lines (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1. It is connected to the noise removal circuit 1 and the pull-up resistor 2 that pulls up the voltage of the signal lines (fourth signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, and the power supply VCS connects the two power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2. It is a configuration that is supplied via. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 1 and 2 is a serial control signal. In the configuration connected to the noise reduction circuit 1 of 1 and the clock signal 1 (1st signal line) and the pull-up resistor 2 of the signal lines (4th signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, there are two power supply VCSs. By being supplied via the power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2, it becomes difficult to stop the supply of the power supply VCS. Therefore, when the supply of the power supply VCS is stopped, the shielding member operation motor 57a operates unintentionally. Can be prevented.

In this modification, a serial / parallel conversion circuit that converts a serial control signal and a clock signal into a parallel control signal and outputs the signal, and an electric component (shielding member operating motor 57a, left LED 57b, right side) according to the parallel control signal. Although the configuration includes a drive circuit for driving the LED 57c), an electrical component other than the shielding member operating motor 57a, the left LED 57b, and the right LED 57c, for example, a vibration motor, may be applied as the electric component for driving the drive circuit.

Further, in this modification, in the shielding unit control board 57d, the power supply VCS is supplied via the two power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2, but the power supply VCS is supplied via a plurality of power supply lines of three or more. The configuration may be supplied.

Further, in this modification, the shielding unit control equipped with the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 that convert the serial control signal and the clock signal transmitted by the effect control CPU 120 into a parallel control signal for operating a predetermined electric component. The board 57d is configured to supply the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 via the two power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2, and the serial control signal and the clock signal transmitted by the CPU 103. In a control board equipped with a serial / parallel conversion circuit that converts a signal into a parallel control signal, a power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit may be supplied via a plurality of power supply lines. Even in the configuration, since the power supply VCS is supplied through a plurality of power supply lines, it is difficult to stop the power supply VCS supply. Therefore, when the power supply VCS supply is stopped, a predetermined electric component operates unintentionally. It can be prevented from doing so.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modified example has a configuration in which a power supply VCS is supplied to a shielding unit control board 57d on which circuits such as a serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 and motor drive circuits 1 to 4 are mounted via a connector 57e. At the same time, the power supply line of the power supply VCS is branched into the power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2 before being connected to the shielding unit control board 57d, and one end side of the plurality of terminals to which the power supply including the power supply VCS is supplied at the connector 57e. The power supply line VCS1 is connected to the terminal of the connector, and the power supply line VCS2 is connected to the terminal on the other end side. Is the configuration used to supply the power supply VCS. In such a configuration, it is difficult to stop the supply of the power supply VCS even if a predetermined connector connected to the connector 57e is about to come off.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 2 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. A power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1, and the power supply VCS is a signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1. It is connected to a noise removal circuit 1 for removing noise and a pull-up resistor 1 that pulls up the voltage of the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2. By connecting the light emitting diode 57f, it is possible to confirm whether or not the power supply VCS is supplied. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 is connected to the noise reduction circuit 1 of the first signal line and the pull-up resistor 1 of the second signal line. Since it is possible to confirm the presence or absence of supply and to recognize that the supply of the power supply VCS has stopped, it is possible to prevent the left side LED 57b and the right side LED 57c from operating unintentionally.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal lines (first signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 into parallel control signals 3 to 6. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that is output to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 and the parallel control signal that is input from the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. Motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a are provided according to 3 to 6, and a power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2. The power supply VCS includes a noise removing circuit 2 for removing noise from the signal lines (first signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2, and signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. It is connected to a pull-up resistor 2 that pulls up the voltage of the power supply, and a light emitting diode 57f is connected to the power supply line of the power supply VCS, so that it is possible to confirm whether or not the power supply VCS is supplied. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 is connected to the noise reduction circuit 2 of the first signal line and the pull-up resistor 2 of the second signal line. Since it is possible to confirm the presence or absence of supply and to recognize that the supply of the power supply VCS has stopped, it is possible to prevent the shielding member operation motor 57a from operating unintentionally.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. In addition, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are converted into parallel control signals 3 to 6, and the parallel control signals 3 to 3 are provided. According to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 output to the signal line (4th signal line) of 6 and the parallel control signals 3 to 6 input from the signal lines (4th signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. Motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a are provided, and a power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2, and the power supply VCS is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2. , Pull up the voltage of the noise removal circuit 2 for removing the noise of the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 and the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2. It is connected to the pull-up resistor 1 to be connected, and the light emitting diode 57f is connected to the power supply line of the power supply VCS, so that it is possible to confirm whether or not the power supply VCS is supplied. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the third signal line into the parallel control signals 3 to 6 is a serial control signal. In the configuration connected to the noise reduction circuit 2 of the signal line (third signal line) of the clock signal 2 and the pull-up resistor 1 of the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, the power supply VCS Since the light emitting diode 57f is connected to the power supply line, it is possible to confirm whether or not the power supply VCS is supplied and to recognize that the power supply VCS supply has stopped. Therefore, the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c are intended. It is possible to prevent it from operating without.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. In addition, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal lines (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are combined with the signal lines of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 (first signal line). A serial / parallel conversion circuit that converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from) into parallel control signals 1 and 2 and outputs them to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b in response to the parallel control signal 1 input from the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, and the signal line of the parallel control signal 2 (second signal line). It is provided with an LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line), and is input from the signal lines (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2. A serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 into parallel control signals 3 to 6 and outputs them to the signal line (fourth signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, and a parallel control signal. A serial / parallel conversion circuit including motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving a shielding member operation motor 57a in response to parallel control signals 3 to 6 input from the signal lines 3 to 6 (fourth signal line). A power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to 1 and 2, and the power supply VCS removes noise from the signal lines (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1. It is connected to the noise removal circuit 1 and the pull-up resistor 2 that pulls up the voltage of the signal lines (fourth signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, and the light emitting diode 57f is connected to the power supply line of the power supply VCS. This is a configuration in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the power supply VCS is supplied. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 1 and 2 is a serial control signal. In the configuration connected to the noise removal circuit 1 of 1 and the clock signal 1 (1st signal line) and the pull-up resistor 2 of the signal lines (4th signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, the power supply line of the power supply VCS By connecting the light emitting diode 57f, it is possible to confirm whether or not the power supply VCS is supplied, and it is possible to recognize that the power supply VCS supply has stopped. Therefore, the shielding member operation motor 57a operates unintentionally. It can be prevented from doing so.

In this modification, in the shielding unit control board 57d, the power supply VCS is supplied via the two power supply lines VCC1 and VCS2, and the light emitting diode 57f is connected to the power supply line of the power supply VCS. However, in the configuration in which the power supply VCS is supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d via one power supply line, the light emitting diode 57f may be connected to the power supply line of the power supply VCS. Even in such a configuration, since the light emitting diode 57f is connected to the power supply line of the power supply VCS, it is possible to confirm the presence or absence of the power supply VCS supply and to recognize that the power supply VCS supply has stopped. It is possible to prevent the shielding member operation motor 57a, the left side LED 57b, and the right side LED 57c from operating unintentionally.

Further, in the modification, the embodiment in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is another example of the gaming machine. , Slot machines where the number of bets is set using medals and credits as the value for games, slot machines where the number of bets is set using game balls as the value for games, and bets using only credits as the value for games It may be applied to a fully credited slot machine that sets the number. When the game ball is used as the game value, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when the bet number is set to 3 in the modification, 15 game balls are used. Corresponds to setting the number of bets using.

(Modification 15)
Next, a modification 15 of the pachinko gaming machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. Since the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of this modification includes the same configuration as that of the above-described modification 14, the differences will be mainly described here.

In the modified example 14, the power supply VCS is supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d via the two power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2. However, in the modified example 15, as shown in FIG. 42, the shielding unit is supplied. The power supply VCS is supplied to the control board 57d via one power supply line, and the power supply VCS side of the pull-up resistor 1 of the signal lines of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 output by the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 The parallel control signal 3 output by the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 and the rotation prevention circuit 1 that prevents the current from flowing into the signal line side of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 and the application of the voltage from the power supply VCS side. On the power supply VCS side of the pull-up resistor 2 of the signal lines of ~ 6, the wraparound prevention circuit 2 that prevents current from flowing from the power supply VCS side to the signal line side of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 and the shielding unit control The configuration is further provided on the substrate 57d.

As shown in FIG. 42, one end of the wraparound prevention circuit 1 is connected to the signal line of the parallel control signal 1 and the signal line of the parallel control signal 2 via the pull-up resistor 1, and the wraparound prevention circuit 1 is connected to the signal line of the parallel control signal 2. The other end side is connected to the wiring of the power supply line VCS. The turn-around prevention circuit 1 is configured by using a Zener diode or the like, and is connected to the power supply line VCS side and the pull-up resistor via the Zener diode or the like so that no current flows from the power supply line VCS side to the pull-up resistor 1 side. One side is connected. In the turn-around prevention circuit 1, it is determined that the voltage on the wiring side of the power supply line VCS is in the ON state in which the parallel control signals 1 to 6 are input in the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 and the motor drive circuits 1 to 4. When the voltage exceeds the voltage threshold, that is, when the voltage is a predetermined voltage (voltage of the power supply VCS (5V)), the voltage of the power supply VCS is applied to the pull-up resistor 1 side, while the voltage of the power supply line VCS is applied to the wiring side. When the voltage is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold (voltage threshold for determining the ON state in which parallel control signals 1 to 6 are input in the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 and the motor drive circuits 1 to 4), for example, the power supply line VCS. When the power supply VCS is not normally supplied to the wiring side and the voltage associated with the input of the serial control signals 1 and 2 and the clock signals 1 and 2 is output from the noise elimination circuits 1 and 2, the voltage is applied. It is designed so that it is not applied to the pull-up resistor 1 side.

Further, one end side of the turn-around prevention circuit 2 is connected to each signal line of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 via a pull-up resistor 2, and the other end side of the turn-around prevention circuit 2 is connected to a power supply line VCS. There is. The turn-around prevention circuit 2 has the same configuration as the turn-around prevention circuit 1, and is configured by using a Zener diode or the like. When a power supply VCS is not supplied, a current flows from the power supply line VCC side to the pull-up resistor 2 side. The power supply line VCC side and the pull-up resistor 2 side are connected via a Zener diode or the like so that the current does not flow. In the turn-around prevention circuit 2, similarly to the turn-around prevention circuit 1, the voltage on the wiring side of the power supply line VCC is set to a predetermined threshold value (parallel control signals 1 to 6 are set in the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 and the motor drive circuits 1 to 4). When the voltage exceeds the input voltage threshold for determining the ON state), that is, when the voltage is a predetermined voltage (voltage of the power supply VCS (5V)), the voltage of the power supply VCS is applied to the pull-up resistor 2 side. Then, the voltage on the wiring side of the power supply line VCS is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold (voltage threshold for determining the ON state in which parallel control signals 1 to 6 are input in the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 and the motor drive circuits 1 to 4). In the case of, for example, the power supply VCS is not normally supplied to the wiring side of the power supply line VCS, and the voltage associated with the input of the serial control signals 1 and 2 and the clock signals 1 and 2 is output from the noise removal circuits 1 and 2. In such a case, the voltage is not applied to the pull-up resistor 2 side.

As described above, in the shielding unit control board 57d of the present modification, the pull-up resistor 1 and the power supply line VCS are connected via the turn-around prevention circuit 1, so that the power supply VCS is not supplied. The current discharged from the noise reduction circuits 1 and 2 to the power supply line VCS side flows around the pull-up resistor 1 side, that is, the signal line of the parallel control signal 1 and the signal line of the parallel control signal 2 from the power supply line VCS side. The voltage associated with the input of the serial control signals 1 and 2 and the clock signals 1 and 2 is the voltage output from the noise removal circuits 1 and 2, and the voltage is the signal line and parallel control signal of the parallel control signal 1 on the pull-up resistor 1 side. It is designed to prevent it from being applied to the signal line of 2.

Further, in the shielding unit control board 57d of this modification, the pull-up resistor 2 and the power supply line VCS are connected via the turn-around prevention circuit 2, so that the above-mentioned noise removal circuit is used when the power supply VCS is not supplied. The current discharged from the power supply line VCS side to the power supply line VCS side wraps around the pull-up resistor 2 side, that is, the signal lines of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, and flows from the power supply line VCS side to the serial control signals 1 and 2. To prevent the voltage associated with the input of the clock signals 1 and 2 from being applied to the signal lines of the parallel control signals 3 to 4 on the pull-up resistor 2 side by the voltage output from the noise removal circuits 1 and 2. It has become.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 2 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. A power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1, and the power supply VCS is a signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1. It is connected to the noise removal circuit 1 for removing noise and the pull-up resistor 1 that pulls up the voltage of the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, and is connected to the noise removal circuit 1 to the second signal. It is configured to include a turn-around prevention circuit 1 capable of preventing a current from flowing to the wire. In such a configuration, in a configuration in which the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 is connected to the noise removing circuit 1 of the first signal line and the pull-up resistor 1 of the second signal line, the noise removing circuit It is equipped with a turn-around prevention circuit 1 that can prevent current from flowing from the 1st to the 2nd signal line, and even if the supply of the power supply VCS is stopped, the current may flow from the noise removal circuit 1 to the 2nd signal line. Since this is prevented, current does not flow into the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 connected to the second signal line, and it is possible to prevent the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c from operating unintentionally.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 into parallel control signals 3 to 6. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that is output to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 and the parallel control signal that is input from the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. Motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a are provided according to 3 to 6, and a power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2. The power supply VCS includes a noise removing circuit 2 for removing noise from the signal lines (first signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2, and signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. It is connected to a pull-up resistor 2 that pulls up the voltage of the above signal, and is provided with a turn-around prevention circuit 2 that can prevent a current from flowing from the noise removing circuit 2 to the second signal line. In such a configuration, in a configuration in which the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 is connected to the noise removing circuit 2 of the first signal line and the pull-up resistor 2 of the second signal line, the noise removing circuit A turn-around prevention circuit 2 capable of preventing current from flowing from the second signal line to the second signal line is provided, and even if the supply of the power supply VCS is stopped, the current may flow from the noise elimination circuit 2 to the second signal line. Since this is prevented, current does not flow into the motor drive circuits 1 to 4 connected to the second signal line, and it is possible to prevent the shielding member operating motor 57a from operating unintentionally.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. In addition, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are converted into parallel control signals 3 to 6, and the parallel control signals 3 to 3 are provided. According to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 output to the signal line (4th signal line) of 6 and the parallel control signals 3 to 6 input from the signal lines (4th signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. Motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a are provided, and a power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2, and the power supply VCS is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2. , Pull up the voltage of the noise removal circuit 2 for removing the noise of the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 and the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2. It is configured to include a turn-around prevention circuit 1 which is connected to a pull-up resistor 1 and can prevent a current from flowing from the noise removing circuit 2 to the second signal line. In such a configuration, in a configuration in which the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 is connected to the noise removing circuit 2 of the first signal line and the pull-up resistor 1 of the second signal line, the noise removing circuit A turn-around prevention circuit 1 capable of preventing current from flowing from the second signal line to the second signal line is provided, and even if the supply of the power supply VCS is stopped, the current may flow from the noise elimination circuit 2 to the second signal line. Since this is prevented, current does not flow into the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 connected to the second signal line, and it is possible to prevent the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c from operating unintentionally.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. In addition, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal lines (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are combined with the signal lines of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 (first signal line). A serial / parallel conversion circuit that converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from) into parallel control signals 1 and 2 and outputs them to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left side LED 57b in response to the parallel control signal 1 input from the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, and the signal line of the parallel control signal 2 (second signal line). It is provided with an LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c in response to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line), and is input from the signal lines (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2. A serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 into parallel control signals 3 to 6 and outputs them to the signal line (fourth signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, and a parallel control signal. A serial / parallel conversion circuit including motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving a shielding member operation motor 57a in response to parallel control signals 3 to 6 input from signal lines 3 to 6 (fourth signal line). A power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to 1 and 2, and the power supply VCS removes noise from the signal lines (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1. It is connected to the noise elimination circuit 1 and the pull-up resistor 2 that pulls up the voltage of the signal lines (fourth signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, and the current flows from the noise elimination circuit 1 to the fourth signal line. The configuration is provided with a turn-around prevention circuit 2 capable of preventing the above-mentioned. In such a configuration, in a configuration in which the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 is connected to the noise removing circuit 1 of the first signal line and the pull-up resistor 2 of the fourth signal line, the noise removing circuit It is equipped with a turn-around prevention circuit 2 that can prevent current from flowing from the 1st to the 4th signal line, and even if the power supply VCS is stopped, the current may flow from the noise removal circuit 1 to the 4th signal line. Since this is prevented, current does not flow into the motor drive circuits 1 to 4 connected to the fourth signal line, and it is possible to prevent the shielding member operating motor 57a from operating unintentionally.

In this modification, the turn-around prevention circuits 1 and 2 are configured by using a Zener diode, and by connecting the power supply line VCC side and the signal line side of the parallel control signal via the Zener diode. When the power supply VCS is not supplied, the current flows from the power supply line VCS side to the signal line side of the parallel control signal, and the voltage associated with the input of the serial control signal and the clock signal is output from the noise removal circuits 1 and 2. The configuration is such that the voltage is not applied to the signal lines of the parallel control signals 1 to 6, but an anti-rotation circuit may be configured by using electronic components other than the Zener diode, for example, a transistor or a transistor. When the power supply VCS is not supplied to the power supply line VCS side of the turn-around prevention circuit using a FET, the current flow or voltage from the power supply line VCS side of the turn-around prevention circuit to the signal line side of the parallel control signal It may be configured to block the application.

Further, in this modification, the shielding unit control equipped with the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 that convert the serial control signal and the clock signal transmitted by the effect control CPU 120 into a parallel control signal for operating a predetermined electric component. The board 57d is provided with a turn-around prevention circuit capable of preventing the current from the noise removal circuit of the signal lines of the serial control signal and the clock signal from flowing into the signal line of the parallel control signal. In a control board equipped with a serial / parallel conversion circuit that converts a control signal and a clock signal into a parallel control signal, the current from the noise elimination circuit of the signal line of the serial control signal and the clock signal input from the CPU 103 is the parallel control signal. A configuration including a turn-around prevention circuit that can prevent the signal line from flowing into the signal line may be provided. Even with such a configuration, even if the supply of the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit or the like is stopped, the noise removal circuit Since it is prevented that a current flows into the signal line of the parallel control signal, it is possible to prevent a predetermined electric component from operating unintentionally.

Although the modified example 15 of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this modified example, and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as that of the modified example 14 has the same effect as that described in the modified example 14. Further, the modified example illustrated with respect to the modified example 14 can also be applied to the modified example 15.

(Modification 16)
A modified example 16 of the pachinko gaming machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. Since the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of this modification includes the same configuration as that of the above-described modification 14, the differences will be mainly described here.

In the modified example 14, the power supply VCS is supplied via the two power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2 in the shielding unit control board 57d. However, in the modified example 16, as shown in FIG. 43, the shielding unit is supplied. The power supply VCS is supplied to the control board 57d via one power supply line, and when the power supply VCS is not supplied, the time to prevent the current from flowing into the LED drive circuit 1 from the power supply line VCS side. A shielding unit control board 57d is provided with a penetration prevention circuit 1 and a rotation prevention circuit 2 that prevents current from flowing in from the power supply line VCS side and voltage application to the LED drive circuit 2 when the power supply VCS is not supplied. In addition to the above, a turn-around prevention circuit 3 that prevents current from flowing into the motor drive circuit 1 from the power supply line VCS side when the power supply VCS is not supplied, and a motor when the power supply VCS is not supplied. A turn-around prevention circuit 4 that prevents current from flowing into the drive circuit 2 from the power supply line VCS side, and a turn-around prevention circuit 4 that prevents current from flowing into the motor drive circuit 3 from the power supply line VCS side when the power supply VCS is not supplied. Shielding unit control board with a turn-around prevention circuit 5 and a turn-around prevention circuit 6 that prevents current from flowing in from the power supply line VCS side and voltage application to the motor drive circuit 4 when the power supply VCS is not supplied. It is a configuration further prepared for 57d.

As shown in FIG. 43, the turn-around prevention circuit 1 is arranged on the signal line of the parallel control signal 1, and one end side of the turn-around prevention circuit 1 is connected to the power supply line VCS via a pull-up resistor 1 to turn around. The other end side of the penetration prevention circuit 1 is connected to the LED drive circuit 1 via the signal line. The turn-around prevention circuit 1 is configured by using a Zener diode, and when the power supply VCS is not supplied, the Zener diode is used so that a current does not flow from the power supply line VCC side to the LED drive circuit 1 side. Therefore, the power supply line VCC side and the LED drive circuit 1 side are connected. In the turn-around prevention circuit 1, the voltage of the signal line of the parallel control signal 1 on the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 side is a predetermined threshold value (the voltage at which the LED drive circuit 1 determines that the parallel control signal 1 is input to the ON state). When the threshold value) is exceeded, that is, when the parallel control signal 1 is output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 at a normal voltage, the voltage of the control signal is applied to the LED drive circuit 1 side, and the parallel control signal is signaled. While 1 is transmitted, the voltage of the signal line of the parallel control signal 1 on the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 side is a predetermined threshold value (voltage for determining that the parallel control signal 1 is input to the LED drive circuit 1 in the ON state. In the case of (threshold) or less, for example, the power supply VCS is not normally supplied to the wiring side of the power supply line VCS, the parallel control signal 1 is not normally output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1, and the noise removal circuit is used. When the voltage associated with the input of the serial control signals 1 and 2 and the clock signals 1 and 2 is output from 1 and 2, the voltage is not applied to the LED drive circuit 1 side. ..

The turn-around prevention circuit 2 is arranged on the signal line of the parallel control signal 2, and one end side of the turn-around prevention circuit 2 is connected to the power supply line VCS via a pull-up resistor 1, and the other end of the turn-around prevention circuit 2 is connected. The side is connected to the LED drive circuit 2 via the signal line. The turn-around prevention circuit 2 has the same configuration as the turn-around prevention circuit 1, and is a Zener diode so that a current does not flow from the power supply line VCC side to the LED drive circuit 2 side when the power supply VCS is not supplied. The power supply line VCC side and the LED drive circuit 2 side are connected via the above. In the turn-around prevention circuit 2, similarly to the turn-around prevention circuit 1, when the parallel control signal 2 is output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 at a normal voltage, the voltage of the control signal is the LED drive circuit 1. While the parallel control signal 1 is transmitted to the side, when the power supply VCS is not normally supplied to the wiring side of the power supply line VCS, the noise removal circuits 1 and 2 send the serial control signals 1 and 2 and the clock signal 1 The voltage associated with the inputs of 2 and 2 is not applied to the LED drive circuit 1 side.

The turn-around prevention circuit 3 is arranged on the signal line of the parallel control signal 3, and one end side of the turn-around prevention circuit 3 is connected to the power supply line VCS via a pull-up resistor 2, and the other end of the turn-around prevention circuit 3 is connected. The side is connected to the motor drive circuit 1 via the signal line. The turn-around prevention circuit 3 has the same configuration as the turn-around prevention circuit 1, and is a Zener diode so that a current does not flow from the power supply line VCS side to the motor drive circuit 1 side when the power supply VCS is not supplied. The power supply line VCC side and the motor drive circuit 1 side are connected via the above. In the turn-around prevention circuit 3, similarly to the turn-around prevention circuit 1, when the parallel control signal 3 is output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 at a normal voltage, the voltage of the control signal is the motor drive circuit 1. While the parallel control signal 3 is transmitted to the side, when the power supply VCS is not normally supplied to the wiring side of the power supply line VCS, the noise removal circuits 1 and 2 send the serial control signals 1 and 2 and the clock signal 1 The voltage associated with the inputs of 2 and 2 is not applied to the motor drive circuit 1 side. Hereinafter, the wraparound prevention circuits 4 to 6 are the same as those of the wraparound prevention circuit 3.

The turn-around prevention circuits 4 to 6 are arranged on each signal line of the parallel control signals 4 to 6, and one end side of the turn-around prevention circuits 4 to 6 is connected to the power supply line VCS via a pull-up resistor 2 to turn around. The other end side of the insertion prevention circuits 4 to 6 is connected to the motor drive circuits 2 to 4 via the signal line. The turn-around prevention circuits 4 to 6 have the same configuration as the turn-around prevention circuit 1, and when the power supply VCS is not supplied, no current flows from the power supply line VCS side to the motor drive circuits 2 to 4 side. As described above, the power supply line VCS side and the motor drive circuits 2 to 4 are connected via the Zener diode.

As described above, in the shielding unit control board 57d of the present modification, the connection points of the parallel control signals 1 to 6 and the pull-up resistors 1 and 2 are rotated between the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 and the motor drive circuits 1 to 4. By providing the penetration prevention circuits 1 to 6, respectively, when the power supply VCS is not supplied, the current or voltage emitted from the noise removal circuits 1 and 2 described above to the power supply line VCS side is generated by the LED drive circuits 1 and 2. , It is designed to prevent the motor drive circuits 1 to 4 from wrapping around.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 2 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. A power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1, and the power supply VCS is a signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1. It is connected to the noise removal circuit 1 for removing noise and the pull-up resistor 1 that pulls up the voltage of the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, and the current from the noise removal circuit 1 is It is configured to include rotation prevention circuits 1 and 2 capable of preventing flow to the LED drive circuits 1 and 2. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 1 and 2 is a serial control signal. In the configuration connected to the noise removing circuit 1 of the signal line (first signal line) of 1 and the clock signal 1 and the pull-up resistor 1 of the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, the noise removing circuit The turn-around prevention circuits 1 and 2 that can prevent the current from 1 from flowing to the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 are provided, and even if the supply of the power supply VCS is stopped, the noise removal circuit 1 is connected to the LED drive circuits 1 and 2. Since it is possible to prevent the current from flowing in, it is possible to prevent the left side LED 57b and the right side LED 57c from operating unintentionally.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 into parallel control signals 3 to 6. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 and the parallel control signal input from the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 Motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a are provided according to 3 to 6, and a power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2. The power supply VCS includes a noise removing circuit 2 for removing noise from the signal lines (first signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2, and signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. It is connected to the pull-up resistor 2 that pulls up the voltage of the above, and includes the turn-around prevention circuits 3 to 6 that can prevent the current from the noise removal circuit 2 from flowing to the motor drive circuits 1 to 4. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 3 to 6 is a serial control signal. 2 and the noise removal circuit 2 of the clock signal 2 (first signal line) and the pull-up resistor 2 of the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 are connected to the noise removal circuit 2. It is provided with turn-around prevention circuits 3 to 6 capable of preventing current from flowing to the motor drive circuits 1 to 4, and even if the supply of the power supply VCS is stopped, current flows from the noise removal circuit 2 to the motor drive circuits 1 to 4. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shielding member operating motor 57a from operating unintentionally.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. In addition, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are converted into parallel control signals 3 to 6, and the parallel control signals 3 to 3 are provided. According to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 output to the signal line (4th signal line) of 6 and the parallel control signals 3 to 6 input from the signal lines (4th signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. Motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a are provided, and a power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2, and the power supply VCS is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2. , Pull up the voltage of the noise removal circuit 2 for removing the noise of the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 and the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2. It is connected to the pull-up resistor 1 to prevent the signal from flowing to the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 and is provided with the turn-around prevention circuits 1 and 2. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 3 to 6 is a serial control signal. 2 and the noise removal circuit 2 of the clock signal 2 (third signal line) and the pull-up resistor 1 of the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 are connected to the noise removal circuit 2. The rotation prevention circuits 1 and 2 that can prevent the current from flowing to the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 are provided, and even if the power supply VCS is stopped, the current flows from the noise removal circuit 2 to the LED drive circuits 1 and 2. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the left side LED 57b and the right side LED 57c from operating unintentionally.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. In addition, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal lines (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are combined with the signal lines of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 (first signal line). A serial / parallel conversion circuit that converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from) into parallel control signals 1 and 2 and outputs them to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left side LED 57b in response to the parallel control signal 1 input from the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, and the signal line of the parallel control signal 2 (second signal line). It is provided with an LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c in response to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line), and is input from the signal lines (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2. A serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 into parallel control signals 3 to 6 and outputs them to the signal line (fourth signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, and a parallel control signal. A serial / parallel conversion circuit including motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving a shielding member operation motor 57a in response to parallel control signals 3 to 6 input from signal lines 3 to 6 (fourth signal line). A power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to 1 and 2, and the power supply VCS removes noise from the signal lines (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1. It is connected to the noise elimination circuit 1 and the pull-up resistor 2 that pulls up the voltage of the signal lines (fourth signal lines) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, and the current from the noise elimination circuit 1 is applied to the motor drive circuits 1 to 1. It is configured to include rotation prevention circuits 3 to 6 capable of preventing the flow to 4. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 1 and 2 is a serial control signal. 1 and the noise removal circuit 1 of the clock signal 1 (first signal line) and the pull-up resistor 2 of the signal lines (fourth signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 are connected to the noise removal circuit 1. It is provided with turn-around prevention circuits 3 to 6 that can prevent current from flowing to motor drive circuits 1 to 4, and even if the supply of the power supply VCS is stopped, current flows from noise removal circuit 1 to motor drive circuits 1 to 4. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shielding member operating motor 57a from operating unintentionally.

In this modification, the turn-around prevention circuits 1 to 6 are configured by using a Zener diode, and when the power supply VCS is not supplied, the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 are viewed from the signal line side of the parallel control signal. Although the configuration is such that no current flows through the motor drive circuits 1 to 4, an anti-rotation circuit may be configured by using electronic components other than the Zener diode. For example, a transistor or FET may be used. When the power supply VCS is not supplied to the power supply line VCS side of the pull-up resistors 1 and 2, the current flow from the signal line side of the parallel control signal to the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 and the motor drive circuits 1 to 4 side. It may be configured to block.

Further, in this modification, in the shielding unit control board 57d equipped with the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 for converting the serial control signal and the clock signal transmitted by the effect control CPU 120 into the parallel control signal, the serial control signal and the clock The configuration is provided with a turn-around prevention circuit capable of preventing the current from the noise removing circuits 1 to 6 of the signal line of the signal from flowing into the drive circuit of a predetermined electric component, but the serial control signal and the clock signal transmitted by the CPU 103 are provided. In a control board equipped with a serial / parallel conversion circuit that converts the current into a parallel control signal, the current from the noise elimination circuit of the signal line of the serial control signal and the clock signal input from the CPU 103 flows into the drive circuit of a predetermined electric component. The configuration may be provided with a turn-around prevention circuit capable of preventing the current from being turned around. Is prevented from flowing in, so that it is possible to prevent a predetermined electric component from operating unintentionally.

Although the modified example 16 of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this modified example, and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as that of the modified example 14 has the same effect as that described in the modified example 14. Further, the modified example illustrated with respect to the modified example 14 can also be applied to the modified example 16.

(Modification 17)
A modified example 17 of the pachinko gaming machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. Since the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of this modification includes the same configuration as that of the above-described modification 14, the differences will be mainly described here.

In the modification 14, the power supply line including the power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2 (5V) and the power supply line VDC (12V) is connected to the connector 57e of the shielding unit control board 57d, and the shielding unit is controlled via the connector 57e. A power supply VCS for operating various circuits and elements of the substrate 57d is supplied, and a power supply for operating electrical components (shielding member operating motor 57a, left LED 57b, right LED 57c) connected to the shielding unit control substrate 57d. In the present modification 17, the power supply VDC is supplied via the connector 57e, but the power supply VCS is not supplied, and the power supply is supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d from the power supply VDC (12V). It is provided with a step-down circuit that generates a VCS (5V), and is configured to generate a power supply VCS on a shielding unit control board 57d.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), the shielding unit control board 57d is equipped with a step-down circuit that generates a power supply VCS (5V) from the power supply VDC (12V), and is supplied via the connector 57e. The power supply line of the power supply VDC is branched so that one end is connected to a step-down circuit and the other end is connected to a shielding member operation motor 57a, a left side LED 57b, a right side LED 57c (not shown), and the like. Then, in the step-down circuit, a power supply VCS is generated from the power supply VDC, and the power supply VCS is mounted on the shielding unit control board 57d. It is designed to be supplied to (not shown).

As described above, the shielding unit control board 57d of the present modification is provided with a step-down circuit for generating the power supply VCS from the power supply VDC, and shields the power supply VDC supplied via the connector 57e with the shielding member operation motor 57a. In addition to supplying to the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c, a power supply VCS is generated from the power supply VDC by a step-down circuit and the power supply VCS is supplied to various circuits such as serial / parallel conversion boards 1 and 2, so that serial / parallel conversion is performed. When the supply of the power supply VCS to the boards 1 and 2 is stopped, the power supply VDC to the shielding member operating motor 57a, the left side LED 57b, and the right side LED 57c is also stopped, and the shielding member operating motor 57a and the like do not operate. It has become like.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 2 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. A power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1, and the power supply VCS is a signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1. It is connected to a noise removal circuit 1 for removing noise and a pull-up resistor 1 that pulls up the voltage of the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, and the power supply VCS is the left LED 57b and the right side. It is a configuration generated from a power supply voltage for driving the LED 57c. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 1 and 2 is a serial control signal. In the configuration connected to the noise reduction circuit 1 of the signal line (first signal line) of 1 and the clock signal 1 and the pull-up resistor 1 of the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, the left LED 57b, Since the power supply VCS is generated from the power supply VDC for driving the right side LED 57c, when the power supply VCS supply is stopped, the power supply VDC is also stopped, so that the left side LED 57b and the right side LED 57c operate unintentionally. Can be prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 into parallel control signals 3 to 6. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that is output to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 and the parallel control signal that is input from the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. Motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a are provided according to 3 to 6, and a power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2. The power supply VCS includes a noise removing circuit 2 for removing noise from the signal lines (first signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2, and signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. It is connected to a pull-up resistor 2 that pulls up the voltage of the above, and the power supply VCS is configured to be generated from the power supply VDC for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 3 to 6 is a serial control signal. 2 and the shield member operating motor 57a are connected to the noise removing circuit 2 of the clock signal 2 (first signal line) and the pull-up resistor 2 of the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. Since the power supply VCS is generated from the power supply VDC for driving, when the power supply VCS supply is stopped, the power supply VDC is also stopped, so that the shielding member operation motor 57a is prevented from operating unintentionally. it can.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. In addition, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are converted into parallel control signals 3 to 6, and the parallel control signals 3 to 3 are provided. According to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 output to the signal line (4th signal line) of 6 and the parallel control signals 3 to 6 input from the signal lines (4th signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. Motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a are provided, and a power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2, and the power supply VCS is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2. , Pull up the voltage of the noise removal circuit 2 for removing the noise of the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 and the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2. It is connected to the pull-up resistor 1 to be driven, and the power supply VCS is configured to be generated from the power supply VDC for driving the left side LED 57b and the right side LED 57c. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 3 to 6 is a serial control signal. In the configuration connected to the noise removal circuit 2 of the clock signal 2 and the clock signal 2 (third signal line) and the pull-up resistor 1 of the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c are used. Since the power supply VCS is generated from the power supply VDC for driving, when the power supply VCS supply is stopped, the power supply VDC is also stopped, so that the left side LED 57b and the right side LED 57c are prevented from operating unintentionally. it can.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. In addition, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal lines (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are combined with the signal lines of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 (first signal line). A serial / parallel conversion circuit that converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from) into parallel control signals 1 and 2 and outputs them to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b in response to the parallel control signal 1 input from the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, and the signal line of the parallel control signal 2 (second signal line). It is provided with an LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line), and is input from the signal lines (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2. A serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 into parallel control signals 3 to 6 and outputs them to the signal line (fourth signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, and a parallel control signal. A serial / parallel conversion circuit including motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a in response to parallel control signals 3 to 6 input from the signal lines 3 to 6 (fourth signal line). A power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to 1 and 2, and the power supply VCS removes noise from the signal lines (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1. It is connected to the noise removal circuit 1 and the pull-up resistor 2 that pulls up the voltage of the signal lines (fourth signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, and the power supply VCS drives the shielding member operation motor 57a. It is a configuration generated from the power supply VDC of. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 1 and 2 is a serial control signal. In the configuration connected to the noise removing circuit 1 of 1 and the clock signal 1 (1st signal line) and the pull-up resistor 2 of the signal lines (4th signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, the shielding member operating motor 57a is used. Since the power supply VCS is generated from the power supply VDC for driving, when the power supply VCS supply is stopped, the power supply VDC is also stopped, so that the shielding member operation motor 57a is prevented from operating unintentionally. it can.

In this modification, the shielding unit control board 57d is provided with a step-down circuit that generates a power supply VCS from the power supply VDC, so that the power supply VCS is stopped when the power supply VDC is not supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d. At the same time, the supply of the power supply VDC to the shielding member operating motor 57a, the left side LED 57b, and the right side LED 57c is stopped. For example, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the shielding unit control board 57d The FET element or the like may be connected to the power supply VCS and the power supply VDC so that the power supply VDC is supplied to the shielding member operating motor 57a, the left side LED 57b, and the right side LED 57c when the power supply VCS is supplied to the power supply VCS. With such a configuration, when the power supply VCS is not supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d, the supply of the power supply VDC to the shielding member operation motor 57a, the left side LED 57b, and the right side LED 57c is stopped to operate the shielding member. It is possible to prevent the motor 57a and the like from operating.

Further, in this modification, the shielding unit control equipped with the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 that convert the serial control signal and the clock signal transmitted by the effect control CPU 120 into a parallel control signal for operating a predetermined electric component. The substrate 57d is configured to include a step-down circuit that generates a power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 from a power supply VDC for operating a predetermined electric component, but the serial is transmitted by the CPU 103. In a control board equipped with a serial / parallel conversion circuit that converts a control signal and a clock signal into a parallel control signal for operating a predetermined electric component, a predetermined operating power source for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit is used. A configuration including a power generation circuit generated from an operating power source for operating an electric component may be provided. Even in such a configuration, when the supply of the operating power supply is stopped, the supply of the operating power source is also stopped, so that the predetermined electric component can be used. It is possible to prevent unintentional operation.

Although the modified example 17 of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this modified example, and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range not departing from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as that of the modified example 14 has the same effect as that described in the modified example 14. Further, the modified example illustrated with respect to the modified example 14 can also be applied to the modified example 17.

(13) In the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that plays a game
The control signal input from the first signal line (serial control signal 1 signal line, clock signal 1 signal line) is converted into a drive signal and output to the second signal line (parallel control signals 1 and 2 signal lines). Conversion circuit (serial / parallel conversion circuit 1) and
Drive circuits (LED drive circuits 1 and 2) that drive electrical components (left side LED57b, right side LED57c) according to the drive signal input from the second signal line, and
With
A predetermined power supply (power supply VCS) is connected to the conversion circuit to operate the conversion circuit, and the predetermined power supply is a noise removal circuit (noise removal circuit) for removing noise of the first signal line. It is connected to 1) and a pull-up circuit (pull-up resistor 1) that pulls up the voltage of the second signal line.
The predetermined power supply is characterized in that it is supplied via a plurality of wirings (power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2).
According to this feature, the predetermined power source for operating the conversion circuit that converts the control signal input from the first signal line into the drive signal is the noise removal circuit of the first signal line and the pull-up circuit of the second signal line. In the configuration connected to, when the predetermined power supply is input via a plurality of wires, it becomes difficult to stop the supply of the predetermined power supply. Therefore, when the supply of the predetermined power supply is stopped, the electric parts are unintentionally stopped. It can be prevented from operating.

(14) In the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that plays a game
The first control signal input from the first signal line (the signal line of the serial control signal 1 and the signal line of the clock signal 1) is converted into the first drive signal and the second signal line (parallel control signals 1 and 2 signals). The first conversion circuit (serial / parallel conversion circuit 1) that outputs to the line) and
The first drive circuit (LED drive circuits 1 and 2) that drives the first electric component (left side LED57b, right side LED57c) according to the first drive signal input from the second signal line,
The second control signal input from the third signal line (serial control signal 2 signal line, clock signal 2 signal line) is converted into a second drive signal, and the fourth signal line (parallel control signals 3 to 6 signals). The second conversion circuit (serial / parallel conversion circuit 2) that outputs to the line) and
The second drive circuit (motor drive circuits 1 to 4) for driving the second electric component (shielding member operation motor 57a) according to the second drive signal input from the fourth signal line,
With
A predetermined power supply (power supply VCS) is connected to the first conversion circuit and the second conversion circuit in order to operate the first conversion circuit and the second conversion circuit, and the predetermined power supply is the first conversion circuit. It is connected to a noise removal circuit (noise removal circuit 1) for removing noise from the signal line and a pull-up circuit (pull-up resistor 2) that pulls up the voltage of the fourth signal line.
The predetermined power supply is characterized in that it is supplied via a plurality of wirings (power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2).
According to this feature, a predetermined power source for operating the first conversion circuit that converts the first control signal input from the first signal line into the first drive signal is the noise removal circuit of the first signal line and the fourth. In a configuration connected to a signal line pull-up circuit, when a predetermined power supply is input via a plurality of wires, it becomes difficult to stop the supply of the predetermined power supply. 2 It is possible to prevent the electric parts from operating unintentionally.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a game ball having a predetermined number of balls is a game machine. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is stored and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

The variable display of the identification information (special figure, effect pattern, general figure, etc.) also includes the blinking of the identification information. For example, in a special figure, a variable display includes a pattern in which all segments are turned off and a pattern in which at least some segments are turned on (for example, a lost pattern) are alternately repeated. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed in the variable display may be a symbol different from the special symbol that is displayed before the stop display (during fluctuation) (the same applies to the effect symbol and the normal symbol).

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like in which a gaming medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

In addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) and electronic components (for example, a motor driving IC601, an LED driving IC602, etc.) are mounted. A connection region (for example, a connection region 275C) that is located between the first region and the second region and is narrower than the first region and the second region. (For example, LED board 275) is provided, and in the connection area, a first electric signal (for example, a serial control signal) is attached to an electronic component (for example, a motor driving IC601) mounted in the first area. A second electric signal (for example, a serial control signal) is transmitted to a first signal pattern wiring (for example, pattern wiring L2 and L3) and an electronic component (for example, LED drive IC602) mounted in the second region. A specific electronic component (for example, connector 603) having a plurality of connection terminals connected to each of the second signal pattern wirings (for example, pattern wirings L11 and L12) for transmitting) is mounted and mounted in the connection area. The first signal pattern wiring is connected to the terminal on the first region side of the specific electronic component, and the second signal pattern wiring is connected to the terminal on the second region side (see FIG. 22). , A variable winning means (for example, a variable winning ball device 9015 or a special variable winning ball device 9022) capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can win a prize and a second state in which the game medium cannot win or is difficult to win, and an advantageous state. A step in a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 90560) that is different from the above state and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) including the change of the variable winning means to the first state. Special state control means capable of controlling S90358 to S90360) and a special state (for example, KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) that is more frequently controlled to the special state than the normal state. (For example, a portion that executes steps S902208A, S902211A, S902221A, S902209B, S902210B, S902213B, S902214B in the game control microcomputer 90560), and the variable winning means is notified to be controlled to the special state. After that, a game medium launched toward the variable winning means is provided so as not to win a prize (for example, a nail group 55 is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball. , Realized by setting the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game to 0.8 seconds), the variable display period that does not trigger the control to the advantageous state in the special state. Is the first variable display pattern (for example, the second variable display pattern # 25, # 27 of shortened variation) in which is the first period, and the second variable display pattern in which the variable display period is longer than the first period. (For example, the ratio that can be executed by the second variation patterns # 26 and # 28 including the continuous effect) and is controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern in the special state. Is lower than the ratio controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern (for example, in the case of a small hit, the second variable pattern # 28 having a relatively long fluctuation time is determined. Is low (or undecided). (See FIG. 59) Examples include gaming machines.
According to this feature, redundant signal pattern wiring can be reduced, and malfunction due to noise or the like caused by redundant signal pattern wiring can be prevented. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the hobby from being lowered and enhance the effect of the production.

As described above, in a gaming machine using a suitable mounting board in which redundant signal pattern wiring is deleted, the ratio of controlling to a special state differs according to the variable display pattern, so that the game is played while reducing the control cost and burden. Can raise the interest of. For example, since it is possible to prevent malfunction of noise, even though it is controlled to a special control state, the variable winning means does not change to the first state due to noise, which is disadvantageous to the player and reduces the interest. Can be prevented.
The above-mentioned mounting board has a first region and a second region on which electronic components are mounted, and a connection region located between the first region and the second region and narrower than the first region and the second region. In the embodiment of the above embodiment, the LED substrate 275 and the like are illustrated, but the main substrates 11 and 9031 provided with the game control microcomputers 100 and 90560 constituting the special state control means and the special state control means are configured as the substrate of the mounting substrate. May be.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of preventing a decrease in interest, a variable winning means (for example, a variable winning means) that can be changed into a first state in which the game medium can be won and a second state in which the game medium cannot be won or is difficult to win. The ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022) are in a state different from the advantageous state, and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) including the change of the variable winning means to the first state. A special state control means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 90560 for executing steps S90358 to S90360) and a special state (for example, a KT state (first KT)) that is more frequently controlled to the special state than the normal state. The state, the second KT state)) is provided with a controllable special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S902208A, S902221A, S902212A, S902209B, S902210B, S902213B, S902214B in the game control microcomputer 90560), and the variable The winning means is provided so that the gaming medium launched toward the variable winning means cannot be won after being notified that the special state is controlled (for example, a nail as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball). It is realized by providing the group 55 and setting the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game to 0.8 seconds), and the variable display that does not trigger the control to the advantageous state in the special state. The first variable display pattern (for example, the second variable display patterns # 25 and # 27 of shortened variation) in which the variable display period is the first period, and the second period in which the variable display period is longer than the first period. It can be executed by the second variable display pattern (for example, the second variable patterns # 26 and # 28 including the continuous effect), and in the special state, the special state is executed after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern. The ratio controlled by is lower than the ratio controlled to a special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern (for example, in the case of a small hit, the second fluctuation has a relatively long fluctuation time. The rate determined by pattern # 28 is low (or not determined). See FIG. 59). Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of this embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of the gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 45 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine (ball game machine) 901 as viewed from the front. Here, a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and is, for example, an image-type gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like. May be good.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape which is provided on the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including a board 906).

As shown in FIG. 45, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 902, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 903. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply plate 903, a surplus ball receiving plate 904 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 903 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 905 for firing the hitting ball are provided. A game board 906 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 906 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 906, a game area 907 is formed in which the driven game ball can flow down.

An effect display device 909 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 907. On the display screen of the effect display device 909, there are a plurality of types that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition, which is the first execution condition (for example, the hit ball has won the first start winning opening 9013). Satisfaction of the display area (hereinafter referred to as the first variable display unit 909a) for variably displaying the decorative symbol for production (first decorative symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result, and the second start condition which is the second execution condition. A display area in which a plurality of types of decorative symbols (second decorative symbols) that can be identified based on (for example, the hit ball has won the second start winning opening 9014) are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. (Hereinafter referred to as a second variable display unit 909b) and a display area (hereinafter, a background symbol display unit) in which it is easier for the player to visually recognize the displayed contents than the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b. 909c). It should be noted that the ease of visually recognizing the display contents means, for example, that the size of the display area is large, or that the display contents in the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b are always monochromatic. The display color may change. Further, in this embodiment, the background symbol effect unit 9c is controlled to display identification information (hereinafter, also referred to as a background symbol) in three display areas of left, middle, and right. In addition, the winning means that the game ball enters the area defined in advance as the winning area such as the winning opening. Further, the derivation display of the display result means that the symbol is stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, one background symbol effect unit 9c is provided for two variable display units (first variable display unit 909a and second variable display unit 909b), and the background symbol effect unit 9c has two variable display units. Since the effect corresponding to any of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) that are variably displayed on the display unit is executed, whether or not the decorative symbol status (for example, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed) is executed. ) Is difficult to grasp. In this embodiment, the background symbol is for performing the symbol variation display for the effect on the effect display device 909 (liquid crystal display device), and corresponds to the effect identification information, the decorative symbol, and the effect symbol. ..

A first special symbol display (special symbol display device) 908a and a second special symbol display 908b for variably displaying a special symbol as identification information are provided on the upper part of the effect display device 909. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b are realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9, respectively. Has been done. The first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b use more types of numbers such as 0 to 99 in order to make it difficult to grasp whether the stop symbol is a probabilistic symbol or a non-probable variable symbol. It may be configured to be variable display. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a may be referred to as the first special symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display 908b may be referred to as the second special symbol. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Also, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first special symbol includes numbers 0 to 5 and characters other than numbers, and the type of the second special symbol is numbers 0 to 5 and characters other than numbers and the first special symbol. It may include a character different from the character of.

In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 908a, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, the number of first reserved storage (holding memory is also referred to as starting storage or starting winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol hold storage display 9018a including four displays is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 9018a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 908a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one. Further, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 908b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 9018b composed of four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls entered in the second start winning opening 9014, that is, the number of hold storages. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 9018b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

The first variable display unit 909a performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a decorative (directing) symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 908a. Further, the second variable display unit 909b performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the second special symbol display 908b. The first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b that perform variable display of the decorative symbol are controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first variable display unit 909a may be referred to as a first decorative symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second variable display unit 909b may be referred to as a second decorative symbol. Further, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol. The type of the first decorative symbol and the type of the second decorative symbol may be the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), or the types may be different. If the types are different, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first decorative symbol includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the type of the second decorative symbol is the numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters and the first decorative symbol. It may include a character different from the character of.

On the display screen of the effect display device 909, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, the number of first reserved balls, and the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second starting winning opening 9014, that is, the number of second reserved storages. There is an area (hereinafter, referred to as a symbol hold storage display unit 9018c) for displaying the total number (total number of hold storages) which is the total of the above. As described above, in this embodiment, the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is displayed on the symbol reserved storage display unit 9018c, which is relatively easy for the player to see, so that the player can see the total. It is difficult to grasp each of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. In this embodiment, the first special symbol holding storage display 9018a and the second special symbol holding storage display 9018b are four indicators such as lamps and LEDs, which are smaller than the symbol holding storage display unit 9018c, respectively. Although it is configured, in order to make it more difficult to grasp the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number, an indicator of another aspect may be used. As an example, the first special symbol hold storage display 9018a and the second special symbol hold storage display 9018b are each composed of one display, and the display color is different or the display density is different according to the number of hold storages. I will let you.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the total number of pending storages that can be displayed, that is, the total number of reserved storages is 8. The symbol hold storage display unit 9018c increases the number of lighting display areas by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of lighting display areas is reduced by one. Alternatively, out of the eight display areas in the symbol hold storage display unit 9018c, the number of areas displayed in a color predetermined as a valid start prize is increased by one. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of areas displayed in the colors determined in advance as the effective start prize is reduced by one.

Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4. Therefore, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 9013 when the first reserved memory number is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the first starting condition. When the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 9013 when the number of first reserved memories is less than 4, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (first effective starting winning) that satisfies the first starting condition. Similarly, when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 9014 when the second reserved memory number is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the second starting condition. When the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 9014 when the number of second reserved memories is less than 4, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (second valid starting winning) that satisfies the second starting condition. In this example, the upper limit of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the total reserved storage number is set to 8, but these values are examples. .. Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 9013 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 9013a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

A gate 9032 is provided on the right side of the effect display device 909. The game ball that has passed through the gate 9032 is detected by the gate switch 9032a.

Above the gate 9032, a nail group 55 forming a flow path of the right-handed game ball is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball, and the right-handed game ball meanders to the left and right. However, it is designed to flow down. Since the nail group 55 is provided, it takes at least 1.0 second from the launch of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 9014 and the special winning opening 9024, which will be described later.

An actuating gate 9017 is provided below the gate 9032. The game ball that has passed through the actuating gate 9017 is detected by the actuating gate switch 9017a.

Below the actuating gate 9017, a special variable winning ball device 9020 forming a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 908b. In the advantageous state (big hit game state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 9021, so that the big winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the grand prize opening is detected by the first count switch 9023a. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 9023a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Below the special variable winning ball device 9020, a special variable winning ball device 9022 forming a special winning opening 9024 for small hits and a variable winning ball device 9015 having a second starting winning opening 9014 are provided. As shown in FIG. 45, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 9015 is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. Although details will be described later, these special variable winning ball devices 9022 and variable winning ball device 9015 extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom surface formed as the bottom surface of a flow path through which the game ball flows down. By moving the member forward and backward, the game ball wins in the open state (also called the open state) where the game ball can win in the special winning opening 9024 and the second starting winning opening 9014 located below the bottom member. Change to an impossible closed state (also called a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 9022 moves the bottom member forward in the small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state, and the opening control is executed so that the special winning opening 9024, which is the winning area, is opened. Further, the variable winning ball device 9015 moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010. The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening 9014, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 9022 and the variable winning ball device 9015 are formed to have the same structure, but as shown in FIG. 45, the variable winning ball device 9015 The special variable winning ball device 9022 is slightly larger than the special variable winning ball device 9022. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, since the special variable winning ball device 9022 and the variable winning ball device 9015 are arranged adjacent to each other, the game area 907 was dropped without winning the special variable winning ball device 9020. The game ball first falls on the variable winning ball device 9015, but at this time, if the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 is moved backward and the second starting winning opening 9014 is in the open state, The game ball wins in the second start winning opening 9014, and the game ball does not flow toward the special variable winning ball device 9022. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening 9014 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 9022. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 9022 is moved backward and the special winning opening 9024 is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening 9024. Further, if the special winning opening 9024 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 9022 and falls toward the out opening 9026 as it is.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 9015 is arranged on the right side. The bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 9015 is used to perform a special variable winning. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward the ball device 9022, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 9015 is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 is on the downstream side. It can be said that it is provided.

A switch (second count switch 9025a, see FIG. 49) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening 9024 is provided in the special winning opening 9024. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 9025a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening 9024 opened in the special variable winning ball device 9022, another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening 9013a or the second starting winning opening 9013b. More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 9022 is open-controlled and the special winning opening 9024 is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 9022 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening 9024 is closed, the game ball cannot be passed (entered) through the special winning opening 9024 to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage for the person.

Further, in the second start winning opening 9014, a second starting opening switch 9014a capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening 9014 is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 9014a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this embodiment, the gate 9032, the operating gate 9017, the special variable winning ball device 9020 (large winning opening), the variable winning ball device 9015 (second starting winning opening 9014), and the special variable winning ball device 9022 (special). Since the winning opening 9024) is provided on the right side of the game area 907, the player aims at the right side of the game area 907 and launches the game (so-called right side) during a big hit game or in the KT state described later. Perform the striking operation). Therefore, although detailed description is omitted in this embodiment, when the jackpot game or the KT state is in progress, for example, the effect display device 909 displays "right-handed" or the like or moves to the right. It is desirable to configure it so as to notify that the right-handed operation period is in progress by displaying an arrow indicating.

Below the effect display device 909, a normal symbol display 9010 for variably displaying a normal symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, the small display is formed in a square shape, for example. The ordinary symbol display 9010 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) from 00 to 99, for example. Further, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying "○" and "×"). It may be composed of.

When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 9015 is a state in which the player is advantageous from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 9014). Changes to. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 9010, a normal symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 9032, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be lit by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by one.

Decorative lamps 9025 that blink during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 907 of the game board 906, and an out port 9026 that captures a hit ball that has not won a prize is provided at the lower part. Further, two speakers 9027 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right outside the game area 907. Top frame lamps 9028a, left frame lamps 9028b, and right frame lamps 9028c provided on the front frame are provided on the upper outer circumference, the left outer circumference, and the right outer circumference of the game area 907. Further, a prize ball lamp 9051 that lights up when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided near the left frame lamp 9028b, and a ball burnout lamp 9052 that lights up when the supply ball runs out is provided near the right frame lamp 9028c. It is provided.

The gaming machine is a hitting ball launching device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to the player operating the hitting ball operation handle 905 and launches the game ball into the gaming area 907 by using the rotational force of the driving motor. ) Is provided. When the player continuously operates the hitting ball operation handle 905, the game ball is launched every 0.6 seconds. The game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 907 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then descends from the game area 907. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 9013 and is detected by the first start opening switch 9013a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game ends or the previous variable display ends). Then, the first start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display unit 908a, and the first decorative symbol is variable on the first variable display unit 909a. The display starts. That is, the first special symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved storages (total number) displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 9018c, provided that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by 1.

Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 9014 and is detected by the second start opening switch 9014a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game ends or the previous variable display). The second special symbol display unit 908b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the second variable display unit 909b starts the second decorative symbol. Variable display of is started. That is, the second special symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 9014. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved storages (total number) displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 9018c, provided that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit. Is increased by 1. However, even if the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, if the total reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the total number displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 9018c is incremented by one.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 909a are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the first special symbol at the time of stopping becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened until a certain time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win a prize in the large winning opening. One round in the big hit game state is from the time when the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened until a certain period of time elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of hit balls wins the big winning opening. When a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the large winning opening, or after a certain period of time has passed since the special variable winning ball device 9020 was opened, the continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened again. The generation of the right to continue is allowed a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 rounds, 6 rounds, 16 rounds). In addition, a V winning area may be provided in the large winning opening, and the continuation right may be generated on condition that the hit ball wins the V winning area while the special variable winning ball device 9020 is open. The number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs depending on the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, the types of jackpots are 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot. For example, if a 2R normal jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs, a two-round jackpot game A state is given, and if a 6R normal jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 6-round jackpot gaming state is granted, and if a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 16-round jackpot gaming state is granted.

When it is decided that the stop symbol when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display 908a is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a high probability that the next big hit is higher than the low probability state (there are low probability / non-KT state and low probability / first KT state described later) (high probability that big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state). It becomes an advantageous state for the player (state). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, not only the probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a becomes a jackpot symbol increases, but also the probability of becoming a jackpot symbol increases. The probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b will be a big hit symbol is also high. That is, not only in the determination of the big hit based on the first start winning prize, but also in the determination of the big hit based on the second starting winning prize, the big hit is determined with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 909b are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state.

When it is decided that the stop symbol when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped in the second special symbol display 908b is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a high probability that the next big hit is higher than the low probability state (there are low probability / non-KT state and low probability / first KT state described later) (high probability that big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state). It becomes an advantageous state for the player (state). When the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, not only the probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b becomes a jackpot symbol increases, but also the probability of becoming a jackpot symbol increases. The probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a will be a big hit symbol is also high. That is, not only in the determination of the big hit based on the second start winning prize, but also in the determination of the big hit based on the first starting winning prize, the big hit is determined with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

Further, when the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes the small hit symbol, the state shifts to the small hit game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened until a certain period of time has elapsed so that the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 9024. As a result, the small hit game state is also open so that the player can get a ball, although it is less than the big hit game state. In this embodiment, the small hit game state is a game state that is advantageous to the player, although the advantage is lower than that of the big hit game state (in this example, the number of balls that can be obtained is small). The gaming state does not transition to another gaming state before and after the gaming state.

In the probabilistic state, as described above, the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b are jackpot symbols (specific display result: for example. , 0 to 9) is higher than the low probability state.

Here, the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, the gaming state in the present embodiment includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this embodiment, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When it is controlled, when it is controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when it is controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability. , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state, as will be described later, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 9022 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 on the upstream side is extremely long, and small hits are made. Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins a special variable winning ball device 9022 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is moved to the special variable winning ball device 9022 on the downstream side. Easy to win.

The probabilistic state is a gaming state in which a big hit is more likely to occur than the low probability state. Specifically, since the number of jackpot judgment values in the jackpot determination table in the probability variation state is 10 times the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the low probability state, the probability variation state is more likely to be a jackpot than in the low probability state. It is in a game state that is easy to play.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this embodiment, the probability that the variable winning ball device 9015 will be in the open state will be the same as in the normal state even in the KT state, but when the second special symbol changes. Since the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern is shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, since it is configured to be a small hit except when it is a big hit when the second special symbol fluctuates (however, except for the case of forced loss described later), the KT state is changed to a smaller hit than the normal state. It is in a game state where it is easy to become. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

Next, the transition of the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, in this embodiment, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area 907. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening 9013, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the normal state, the state shifts to the low probability / first KT state, the high probability / first KT state, or the high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the low probability / first KT state, and then when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the jackpot occurring, the first KT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and then the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the first KT state is terminated when the fluctuation display of 100 times is uniformly terminated when the probability is controlled to the low probability / first KT state, but the present embodiment is limited to such an embodiment. Absent. For example, a plurality of jackpot types that trigger a low probability / first KT state are provided, and the number of fluctuation displays in which the first KT state continues after the jackpot game ends differs depending on the jackpot type (for example, 20 times). Or 30 times, 50 times, 100 times).

In this embodiment, when the player has transitioned to the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the player moves to the right of the game area 907. Aim and perform a game ball launch operation (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening 9014, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the KT state, it shifts to the low probability / first KT state, the high probability / first KT state, or the high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the low probability / first KT state, and after that, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the jackpot occurring, the first KT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 2R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and then the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

However, as will be described later, if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed and the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained even though the jackpot was in the non-KT state before the start of the jackpot, the state shifts to the high probability state. However, it is controlled to shift to the first KT state instead of the second KT state (see steps S902208B and S902209B described later). That is, even though it is in the normal state, it is hit right and a 16R probability variation big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. In such a case, it shifts to the second KT state and a considerable number in the small hit game. If the prize ball is made to be obtained, some players may actively play the game by right-handed in the normal state, and the original playability is impaired. From this, even if a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol by hitting right in the normal state, by imposing a penalty by shifting only to the first KT state, in the normal state It is possible to suppress aggressive right-handed games.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 909a are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 909b are synchronized with each other. Here, synchronization means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 909a. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 909b.

Further, when the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 909a. When the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, a special decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 909b.

Further, in the background symbol display unit 909c, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display unit 909c. When performing the reach effect, for example, the left and right background symbols are stopped and displayed during the variable display. Then, although there are exceptions as described later, basically, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived on the background symbol display unit 909c. It is displayed (the background symbol is finally stopped in the three display areas). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the stop symbol of the background symbol is a background symbol that reminds the player that the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (for example, left). Three background patterns with the middle and right sides aligned). Hereinafter, such a background symbol is also referred to as a jackpot symbol.

When the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display unit 909c.

Further, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 908b at the same time, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. An effect corresponding to any of the variable displays is executed.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed independently, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends and the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped. When is derived and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends, and the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived and displayed. Further, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, specifically, when there is a period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, it is late. When the special symbol whose variable display ends is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends.

Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in this embodiment is a variable display (variable display) of a background symbol that has not yet stopped when the stopped background symbol constitutes a part of the jackpot symbol among the three background symbols. ) Is performed, and all or part of the background symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot symbols.

For example, in the left, middle, and right display areas of the background symbol display unit 909c, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") that becomes a part of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right display areas. The display area inside is in a state where variable display is still performed, and a state in which all or part of the symbols in the display area are synchronously and variablely displayed while forming all or part of the jackpot symbol (for example, background). The reach display mode or reach is a state in which variable display is performed in all of the left, middle, and right display areas of the symbol display unit 909c, and variable display is always performed in a state where the same symbols are always aligned).

In addition, during reach, unusual effects are performed with lamps and sounds. The effect and the reach display mode in the background pattern display unit 909c are referred to as a reach effect. In addition, at the time of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from the background symbol) can be displayed, or the background of the background symbol display unit 909c (the background color or pattern different from the symbol and the character). The display mode (for example, color, etc.) of (such as) may be changed.

Next, FIGS. 46 to 48 are views showing a special variable winning ball device 9022. Hereinafter, the special variable winning ball device 9022 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48. Regarding this embodiment, the structure of the special variable winning ball device 9022 is described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48, but the size is only slightly smaller than that of the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the variable winning is achieved. The structure of the ball device 9015 is the same as that of the special variable winning ball device 9022.

As shown in FIGS. 46 to 48, the special variable winning ball device 9022 includes a rectangular plate-shaped base plate portion 90101 that is long in the left-right direction. The special variable winning ball device 9022 is fixedly supported in the game area 907 by fixing the base plate portion 90101 to the game area 907 with, for example, a screw. In the substantially central region of the base plate portion 90101, a special winning opening 9024 (second starting winning opening 9014 in the case of the variable winning ball device 9015) that opens toward the front is formed, and a special winning opening in the base plate portion 90101 is formed. At a position above the mouth 9024, a slit-shaped accommodating hole 90102 long in the left-right direction is formed for accommodating the bottom surface member 9023 on the back surface side (rear) of the game area 907 when the bottom surface member 9023 moves backward. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the special winning opening 9024 is specifically formed on the left side of the center of the base plate portion 90101 in the left-right direction, but may be left or right.

The bottom member 9023 is tilted downward to the left so that the game ball that has entered the upper surface from the right flows down to the left, and the accommodation hole 90102 is tilted downward to the left so as to follow the slope of the bottom member 9023. It is formed to do. The bottom member 9023 can be moved forward and backward between the state of being moved forward as shown in FIG. 47 and the state of being moved backward as shown in FIG. 48, and the bottom member 9023 is on the back surface side (rear) of the base plate portion 90101. A drive device (not shown) is arranged to move the vehicle forward and backward.

Returning to FIGS. 46 to 48, a flow path forming base 90112 protruding forward is formed on the front side of the base plate 90101, and a forward movement is formed on the upper portion of the flow path forming base 90112. The upstream region 9023U, which is the upper end (right end) of the bottom member 9023, and the upstream channel 90113, which is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 9023 and forms a flow path for the game ball together with the bottom member 9023, A downstream region 9023L, which is a lower end (left end) of the bottom member 9023, and a downstream flow path portion 90114, which is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 9023 and forms a flow path for a game ball together with the bottom member 9023, are formed. There is.

Further, the upper part of the flow path forming base 90112 is recessed downward from the end of the upstream flow path 90113 and the downstream flow path 90114 on the bottom surface member 9023 side, and the special winning openings 9024 are left and right and left and right in front view. A guide flow path portion 90115 is formed to guide the game ball that has fallen below the bottom surface member 9023 to the special winning opening 9024 so as to surround it from below.

The upstream side flow path portion 90113 and the downstream side flow path portion 90114 are formed so as to incline downward to the left so that the game ball flows down to the left. Further, the bottom portion of the guide flow path portion 90115 extends downward to the left toward the special winning opening 9024 side and is recessed at a position in front of the special winning opening 9024. Then, in the recessed space at the bottom of the guide flow path portion 90115, a triangular guide portion 90116 that guides the game ball rearward toward the special winning opening 9024 side (back side of the game area 907) is arranged. ing.

Furthermore, a covering portion 90117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 90113, the downstream side flow path portion 90114, and the guide flow path portion 90115 from the front is integrally formed on the front portion (player side) of the flow path forming base portion 90112. Has been done. The covering portion 90117 covers the upstream side flow path portion 90113, the downstream side flow path portion 90114, and the guide flow path portion 90115 from the front, so that the game ball flowing down each of these flow path portions bounces toward the glass door frame 904 side. It has a function to prevent it from being lost. In the present embodiment, the covering portion 90117 is integrally formed with the flow path forming base portion 90112, but it may be fixed separately.

In the special variable winning ball device 9022, a flow of game balls continuous in the left-right direction, consisting of an upstream side flow path portion 90113, a bottom surface member 9023, and a downstream side flow path portion 90114, between the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117. Road F is formed. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of regulation pieces 90118 are formed on the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117 to reduce the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the flow path F.

In the present embodiment, the regulation piece 90118 is integrally formed with the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117, and is formed in a rib shape protruding forward from the base plate portion 90101 or protruding rearward from the covering portion 90117, and is a game ball. By interfering with, the flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the game ball that flows down to the left meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow is reduced when there is no regulation piece 90118. Delay than. These regulation pieces 90118 are formed so as to be arranged at predetermined intervals in the flow direction of the game ball in the flow path F, and are alternately formed on the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117. Further, the regulation piece 90118 is set to a width dimension of about 1/3 to 1/4 of the width in the front-rear direction of the bottom member 9023, and is set to a width dimension in which a game ball can pass between adjacent members. There is. More specifically, in the present embodiment, one regulation piece 90118 is formed at a portion of the covering portion 90117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 90113 from the front, and the downstream side flow path portion of the covering portion 90117. One regulation piece 90118 is formed at a portion that covers the 90114 from the front. Further, in the portion of the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117 that covers the bottom surface member 9023, a total of five regulation pieces 90118 formed alternately on the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117 are formed. The number of such regulation pieces 90118 is not particularly limited. Further, in the present embodiment, most of the regulation piece 90118 is covered by the covering portion 90117 from the front (player side).

With the arrangement of the regulation piece 90118 as described above, with reference to FIG. 47, the special variable winning ball device 9022 (and the variable winning ball device 9015 having the same configuration) of the present embodiment attempts to flow down the flow path F. The game ball P meanders down the flow path F. Then, when the special variable winning ball device 9022 (or the variable winning ball device 9015) in which such a flow path F is formed is closed, the game ball P is placed in the special winning opening 9024 (or the second starting winning opening 9014). Basically, it passes through the special variable winning ball device 9022 (or variable winning ball device 9015) without winning a prize. On the other hand, referring to FIG. 48, when the special variable winning ball device 9022 (or the variable winning ball device 9015) in which the bottom surface member 9023 is moved backward is opened, the game ball P guides the flow path forming base 90112. It becomes possible to fall into the flow path portion 90115, and it is possible to flow down the guide flow path portion 90115 and win a prize in the special winning opening 9024 (or the second starting winning opening 9014).

FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board (game control board) 9031. Note that FIG. 49 also shows a payout control board 9037, an effect control board 9080, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 90560 that controls a pachinko game machine 901 according to a program is mounted on the main board 9031. The game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 that stores a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 9055 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 that performs control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 9057. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 9054 and the RAM 9055 are built into the game control microcomputer 90560. That is, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least a CPU 9056 and a RAM 9055 built-in, and the ROM 9054 may be externally attached or built-in. Further, the I / O port portion 9057 may be externally attached.

Since the CPU 9056 of the game control microcomputer 90560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 9054, the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056) executes (or performs processing) below. Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 9031.

Further, the detection signals from the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, the second count switch 9025a, the gate switch 9032a, and the operation gate switch 9017a are given to the game control microcomputer 90560. The input driver circuit 9058 is also mounted on the main board 9031 to control the game of the solenoid 9021 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 9020, the solenoid 90106 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the solenoid 90206 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 9015. An output circuit 59 that is driven according to a command from the computer 90560 is also mounted on the main board 9031, and a system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the game control computer 90560 when the power is turned on and a big hit game state are generated. An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the above to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 9031. The main board 9031 is also provided with a test signal output circuit (not shown) for outputting the test signal to the outside of the gaming machine.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (consisting of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 9080 issues an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 90560 via the relay board 9077. Display control is performed between the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b that receive and variably display the decorative symbol, the background symbol display unit 909c that variably displays the background symbol, and the symbol hold storage display unit 9018c.

FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 9077, the effect control board 9080, the lamp driver board 9035, and the audio output board 9070. In the example shown in FIG. 50, the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 may not be provided, and only the effect control board 9080 may be provided for the effect control.

The effect control board 9080 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 90200 including a effect control CPU 90201 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 9080, the effect control CPU 90201 operates according to a program stored in the built-in or external ROM (not shown), and the capture signal from the main board 9031 input via the relay board 9077 ( The effect control command is received via the input driver 90202 and the input port 90203 in response to the effect control INT signal). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 causes the VDP (video display processor) 90209 to control the display of the effect display device 909 based on the effect control command.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 90202 on the effect control board 9080. The input driver 90202 passes the signal input from the relay board 9077 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 9080 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulatory means.

As a signal direction regulating means, the relay board 9077 allows the signal input from the main board 9031 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 9080 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). The unidirectional circuit 9074 of the above is mounted. As a unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. FIG. 50 illustrates a diode. Further, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 9031 via the output port 90571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 9077 to the inside of the main board 9031 is regulated. That is, the signal from the relay board 9077 does not enter the inside of the main board 9031 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 90560). The output port 90571 is a part of the I / O port unit 9057 shown in FIG. 49. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided on the outside of the output port 90571 (on the relay board 9077 side).

Further, the effect control CPU 90201 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 9035 via the input / output port 90205. Further, the effect control CPU 90201 outputs the sound number data to the audio output board 9070 via the input / output port 204.

In the lamp driver board 9035, the signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 90352 via the input / output driver 90351. The lamp driver 90352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies the signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 9028a, the left frame lamp 9028b, and the right frame lamp 9028c. It also supplies the decorative lamp 9025 provided on the frame side. Further, in this embodiment, the special winning opening lamp 9024a is provided in the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the lamp driver 90352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies it to the special winning opening lamp 9024a.

In the voice output board 9070, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 90703 via the input / output driver 90702. The voice synthesis IC 90703 generates voices and sound effects corresponding to the phone number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 90705. The amplifier circuit 90705 outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 90703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 90706 to the speaker 9027. The voice data ROM 90704 stores control data according to the sound number data. The control data according to the telephone number data is a collection of data showing the output mode of the sound effect or the voice in a predetermined period (for example, the fluctuation period of the decorative symbol) in chronological order.

The signal and sound number data for driving the lamp are bidirectional communication (such as transmitting a response signal from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side) between the effect control CPU 90201, the lamp driver board 9035, and the audio output board 9070. Communicated by communication).

The effect control CPU 90201 reads necessary data from the character ROM (not shown) according to the received effect control command. The character ROM stores in advance character image data that is frequently used among the images displayed on the effect display device 909, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative symbols and background symbols). It is for keeping. The effect control CPU 90201 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 90209. The VDP90209 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 90201.

In this embodiment, the VDP 90209 that controls the display of the effect display device 909 is mounted on the effect control board 9080. The VDP90209 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 90200, and VRAM is mapped therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by VDP. Then, the VDP 90209 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 909.

In this embodiment, the effect control board 9080, the audio output board 9070, and the lamp driver board 9035 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. It may be mounted on one board. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) equipped with a circuit for controlling the effect display device 909 and a second effect control board (display control board) equipped with a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 9027, etc.). You may provide two boards with the effect control board of. Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 90200, but another board (for example, the audio output board 9070 and the lamp shown in FIG. 50). It may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90200 on the effect control board 9080 via the driver board 9035 or the like). In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 9070 or the lamp driver board 9035, and the control means receives the command. Controls related to voice control and lamp control are executed, and the received command is changed to a simplified command as it is or, for example, a simplified command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90200 that controls the effect display device 909. You may. Further, when two boards, a first effect control board and a second effect control board, are provided, a command related to the effect from the game control microcomputer 90560 is transmitted to the second effect control board. The command is transmitted from the second effect control board to the first effect control board as it is, or after processing (for example, changing the form or content of the command, simplifying, or selecting only the necessary command). It may be configured to be.

Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 on the main board 9031. When the power is turned on to the game machine and the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high, the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) determines whether the program content is valid or not. After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not, the main process after step S901 is started. In the main process, the CPU 9056 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 9056 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S902), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S903). Then, the built-in device is initialized (the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) are initialized, etc.) (step S904). In interrupt mode 2, the interrupt address is the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 9056 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device. This is the mode shown.

Next, the CPU 9056 confirms the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port only once (step S906). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 9056 executes a normal initialization process (steps S901 to S9015).

If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing in the backup RAM area (for example, processing when power supply is stopped such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped. (Step S907). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 9056 executes the initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing. In this example, if "55H" is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is a backup (on state), and if a value other than "55H" is set, it means that there is no backup (off state).

After confirming that there is a backup, the CPU 9056 performs a data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S908). In step S908, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop processing. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 9056 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set in the pointer (step S9091), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 9055) (step S9092). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of steps S9091 and S9092, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), and the unpaid prize ball. This is the part where the data indicating the number is set.

Further, the CPU 9056 sets the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 9054 as a pointer (step S9093), and a control command (power) indicating that the power supply has been restored to the effect control board 9080 according to the contents. A recovery command as an initialization command at the time of supply recovery) is controlled to be transmitted (step S9094). Then, the process proceeds to step S9015.

In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is saved by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity to execute the state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 9056 first performs a RAM clear process (step S9010). Note that the entire area of the RAM 9055 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for jackpot determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set in the pointer (step S9011), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S9012).

By the processing of steps S9011 and S9012, for example, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, a prize ball in-ball flag, a ball out flag, a payout stop flag, and the like are selectively processed according to a control state. The initial value is set in the flag for.

Further, the CPU 9056 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 9054 in the pointer (step S9013), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub-board according to the contents to the sub-board. The process is executed (step S9014). As the initialization command, there is a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 909.

Then, in step S9015, the CPU 9056 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90560 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S901 to S9015) is completed, the CPU 9056 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S9017) and the initial value random number update process (step S9018) in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S9016), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S9019). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the initial value of the count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a random number generation counter for determining a big hit). Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 90560 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the big hit judgment random number generation counter or the like is one round (the big hit judgment random number generation counter or the like). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt processing of steps S9020 to S9034 shown in FIG. 52. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (step S9020). The power off signal is output when, for example, the voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power supply cutoff detection process, when the CPU 9056 detects that the power supply cutoff signal has been output, the CPU 9056 executes a power supply stop time process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, the second count switch 9025a, the gate switch 9032a, and the operation gate switch 9017a are input via the input driver circuit 9058. , The state determination is performed (switch processing: step S9021).

Next, the CPU 9056 performs a display control process for controlling the display of the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, the first special symbol holding storage display 9018a, and the second special symbol holding storage display 9018b. Execute (step S9022). For the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in step S9032.

Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for jackpot determination used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S9023). The CPU 9056 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S9024, S9025).

FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1': Determine whether to generate a big hit or whether to generate a small hit (for big hit determination)
(2) Random 2': Determines which type of jackpot, that is, 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot (for determining the jackpot type).
(3) Random 5': Determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (for determining the fluctuation pattern)
(4) Random 6': Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination).
(5) Random 7': Determine the initial value of random 1'(for determining the initial value of random 1')
(6) Random 8': Determine the initial value of random 6'(for determining the initial value of random 6')

In step S9023 in the game control process shown in FIG. 52, the game control microcomputer 90560 is used for (1) a random number for determining a jackpot, (2) a random number for determining a jackpot type, and (4) for determining a normal symbol hit. The counter for generating random numbers is counted up (1 addition). That is, they are random numbers for determination, and random numbers other than these are random numbers for display or random numbers for initial values. In addition, random numbers other than the above-mentioned random numbers (1) to (6) are also used in order to enhance the game effect. Further, in the present embodiment, a common random number (random 2') is provided as a random number for determining the type of big hit and a random number for determining the type of small hit, but different random numbers are provided for each. There may be.

Further, the CPU 9056 performs the first special symbol process process (step S9026A). In the first special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 908a and the special variable winning ball device 9020 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. Next, the CPU 9056 performs the second special symbol process process (step S9026B). In the second special symbol process process, according to the second special symbol process flag for controlling the second special symbol display 908b, the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in a predetermined order according to the game state. Execute the corresponding process. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. Then, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol process process (step S9026C). In the normal symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the normal symbol display 9010 and the variable winning ball device 9015 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the game state.

Next, the CPU 9056 performs the hold storage process (step S9027a). In the hold storage process, the CPU 9056 executes a process of calculating and managing the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number.

Next, the CPU 9056 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command related to display control of the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b and an effect control command related to the number of reserved storages (effect control command control process: step S9028).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S9029).

Further, the CPU 9056 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, and the second count switch 9025a. (Step S9030). Specifically, the payout control board 9037 responds to the winning detection based on any of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, and the second count switch 9025a being turned on. A payout control command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 9097 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, for example, when the CPU 9056 inputs a detection signal from the first start port switch 9013a or the second start port switch 9014a, the CPU 9056 issues a payout control command for specifying one prize ball for payout control. Output to the microphone computer. Further, for example, when the CPU 9056 inputs the detection signal from the first count switch 9023a or the second count switch 9025a, the CPU 9056 outputs a payout control command for specifying the number of prize balls to the payout control microphone computer. To do.

In this embodiment, even if a game ball wins a prize in the special winning opening 9024 and is detected by the second count switch 9025a, the display of the prize ball increase display and the winning effect, which will be described later, are not immediately executed but are executed with a delay. However, regarding the payout of prize balls, when the detection signal from the second count switch 9025a is input in the prize ball processing in step S9030, the payout control for immediately designating the number of prize balls is 15. A command is output, the ball payout device 9097 is driven by the payout control microcomputer, and 15 prize balls are immediately paid out.

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 9056 sets the content related to the on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port to the output port. Output (step S9031: output processing).

Further, the CPU 9056 sets the first special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the first special symbol according to the value of the first special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the first special symbol display control data. At the same time, the special symbol display for setting the second special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the second special symbol according to the value of the second special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the second special symbol display control data. Control processing is performed (step S9032). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 9056 outputs a drive signal in step S9022 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, so that the special symbol display on the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b can be variably displayed. To execute.

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). Step S9033). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 9056 executes variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 by outputting a drive signal in step S9022 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S9034), and the process ends.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S9021 to S9033 (excluding step S9029) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. It may be executed in.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed by the two indicators, the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b, but the CPU 9056 uses the CPU 9056. Control is performed so that big hits do not occur at the same time on the two indicators.

FIG. 54 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1'is set. The jackpot judgment table includes a jackpot judgment table at the time of non-probability change used in a low probability state (low probability / non-KT state, low probability / first KT state) and a probability change state (high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high). There is a jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change used in (probability / second KT state)). Each numerical value shown in the left column of FIG. 54 (A) is set in the non-probability change jackpot determination table, and each numerical value shown in the right column of FIG. 54 (A) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. A numerical value is set. The numerical value shown in FIG. 54 (A) is the jackpot determination value.

FIG. 54B is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. Each numerical value shown in FIG. 54 (B) is set in the small hit determination table. Further, the numerical value shown in FIG. 54 (B) is a small hit determination value.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the small hit determination process (see step S90162B) may be performed only when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, resulting in a small hit. As described above, in the KT state, since the right-handed operation is performed, the frequency of executing the variable display of the second special symbol is high. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the KT state, the frequency of being controlled to the small hit game state is higher than that in the big hit game state.

The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 90503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1'). The jackpot determination random number value is shown in FIG. 54 (A). If it matches any of the big hit judgment values shown, it is decided to make a big hit with respect to the special symbol. Further, when the random value for determining the big hit matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. 54 (B), it is determined to make a small hit with respect to the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 54 (A) indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit. Further, the "probability" shown in FIG. 54 (B) indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), the probability (ratio) of a small hit is set to be 122/487, and is set to be approximately 1/4. There is. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit game state, but whether or not to make the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 908b a small hit symbol It also means deciding whether or not.

In this embodiment, if it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, all of them are unconditionally missed. Further, when it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, a lottery process using the small hit determination table shown in FIG. 54 (B) is performed, and the lottery process is performed to be about 1/4. It is decided to make a small hit with a probability (however, as will be described later, it may be a forced loss).

FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing the jackpot type determination table 90131a stored in the ROM 9054. The jackpot type determination table 90131a sets the jackpot type to "2R normal jackpot" or "2R normal jackpot" based on a random number (random 2') for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining one of "2R probability variation jackpot", "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", or "16R probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 55 (A), in this embodiment, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 20%, and the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 45%. It is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", and it is determined as "6R normal jackpot" with a probability of 35%. Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), in this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 30%, and the probability of 30%. Is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", 5% probability is determined as "2R probability variation jackpot", and 35% probability is determined as "2R normal jackpot".

The "16R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds and shifts to the high probability / second KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, the state shifts to the second KT state. See steps S902207A, S902208A, S902207B, and S902210B described later). Then, the probability variation state and the second KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

However, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if it is in the non-KT state before the start of the big hit, it is not in the second KT state even if it becomes the "16R probability variation big hit". It may shift to the first KT state (see steps S902208B and S902209B described later).

The "6R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of 6 rounds and shifts to the high probability / first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, the state is also shifted to the first KT state. See steps S902210A, S902211A, S902212B, and S902213B described later). Then, the probabilistic state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see step S902212A described later). Then, after shifting to the first KT state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends (see steps S902213A and S902010 to S902013). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

The "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to a high probability / first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, it shifts to the probability variation state). At the same time, the state is also shifted to the first KT state. See steps S902212B and S902213B described later). Then, the probabilistic state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

The "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see step S902214B described later). Then, after shifting to the first KT state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends (see steps S902215B and S902010 to S902013). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

The type of jackpot type is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in addition to the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 2R probability variation jackpot, and the 2R normal jackpot, the 3R probability variation jackpot to the 7R probability variation jackpot may be configured to be determinable. Be done.

56 to 58 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in this embodiment. The EXT shown in FIGS. 56 to 58 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, seven types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 07 for the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. 29 types of # 01 to # 29 are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 07 or 01 to 29) is used, it means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 56 (A) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 56 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 05.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the KT shown in FIG. 56 (B) is in the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state). The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for time is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 56 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 06 to # 07.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 57 (C) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 57 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of alignment, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Further, when the small hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In this embodiment, even in the non-KT state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning the game ball to the special prize opening 9024. It will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), even if the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is extremely lengthened and the execution frequency of the variation display is reduced. By doing so, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and the situation where a small hit is aimed at winning a prize ball is prevented even though the player is in a non-KT state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is set to 5 even in the case of a big hit. By making it relatively long, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at the prize ball by winning the special prize opening 9024 unreasonably during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 57 (D) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is set. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 57 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 57 (D), when it is determined that the first variation in the low probability / first KT state is out of order, the second variation pattern # 04 of the shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds is determined. To. In addition, when a small hit is determined as the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 (opening of the second start winning opening), which is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as a small hit. It is determined by the fluctuation pattern for preparation). In this embodiment, as described above, when the first KT state is controlled, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015, a special variable winning is actually achieved. The special winning opening 9024 in the ball device 9022 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 or the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 9022 is controlled to be in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening 9024. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 are used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 9022 to the open state after a sufficient time has passed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 9024. It prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the first KT state.

Further, if the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed, FIG. 57 (E). The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / 1st KT and the 2nd to 99th fluctuations shown in is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 57 (E), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second fluctuation patterns # 07 to # 11 Will be decided. Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (E), when it is determined that the fluctuation time is out of the range of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, and the second fluctuation pattern # 07 of the shortened fluctuation is applied. May be decided. Further, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time may be determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 09 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 5 seconds. In this embodiment, it is determined that the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state are missed or small hits, and the fluctuation display is executed based on the second fluctuation pattern # 08 and the second fluctuation pattern # 10. In this case, in the variable display of the background symbol on the effect display device 909, a symbol fanning effect such as a reach effect or a sliding effect is executed.

In addition, the 100th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot-based jackpot game that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 100th variation shown in FIG. 57 (F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 57 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 12 to # 14. Will be done.

In this embodiment, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as "during chance time" is displayed on the effect display device 909. As shown in FIG. 57 (F), when it is determined that the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state is a miss or a small hit, the effect display device 909 displays characters such as "chance time is over !!". It is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 12 or the second fluctuation pattern # 13 accompanied by the end display. Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (F), when the big hit is determined as the 100th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the effect display device 909 displays characters such as "chance time ends !!" A second variation pattern # 14 with a predetermined revival display after the display is determined.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, when a big hit is obtained in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 07 having a fluctuation time of 1 minute is determined. It is configured as follows. This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, in this embodiment, even in such a case, a sufficient time (1 minute in this example) at least a plurality of small hits can be generated is secured.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 58 (G) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is set. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 58 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 15 to # 19. Will be done.

As in the case of the first fluctuation of the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 58 (G), the fluctuation time is 5 seconds even when it is determined that the first fluctuation of the high probability / first KT state is out of order. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 15 of the short shortening fluctuation. Further, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for preparing to open the second start winning opening (second variation pattern # 17) may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (G), when a big hit is determined as the first fluctuation of the high probability / first KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern # 19 including the effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (G), even when it is determined that the first variation in the high probability / first KT state is a miss or a small hit, the second variation pattern # 16 or the second variation pattern # including the battle effect is included. 18 may be determined.

Further, in the case of executing the fluctuation display after the second fluctuation after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state, FIG. 58 (H) shows. The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and for the second and subsequent fluctuations is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 58 (H), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, any of the second fluctuation patterns # 20 to # 24 is applied. It is determined.

As in the case of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, as shown in FIG. 58 (H), the fluctuation time is also determined to be out of the range after the 2nd fluctuation in the high probability / 1st KT state. May be determined as the second fluctuation pattern # 20 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 5 seconds. Further, even when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 22 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (H), when a big hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations of the high probability / first KT state, it is for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern # 24 including the battle effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (H), even when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state are missed or small hits, the second fluctuation pattern # 21 and the second fluctuation pattern including the battle effect are included. # 23 may be determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 58 (I) is selected. The fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 58 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 25 to # 29.

As shown in FIG. 58 (I), when it is determined to be out of order in the high probability / second KT state, the variation of the shortening fluctuation in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state). The second fluctuation pattern # 25 of the shortened fluctuation, which has a shorter fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds than when the display is executed, may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the fluctuation display of the shortened fluctuation is further executed in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state). The second fluctuation pattern # 27 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (I), when it is determined to be out of the high probability / second KT state, a second fluctuation pattern including a continuation effect suggesting whether or not the high probability / second KT state continues is included. It may be decided to be # 26. Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (I), when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation including the continuation effect suggesting whether or not the high probability / second KT state continues. Pattern # 28 may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (I), when a big hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends after the continuous production. The second variation pattern # 29 including the effect is determined.

In this embodiment, when a variable pattern including a continuous effect or a battle effect is determined, the effect display device 909 executes the continuous effect or the battle effect in the variable display of the background symbol. When it becomes a big hit (16R probability change big hit, 6R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit), the production of the winning mode is executed in the battle production, and when it becomes a normal big hit (6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit), in the battle production. The effect of the defeat mode is executed, and in the case of a small hit, the effect of the draw mode is executed in the battle effect. Not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, even in the case of a 2R probability variation big hit in which the number of rounds during the big hit game is small, the effect of the defeat mode may be executed in the battle effect. ..

When determining the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation of the second fluctuation pattern # 04, # 07, # 09, # 15, # 20, # 22, # 25, # 27, for example, it differs depending on the number of reserved storages. It may be configured to determine the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation by the ratio. For example, as the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation may be determined at a high rate so that the reserved memories are digested earlier and the operating rate is increased.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, when the shortening variation of 5 seconds is executed in the case of the first KT state and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is executed in the case of the second KT state. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute a shortening variation of 5 seconds in the low probability state and execute a shorter shortening variation of 1.5 seconds in the high probability state.

Next, a specific example of the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern will be described. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing the determination ratio of the variation patterns of the special symbol and the decorative symbol in the variation pattern table for the second special symbol [high probability / at the time of the second KT] shown in FIG. 58 (I). In the fluctuation pattern table for the second special symbol [high probability / at the time of the second KT] shown in FIG. 58 (I), judgment values are assigned for each fluctuation pattern, but in the example shown in FIG. 59, they are assigned. The ratio of the judgment values (that is, the determination ratio for each fluctuation pattern) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 59, in this embodiment, when the probability is determined to be out of the range in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 25 of the shortened variation is determined at a rate of 70%, and the rate is 30%. In, the second variation pattern # 26 including the continuous effect is determined. Further, when a small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 27 of the shortened fluctuation is determined at a rate of 95%, and the second fluctuation pattern # including the continuous effect is determined at a rate of 5%. 28 is determined. Further, when the jackpot is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 29 is determined at a rate of 100%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, the variation display of the second special symbol whose display result does not become a big hit is displayed as the variation pattern of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation pattern # 25, It can be executed by # 27) and a fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time (that is, second fluctuation patterns # 26 and # 28).

In the KT state, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed, it is conceivable that the player stops the firing operation during that time. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when a small hit occurs, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened for 0.8 seconds, but the game ball is launched due to the provision of the nail group 55. It is configured to take at least 1.0 second from the to the special variable winning ball device 9022. That is, even if the game ball is fired after the small hit has occurred (specifically, after the small hit symbol has been derived and displayed, or after the occurrence of the small hit has been notified), the special winning opening 9024 is won. It is configured so that it cannot be forced. Then, even if a small hit occurs after the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, which has a relatively long fluctuation time, the special winning opening 9024 cannot be won, and the effect of the production cannot be enhanced. There is a risk of causing it.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, in the KT state (here, the second KT state), the fluctuation is displayed by the fluctuation pattern (that is, the second fluctuation patterns # 26, # 28) having a relatively long fluctuation time. The rate at which small hits occur after the execution of is lower than the rate at which small hits occur after the variation display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of shortened fluctuations (that is, the second fluctuation patterns # 25 and # 27). Judgment value is assigned to. With such a configuration, even if a small hit occurs, it is not possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 9024, and on the contrary, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the interest is lowered and the effect of the production can be enhanced.

In the example shown in FIG. 59, when a small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 28 having a relatively long fluctuation time is determined at a rate of 5%. However, it may not be decided. That is, in the KT state (here, the second KT state), the second fluctuation pattern # 28 is not provided or the determination value is not assigned to the second fluctuation pattern # 28, and the fluctuation time varies depending on the fluctuation pattern. The small hit may not occur even after the display is executed.

Further, in this embodiment, the second fluctuation patterns # 26, # including the continuous effect are set as fluctuation patterns having a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation patterns of shortened fluctuations (that is, the second fluctuation patterns # 25 and # 27). 28 is provided, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, an effect other than the continuous effect (for example, when the display result is off, when the small hit, and when the big hit is common is common. A variation pattern including (such as the reach effect to be executed) may be provided.

For example, a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is longer than the shortened fluctuation, and the fluctuation pattern is out of alignment after the predetermined reach effect is executed, and the fluctuation pattern is a small hit after the predetermined reach effect is executed. A fluctuation pattern that becomes a big hit after the predetermined reach effect is executed may be provided. Also in this case, the rate at which a small hit occurs after the variation display is executed by the variation pattern in which the predetermined reach effect is executed depends on the variation pattern of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation patterns # 25 and # 27). It is desirable that the judgment value is assigned so as to be lower than the rate at which small hits occur after the fluctuation display is executed. Further, if the big hit is not obtained after the predetermined reach effect is executed, it is desirable that the ratio of the missed hit is higher than that of the small hit.

In addition, when determining a small hit in the high probability / second KT state, one of three or more fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times can be selected, and the ratio of selecting from the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time is increased. You may. For example, when the display result is off, when it is a small hit, and when it is a big hit, a fluctuation pattern including the first reach effect (variation time 10 seconds) and a fluctuation pattern including the second reach effect (variation time 20), respectively. When a fluctuation pattern (variation time 30 seconds) including the second reach effect and a small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, a fluctuation pattern including the first reach effect (variation time 10 seconds) is provided. > The selection ratio may be increased in the order of the variation pattern including the second reach effect (variation time 20 seconds)> the variation pattern including the third reach effect (variation time 30 seconds). Further, the fluctuation pattern including the third reach effect (variation time 30 seconds)> the fluctuation pattern including the second reach effect (variation time 20 seconds)> the fluctuation pattern including the first reach effect (variation time 10 seconds) are displayed in this order. If the result is not a big hit, the percentage of misses may be higher than that of a small hit. With such a configuration, even if a small hit occurs, it is not possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 9024, and on the contrary, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the interest is lowered and the effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, the rate at which small hits occur is low (or does not occur) after the fluctuation display is executed by the fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time. Even in the first KT state, the rate at which small hits occur after the fluctuation display is executed by the fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time may be low (or not generated).

Further, in this embodiment, the nail group 55 is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball, and the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game is set to 0.8 seconds. Even if the game ball is fired after a hit has occurred (specifically, after the small hit symbol has been derived and displayed, or after the occurrence of a small hit has been notified), the special winning opening 9024 cannot be won. However, it may be realized by only one of the configurations, and even if the nail group 55 is not provided, a predetermined period (for example, for example) before the game ball arrives at the special winning opening 9024. It may be realized by arranging it at a position that takes 1.0 second or more, which is longer than the opening period.

In addition, when the player is in the KT state, a right-handed notification that prompts the player to launch the game ball aiming at the right side of the game area 907 (for example, the character display of "right-handed" on the effect display device 909) When it is configured to display an arrow indicating the right direction, etc.), when the variation display is executed according to the variation pattern of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation patterns # 25 and # 27), and when the variation display is executed. Right-handed notification may be executed in a different manner from when the variation display is executed by the variation pattern (that is, the second variation pattern # 26, # 28) having a relatively long variation time. For example, in the KT state, when the fluctuation display is executed by the fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time (that is, the second fluctuation patterns # 26 and # 28), the rate of small hits is low and the right-handed operation is performed. Since it is unlikely to be disadvantageous to the player even if it is stopped, it is "right-handed" than when the fluctuation display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation (that is, the second fluctuation patterns # 25 and # 27). Character display, arrow display indicating the right direction, etc. may be reduced or made transparent so as not to actively encourage right-handed stroke. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable right-handed notification according to the situation.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 60 (1) shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the first KT state, and FIG. 60 (2) shows the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special in the second KT state. The opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9022 is shown.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 60 (1). As shown in FIG. 60 (1), when the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol display 9010 executes the variable display of the normal symbol, and hits the normal symbol. If it is determined that the symbol is out of alignment, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010, and if it is determined to be out of alignment, the outlier is displayed on the normal symbol display 9010. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missed symbol is 0.2 seconds. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 60 (1), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 0.1 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 9014.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 9014 while the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 60 (1), the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 9024. It becomes. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 60 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 9022 on the downstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 on the upstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds. The opening time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening 9024 (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 60 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 is completed, the next variable winning ball device 9015 can be opened only after the fluctuation time of the next normal symbol. It is after at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 0.1 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, has elapsed. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 60 (2). As shown in FIG. 60 (2), when the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol display 9010 executes the variable display of the normal symbol, and hits the normal symbol. If it is determined that the symbol is out of alignment, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010, and if it is determined to be out of alignment, the outlier is displayed on the normal symbol display 9010. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missed symbol is 0.2 seconds. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 60 (2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 2.6 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for 0.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 9014.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 9014 while the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 60 (2), the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 9024. It becomes.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 is as short as 0.5 seconds. Further, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened is at least 3.0 seconds (normal symbol variation time 0.2 seconds + symbol determination time 0). A relatively long period of .2 seconds + time before the opening process of the second start winning opening is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 60 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long, so that the downstream side is compared with the first KT state. It is easy for the game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 9022 of the above, and it is easy for the game ball to win the special winning opening 9024. For example, in this embodiment, the winning frequency of the game balls is low as compared with the case where a maximum of 10 game balls can be won per round in the big hit game state, but in the second KT state, one small hit game is in progress. It is possible to win about 1 to 3 game balls.

In this embodiment, the "winning frequency" indicates, for example, the winning ratio of the game balls to the large winning opening or the special winning opening 9024 with respect to the number of game balls fired in the game area 907.

In this embodiment, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 is the normal symbol process process by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056). This is done by executing (see step S9026C). Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 also executes a process of determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol in the normal symbol process process of step S9026C, but the same probability (for example, 10%) regardless of the game state. ) Determines whether or not to hit the normal map. Specifically, regardless of whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state or a second KT state, or whether it is a jackpot gaming state. , Determine whether or not to hit the normal map with the same probability.

In this embodiment, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same at 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the opening processing of the second start winning opening is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 9015 is changed by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1 KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 9015 may be different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 9015 is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 9015 may be different depending on the setting. In particular, if the variable winning ball device 9015 in the first KT state is configured to have a shorter closing period (interval period) by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winning of the special winning opening 9024 in the first KT state. it can.

Further, for example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, the variable winning as shown in FIG. 60 (1) is provided. The second opening pattern (long opening) in which the ball device 9015 is opened for a long time is controlled, and the variable winning ball device 9015 shown in FIG. 60 (2) is opened for a short time if the special flag is not set. It may be configured to be controlled by short opening). That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, in the 100 times shortened fluctuation period of the special symbol in the low probability / first KT state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted in response to the 99th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 9015 being long open when performing a left-handed notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state. be able to.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 9015 is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 9015, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 9015 may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 9015 is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. It is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 9015 from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during a low probability / non-KT state.

In this embodiment, since the nail group 55 is provided, it takes at least 1.0 second from the launch of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 9014 and the special winning opening 9024, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 60, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 9015 is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the gate 9032 The variable winning ball device 9015 does not open by the time the game ball that has passed through the above reaches the variable winning ball device 9015 or the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the special winning opening 9024 can be won.) On the other hand, in this embodiment, by providing the nail group 55 and shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the game ball is variable after passing through the gate 9032 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 9015. Since the winning ball device 9015 is set to start opening, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the firing operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

In this embodiment, in order to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the variation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state, the nail group 55 is provided and the variation of the normal symbol is provided. Although the time is set as short as 0.2 seconds, the capture element may be eliminated by only one of the configurations. Further, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the capture element may be eliminated by the position, shape, and opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special winning opening 9024. For example, the special winning opening 9024 is such that the period until the game ball launched after the small hit occurs reaches the variable winning ball device 9015 or the special winning opening 9024 is longer than the opening period of the special winning opening 9024 by the small hit. The position, shape, and opening pattern of the ball may be defined.

61 and 62 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 90200. In the example shown in FIG. 61, the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 802C (H) are the first variable display unit 909a or the second variable display unit corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in 909b. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 90200 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 802C (H), the first variable display unit 909a or the second variable display unit 909b Controls to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 16R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation received by the game control microcomputer 90560 immediately before the first fluctuation pattern command is specified. Since the command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the first decorative symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the second decorative symbol. The display result designation command can be used for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, but the display result designation command for the first decorative symbol and the display result designation command for the second decorative symbol may be separated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 90560 does not send a display result designation command, but corresponds to each of 15R probability variation jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control microcomputer 90200 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command (first decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the first decorative symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command (second decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the second decorative symbol.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the first jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) for designating the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) for designating the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during the opening of the big winning opening) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening 9013 in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening 9014 in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. A command indicating the number of first reserved storages may be transmitted as the first valid start prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start prize designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a winning determination result) indicating the content of the winning determination result. The command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol designation command) that indicates whether or not a big hit is obtained, whether or not a small hit is obtained, and a judgment result of the type of the big hit among the judgment results at the time of winning.

In this embodiment, in the winning determination process (see FIG. 64) described later, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not it will be a big hit, whether or not it will be a small hit, and the type of big hit at the time of starting winning. To judge. Then, a value for designating a big hit or a small hit or a value for designating the type of the big hit is set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 90100. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit or a small hit, and the type of the big hit, based on the value set in the symbol designation command.

In this embodiment, EXT data is set according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made, and the type of the big hit, and a symbol designation command is transmitted. For example, in the winning determination process described later, when it is determined that the result is "missing", the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 1 designation command) in which "01 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "16R probability variation jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 2 designation command) in which "02 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "6R probability variation jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 3 designation command) in which "03 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "6R normal jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 4 designation command) in which "04 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "2R probability variation jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 5 designation command) in which "05 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "2R normal jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 6 designation command) in which "06 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the result is a "small hit", the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 7 designation command) in which "07 (H)" is set in the EXT data.

In addition to the configuration of this embodiment, in the winning determination process, it is determined in which determination value range the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern falls, and the determination result (determination result of the variation pattern) is obtained. The command shown may be sent. With this configuration, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize the fluctuation pattern.

The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo display designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / second KT state.

The effect control microcomputer 90200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90201) mounted on the effect control board 9080 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 90560 mounted on the main board 9031. Then, the display state of the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b and the display state of the background symbol display unit 909c are changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, and the display state of the lamp is changed. Then, the sound number data is output to the voice output board 9070. The effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 61 and 62 are also transmitted from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process process (step S9026A) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the first special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 908a and the special variable winning ball device 9020 is executed.

When the CPU 9056 performs the first special symbol process process, the first start opening switch 9013a for detecting that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening 9013 provided on the game board 906 is turned on. Then, that is, if a start winning prize is generated in which the game ball wins the first starting winning opening 9013 (step S90311), the first starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S90312). After that, the CPU 9056 performs any of steps S90300 to S90307 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S90300 to S90307 are as follows.

First special symbol normal process (step S90300): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 90560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the first big hit flag. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90301 (1 in this example). The first jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

First variation pattern setting process (step S90301): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90302 (2 in this example).

First display result designation command transmission process (step S90302): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90303 (3 in this example).

First special symbol changing process (step S90303): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the first fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S90301 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 90200 is notified. Controls the transmission of the symbol confirmation designation command, and updates the internal state (first special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S90304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 90200 controls the effect display device 909 to stop the decorative symbol when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560 is received.

First special symbol stop process (step S90304): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. When the first jackpot flag is set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90304A (8 in this example). If the first jackpot flag is not set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90300 (0 in this example). In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process (step S9036) based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4. Is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and in the display control process of step S9022, the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer.

First gate passage waiting process (step S90304A): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 8. In the first gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the operating gate 9017. When the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 9017 is detected, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90305 (5 in this example).

First big winning opening pre-opening process (step S90305): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 5. In the first large winning opening pre-opening process, the special variable winning ball device 9020 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 9020) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during opening of the first special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90306 (6 in this example). The first big winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the first big winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

First Grand Prize Opening Opening Process (Step S90306): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 6. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 90200, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the like are performed. Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 9023a, the control is performed to transmit the large winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90305 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90307 (7 in this example).

First jackpot end process (step S90307): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 90200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S90312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first reserved storage number). (Whether or not is 4) is confirmed (step S90212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the first start port switch passing process is terminated as it is.

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increases the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (step S90213), and at the same time, the value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total hold storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S90214). Next, the CPU 9056 extracts values from the random number circuit 90503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 65) (step S90215). .. In the process of step S90215, the software random numbers for jackpot determination (random 1'), jackpot type determination random numbers (random 2'), and fluctuation pattern determination random numbers (random 5') are extracted and stored in the storage area. Stored. It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 5') is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may try to do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly extracts a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 5') in the first variation pattern setting process described later. It may be.

FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the holding storage. As shown in FIG. 65, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of first reserved storages (4 in this example) is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. Further, in the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are filled with a random number for determining a jackpot (random 1'), a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 2'), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (random 5'). ) Is memorized. The first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 9055.

Next, the CPU 9056 executes the winning determination process (step S90216), and controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the winning determination process (step S90217). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variable display of the special symbol and the effect symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, and the big hit type are determined separately. At the timing when the game ball starts and wins in the first start winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014, before the variable display based on the starting winning is started, the winning judgment process is executed in advance to make a big hit. Check whether it will be a small hit and the type of big hit. By doing so, the display result can be predicted before the variable display of the effect symbol is executed, and the look-ahead advance notice effect can be executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result at the time of winning. ..

In the winning effect processing, for example, the CPU 9056 compares the big hit determination random number (random 1') with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. 54 (A), and determines whether or not they match. Confirm. If they do not match, if the probability change flag is set, the CPU 9056 compares the random number for jackpot determination (random 1') with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability variation shown in the right column of FIG. 54 (A), and they are used. Check if they match. It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variable displays may be executed between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S90216 and whether or not the variable display is actually started until the variable display based on the start winning is actually started. There is. Therefore, the game state changes before the fluctuation display based on the start winning is actually started (for example, if a probability change jackpot or a sudden probability change jackpot occurs before the start of the fluctuation, the probability change state changes from the normal state. It may have changed to.) Therefore, the gaming state at the start winning and the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation do not always match. In addition, in order to prevent such a discrepancy, the one with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the judgment at the time of starting winning is made based on the changed game state. May be good.

Next, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the first effective start winning command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S90216).

In this embodiment, when the processes of steps S90216 to S90218 are executed and a start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening 9013 and the winning determination process is executed, the symbol designation command and the first valid A set of two commands of the start prize designation command is collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process (step S90300) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S90300. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S90300, it means that the first special symbol display 908a is not displaying the variation of the first special symbol, and This is the case even during the first big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened a predetermined number of times).

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) first confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step S9050A). Specifically, the count value of the first hold storage counter is confirmed.

If the first reserved storage number is 0, the game control CPU 90560 confirms whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed since the last variation display was finished (step S9051A). Whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was finished is determined by, for example, 30 seconds in the timer for measuring the period during which the variation display is not executed when the variation display is finally finished. It can be determined by setting a corresponding value and checking whether or not the timer has timed out. If 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was completed, the game control microcomputer 90560 controls to transmit the customer waiting demo display designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S9052A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 90560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 9055, and the RAM 9055. (Step S9053A), the value of the first reserved storage area is decremented by 1 (the count value of the 1st reserved storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S9054A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 9055 is set to the first reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also stored so that it can be specified.

After that, the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S9060A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag, the first KT flag, and the second KT flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. If the 1KT flag is on, it is determined that it is in the low probability / first KT state, and the low probability / first KT background specification command is issued. If the probability variation flag is on and the first KT flag is on, the probability is high / first. High accuracy / 1st KT background specification command is determined to be in the 1KT state, and high probability / 2nd KT state is determined to be high accuracy / 2nd KT when the probability variation flag is on and the 2nd KT flag is on. Send a background specification command.

Next, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step S9063A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S9068A without performing the processing after step S9064A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the wire is not limited to the above. For example, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step S9063A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as a random number for jackpot determination (random 1') is performed, and the process proceeds to step S9065A. , Regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1') was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, when the big hit of the second special symbol is being changed in step S9063A, steps S9064A to S90161A. A random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range is set as a random number for small hit judgment (a random number common to the random number for big hit judgment or a completely different random number) without performing the processing of. By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1') was acquired at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 90560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random 1') from the first random number storage buffer (step S9064A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step S9064A). Step S9065A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for jackpot determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S9066A), the game control microcomputer 90560 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step S9067A). .. Then, based on the random 2', it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot (step S90160A), the jackpot type is memorized (step S90161A), and the process proceeds to step S9068A. To do. Further, if the jackpot is not achieved in step S9066A (that is, if it is missed), the process proceeds to step S9068A.

In this embodiment, when the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it is unconditionally determined to be all out of order, but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, even if the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it may be determined to be a small hit with a low probability.

Then, in step S9068A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step S9068A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step S9068A is determined.

In step S9065A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process (step S90302) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) first selects any variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 56 (A) to 56 (B) according to the game state. (Step S90201). Next, the game control microcomputer 90560 uses the variation pattern table determined to be used in step S90201 and the variation pattern determination random number (random 5') stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on this, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 56 should be used (step S901700). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 90560 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S901701).

Further, when the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step S901700, the game control microcomputer 90560 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first special symbol process timer and fluctuates. At the same time as starting the time measurement (step S901702), the measurement execution flag described later is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a is started (step S901703). Then, the game control microcomputer 90560 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first display result designation command transmission process (step S901706).

In the first display result designation command transmission process (step S90302), the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) is based on the determination result of whether or not to make a big hit and the determination result of the big hit type. Control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 90200.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol changing process (step S90303) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol changing process, the CPU 9056 first subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step S901121A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step S901122A), the symbol is confirmed on the effect control microcomputer 90200. Control the transmission of the designated command (step S901123A). Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S90304) (step S901124A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b (step S901125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol. If the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the CPU 9056 moves to step S901123A and controls to send a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S901123A). , The value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S90304) (step S901124A).

By executing the process of step S901125A, in this embodiment, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol is forced. It is stopped so that a big hit does not occur at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control microcomputer 90200 side, when the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the first variable display unit 909a in the first variable display unit 909a is based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command. 1 The stop display of the decorative symbol is stopped, and the display result 1 designated command transmitted in step S90302 is used to control the stop display of the out-of-order symbol as a variable display result of the first decorative symbol.

In this embodiment, in the first special symbol process process shown in FIG. 63 and the second special symbol process process shown in FIG. 72, the first start port switch passage process is performed for each timer interrupt (see step S90312). And the second start port switch passing process (see step S90322) is executed. Therefore, even if the stop display of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed, if a new start prize is generated, a new start prize is generated. It is configured to store new hold memory.

If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b (N in step S901125A), the process ends as it is.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the value of the KT count counter indicating the remaining number of times in the low probability / first KT state is "0" (step S902010), and in "0". If there is, that is, if it is not in the low probability / first KT state, the process proceeds to step S902014. When the value of the KT count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the CPU 9056 subtracts the value of the KT count counter by "1" (step S902011), and whether or not the value becomes "0". (Step S902012). If the value of the KT count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step S902014. When the value of the KT count counter becomes "0", that is, when the 100th fluctuation of the low probability / 1st KT state is completed, the CPU 9056 resets the 1st KT flag indicating the 1st KT state (1st KT flag). Step S902013) and step S902014. As a result, the first KT state ends (shifts to the low probability / non-KT state) when 100 fluctuations are completed in the low probability / first KT state.

In step S902014, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step S902014). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 9056 resets the probability variation flag, the first KT flag, the second KT flag, and the KT count counter if they are set (step S902015).

Next, the CPU 9056 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step S902017), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step S902018), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". (Step S902019), and set the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the process of waiting for the passage of the first gate (step S902020).

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a first gate passage waiting process (step S90304A) in the special symbol process process. In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the operating gate switch 9017a has been input (step S902501). If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 9017a has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 9017a is input, the CPU 9056 transmits the first jackpot start designation command (step S902502), and sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first jackpot opening preprocessing. Set to the corresponding value (step S902503).

In this embodiment, the jackpot game is not started as soon as the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the first special symbol by executing the first gate passage waiting process, but the operating gate 9017. The game ball passes through the game and is detected by the operation gate switch 9017a, so that the game shifts to the big hit game.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a first jackpot end process (step S90307) in the special symbol process process. In the first jackpot end processing, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S902200A), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step S902204A. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the first jackpot flag is reset (step S902201A), and control is performed to transmit the first jackpot end designation command (step S902202A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) in which the big hit end display is being performed on the effect display device 909 is set in the big hit end display timer (step S902203A), and the process is ended.

In step S902204A, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S902204A). Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S902205A). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S902205A), the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S902206A). Whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot is achieved can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S90161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 9056 sets a probability variation flag indicating that it is in the probability variation state and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S902207A), and at the same time, a second KT flag indicating that it is in the second KT state. Is set to shift to the second KT state (step S902208A). Then, the process proceeds to step S902214A.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step S902209A). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S90161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability change jackpot, the CPU 9056 sets the probability change flag and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step S902210A), and sets the first KT flag indicating the first KT state to the first KT state. (Step S902211A). Then, the process proceeds to step S902214A.

If it is not a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot), the CPU 9056 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S902212A). Further, the CPU 9056 sets “100” in the KT count counter indicating the low probability / remaining number of times in the first KT state (step S902213A). Then, the process proceeds to step S902214A.

Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S90300) (step S902214A).

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the second special symbol process process (step S9026B) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the second special symbol process process, a process for controlling the second special symbol display 908b, the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 is executed.

When the CPU 9056 performs the second special symbol process process, the second start opening switch 9014a for detecting that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening 9014 provided on the game board 906 is turned on. Then, that is, if a start winning prize is generated in which the game ball wins the second starting winning opening 9014 (step S90321), the second starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S90322). If the "first" of the first start port switch passing process shown in FIG. 64 is read as "second", the second starting port switch passing process will be explained. After that, the CPU 9056 performs any of steps S90350 to S90360 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the second special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S90350 to S90360 are as follows.

Second special symbol normal process (step S90350): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 90560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the second big hit flag. If it is not a big hit, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit. If it is a small hit, set the small hit flag. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90351 (1 in this example). The second jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. In addition, the small hit flag is reset when the small hit game ends.

Second variation pattern setting process (step S90351): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90352 (2 in this example).

Second display result designation command transmission process (step S90352): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90353 (3 in this example).

Second special symbol changing process (step S90353): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the second fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S90351 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 90200 is notified. Control is performed to send the symbol confirmation designation command, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 90200 controls the effect display device 909 to stop the decorative symbol when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560 is received.

Second special symbol stop process (step S90354): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 4. When the second jackpot flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90354A (11 in this example). When the small hit flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90358 (8 in this example). When neither the second big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (when it is set to be off (including the case where it is forced to be off)), the internal state (second special symbol process flag) corresponds to step S90350. Update to a value (0 in this example). In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and in the display control process of step S9022, the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer.

Second gate passage waiting process (step S90354A): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 11. In the second gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the operating gate 9017. When the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 9017 is detected, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90355 (5 in this example).

Second big winning opening pre-opening process (step S90355): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 5. In the second large winning opening pre-opening process, the special variable winning ball device 9020 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 9020) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during opening of the second special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90356 (6 in this example). The second big winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the second big winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

Second Grand Prize Opening Opening Process (Step S90356): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 6. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 90200, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the like are performed. Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 9023a, the control is performed to transmit the large winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90355 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90357 (7 in this example).

Second jackpot end process (step S90357): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 90200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90300 (0 in this example).

Second small hit release preprocessing (step S90358): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 8. In the second small hit opening pre-processing, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening 9024) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 90106 is driven to set the special variable winning ball device 9022 to open control. Further, the execution time of the process during the opening of the second small hit is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90359 (9 in this example). The second small hit opening pre-processing is also a process for starting a small hit game.

Second small hit opening process (step S90359): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 9. A process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9022 is performed. In this embodiment, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 9022 is 0.8 seconds (see FIG. 60). Further, when the game ball wins the special winning opening and the second count switch 9025a detects the game ball, the control is performed to transmit the special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. When the closing condition is satisfied, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90360 (10 (decimal number) in this example).

Second small hit end process (step S90360): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 90200 performs display control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90350 (0 in this example).

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal process (step S90350) in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S90350. When the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S90350, it means that the second special symbol display 908b is not displaying the variation of the second special symbol, and This is a case where neither the second big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened).

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) first confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step S9050B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed.

If the first reserved storage number is 0, the game control CPU 90560 confirms whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed since the last variation display was finished (step S9051B). Whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was finished is determined by, for example, 30 seconds in the timer for measuring the period during which the variation display is not executed when the variation display is finally finished. It can be determined by setting a corresponding value and checking whether or not the timer has timed out. If 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was finished, the game control microcomputer 90560 controls to transmit the customer waiting demo display designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S9052B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 90560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 9055, and the RAM 9055. (Step S9053B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S9054B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 9055 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

After that, the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S9060B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step S9060A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step S9063B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S9068B without performing the processing after step S9064B. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the wire is not limited to the above. For example, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step S9063B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as a random number for jackpot determination (random 1') is performed, and the process proceeds to step S9065B. , Regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1') was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, when the big hit of the first special symbol is being changed in step S9063B, steps S9064B to S90161B. A random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range is set as a random number for small hit judgment (a random number common to the random number for big hit judgment or a completely different random number) without performing the processing of. By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1') was acquired at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 90560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random 1') from the second random number storage buffer (step S9064B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step S9064B). Step S9065B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for jackpot determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S9066B), the game control microcomputer 90560 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step S9067B). .. Then, based on the random 2', it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, or 2R normal jackpot (step S90160B), and the jackpot type is stored (step S90161B). The process proceeds to step S9068B.

If the big hit is not made in step S9066B, the game control microcomputer 90560 executes the small hit determination module (step S90162B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit determination random number (may be a small hit determination random number) matches a predetermined small hit determination value to be a small hit. When it is decided to make a small hit (step S90163B), the game control microcomputer 90560 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step S90164B). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S9068B.

Then, in step S9068B, the value of the second special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step S9068B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step S9068B is confirmed.

In step S9065B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process (step S90351) is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S90301) shown in FIG. 67. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 67, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained.

In the second display result designation command transmission process (step S90352), the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) determines whether or not to make a big hit, whether to make a small hit, and a big hit. Based on the type determination result, one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 specified command to display result 3 specified command, display result 5 specified command to display result 7 specified command) is sent to the effect control microcomputer 90200. Controls transmission.

The second special symbol changing process (step S90353) is the same as the first special symbol changing process (step S90303) shown in FIG. 68. That is, in the first special symbol changing process shown in FIG. 68, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol changing process is explained.

In the second special symbol stop process (step S90354), substantially the same process as the first special symbol stop process (step S90304) shown in FIG. 69 is executed. That is, in the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 69, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol stop process is generally explained. However, in the second special symbol stop processing, if the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second small hit opening pre-processing (step S90358). ..

The second gate passage waiting process (step S90354A) is the same as the first gate passing waiting process (step S90304A) shown in FIG. 70. That is, in the first gate passage waiting process shown in FIG. 70, if "first" is read as "second", the second gate passage waiting process is explained.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the second big hit end process (step S90357) in the special symbol process process. In the second big hit end process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S902200B), and if the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S902204B. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the second jackpot flag is reset (step S902201B), and control is performed to transmit the second jackpot end designation command (step S902202B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) in which the big hit end display is being performed on the effect display device 909 is set in the big hit end display timer (step S902203B), and the process is ended.

In step S902204B, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S902204B). Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S902205B). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S902205B), the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S902206B). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S90161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 9056 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S902207B). Next, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not it was controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the jackpot this time (step S902208B). Whether or not the player was controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the big hit is, for example, in the second special symbol stop process before starting the big hit game, the first KT state is set before the big hit starts. A first KT storage flag indicating that the situation has been set and a second KT storage flag indicating that the state has been in the second KT state are set, and in step S902208B, whether or not these the first KT storage flag or the second KT storage flag is set is set. You just have to check. If neither the 1st KT state nor the 2nd KT state is set before the start of the big hit, the 1st KT flag is set and the state shifts to the 1st KT state (step S902209B). If it was in the first KT state or the second KT state before the start of the big hit, the second KT flag is set and the state shifts to the second KT state (step S902210B). Then, the process proceeds to step S902216B.

By executing the processes of steps S902208B to S902210B, in this embodiment, when a 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, when the KT state is before the start of the jackpot. Only the second KT state is set, and if the non-KT state is set before the start of the big hit, the first KT state is set. That is, as described above, in this embodiment, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the left-handed operation is performed, and the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. It is configured on the assumption that. However, if the variation display of the 2nd special symbol is configured to unconditionally shift to the 2nd KT state when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the right-handed operation is intentionally performed even in the non-KT state. It becomes possible to shift to the 2KT state, which may impair the original playability and unnecessarily increase the gambling. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the second KT state is shifted only when the KT state is before the start of the jackpot. In the non-KT state, the player is urged to perform a left-handed operation to prevent such a situation.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step S902211B). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S90161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 9056 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S902212B), and sets the first KT flag to shift to the first KT state (step S902212B). Step S902213B). Then, the process proceeds to step S902216B.

If it is neither a 6R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 9056 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S902214B). Further, the CPU 9056 sets "100" in the KT count counter (step S902215B). Then, the process proceeds to step S902216B.

Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step S90350) (step S902216B).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90201) mounted on the effect control board 9080. The effect control CPU 90201 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main process, first, an initialization process is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initial setting of the timer for determining the activation interval of the effect control, and the like (step S90701). After that, the effect control CPU 90201 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S90702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 90201 clears the flag (step S90703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90201 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S90704). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 performs the first decorative symbol process process (step S90705A). In the first decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the first variable display unit 909a is executed. .. In addition, the second decorative symbol process process is performed (step S90705B). In the second decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the second variable display unit 909b is executed. .. Further, the background symbol process process for controlling the display state of the background symbol display unit 909c is executed (step S90706). In addition, a prize ball number display process for controlling the display of the prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game or the KT state (first KT state, second KT state) is executed (step S90707). In addition, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 9018c is executed (step S90708). Further, a random number update process for updating the counter value of the counter for generating a random number such as a random number for determining the advance notice is executed (step S90709). After that, the process proceeds to step S90702.

76 to 78 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S90704). The effect control command received from the main board 9031 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90201 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S90611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 90201 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S90612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S90613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S90614), the effect control CPU 90201 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S90616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step S90617), the effect control CPU 90201 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) in the RAM. It is stored in the display result specification command storage area (step S90618A).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S90619), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S90620). The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation specification command has been normally received.

If the received effect control command is the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command (step S90621), the effect control CPU 90201 receives the first jackpot start designation command reception flag or the second jackpot start designation command reception flag. Is set (step S90622). In this embodiment, the first jackpot start designation command reception flag and the second jackpot start designation command reception flag set in step S90622 are also referred to as fanfare flags.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step S90623), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S90624). In this embodiment, the jackpot end designation command reception flag set in step S90624 is also referred to as an ending flag.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step S90625), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step S90626).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step S90627), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step S90628).

If the received effect control command is low probability / non-KT background designation (step S90630), the effect control CPU 90201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 909 as a background screen according to the low probability / non-KT state (for example). , Background screen of blue display color) (step S90631). If the effect control CPU 90201 is set, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the first KT state flag indicating that it is in the first KT state (step S90632). In addition, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the prize ball count counter for counting the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game or the KT state (first KT state, second KT state) (step S90633), and also displays the effect. If the prize ball number display is displayed on the device 909, control is performed to erase the prize ball number display (step S90634).

If the received effect control command is low probability / first KT background designation (step S90635), the effect control CPU 90201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 909 with a low probability / background screen according to the first KT state (for example). , The background screen of the green display color) (step S90636). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the first KT state flag (step S90637). If the effect control CPU 90201 is set, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the probability change state flag indicating that it is in the probability change state and the second KT state flag indicating that it is in the second KT state (step S90638). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to display the prize ball number display according to the first KT pattern (step S90639). For example, the prize ball number display is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 909. In this case, if the prize ball number display according to any pattern is not yet displayed, the control to newly start the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is performed. Further, if the prize ball number display is already performed by the jackpot pattern or the second KT pattern, the control is performed to switch to the display of the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern.

If the received effect control command is highly accurate / first KT background designation (step S90640), the effect control CPU 90201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 909 with a high probability / background screen according to the first KT state (for example). , The background screen of the yellow display color) (step S90641). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the probability change state flag and the first KT state flag (step S90642). Further, if the effect control CPU 90201 is set, the second KT state flag is reset (step S90643). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to display the prize ball number display according to the first KT pattern (step S90644). For example, the prize ball number display is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 909. In this case, if the prize ball number display according to any pattern is not yet displayed, the control to newly start the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is performed. Further, if the prize ball number display is already performed by the jackpot pattern or the second KT pattern, the control is performed to switch to the display of the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern.

If the received effect control command is highly accurate / second KT background designation (step S90645), the effect control CPU 90201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 909 with a high probability / background screen according to the second KT state (for example). , The background screen of the red display color) (step S90646). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the probability change state flag and the second KT state flag (step S90647). Further, if the effect control CPU 90201 is set, the first KT state flag is reset (step S90648). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to display the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern (step S90649). For example, the prize ball number display is displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 909. In this case, if the prize ball number display according to any pattern is not yet displayed, the control to newly start the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern is performed. Further, if the prize ball number display is already performed by the jackpot pattern or the first KT pattern, the control is performed to switch to the display of the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern.

In this embodiment, the processing of steps S90639, S9064, S90649 and the processing of step S90979 of the background symbol fluctuation stop processing described later are executed, so that the jackpot game or the KT state (first KT state, second KT state) is executed. The number of prize balls is displayed during the state), but the value of the prize ball counter when the KT state is ended and the low probability / non-KT state is returned by executing the process of steps S9063 and S90634. Is reset (cleared to 0) and the display of the number of prize balls ends.

Further, in this embodiment, the process of steps S90639 and S90644 is executed to display the number of prize balls in the first KT pattern in the first KT state, and the process of step S90649 is executed to display the number of prize balls in the second KT state. Although the case where the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern is displayed is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the first KT state, the prize ball number display may not be displayed (the processing of steps S90639 and S90644 is unnecessary).

If the received production control command is a large winning opening prize designation command (step S90650), the production control CPU 90201 sets a large winning opening winning flag indicating that a game ball has been won in the large winning opening (step S90650). Along with step S90651), 15 (corresponding to the number of prize balls per winning to the large winning opening) is added to the prize ball number counter (step S90652).

If the received effect control command is a special prize opening designation command (step S90653), the effect control CPU 90201 sets a special winning opening winning flag indicating that a game ball has been won in the special winning opening 9024. Along with (step S90654), 15 (corresponding to the number of prize balls per winning to the special winning opening 9024) is added to the prize ball number counter (step S90655).

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the number of prize balls is the same 15 when the game ball is won in the large winning opening and when the game ball is won in the special winning opening 9024 is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, the number of prize balls is set to 15 when a game ball wins in the large winning opening, while the number of prize balls is set to 10 when a game ball wins in the special winning opening 9024. You may.

If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demo display designation command (step S90660), the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to start the customer waiting demonstration display (step S90661). Further, if the effect control CPU 90201 is set, the previous small hit flag indicating that the display result of the previous fluctuation display was a small hit is reset (step S90662), and the small hits are continuously generated. The small hit continuous number counter indicating the number of hits is cleared to 0 (step S90663).

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the continuous small hit effect can be executed when the small hits occur continuously, but the process of steps S90662 and S90663 is executed. Therefore, if the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed after the variable display that becomes a small hit is executed, the continuous small hit even if the variable display executed after that becomes a small hit. The production is configured so that it is not executed.

If the received effect control command is one of the symbol specification commands (step S90664), the effect control CPU 90201 sends the received symbol specification command to the first free start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. It is stored in the storage area of (step S90665).

If the received effect control command is the first valid start prize designation command or the second valid start prize designation command (step S90666), the effect control CPU 90101 receives the first valid start prize designation command or the second valid start prize designation command. The designated command is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command is stored among the storage areas of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90667).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command or executes processing (step S90670). Then, the process proceeds to step S90611.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the background symbol process process (step S90706) shown in FIG. 75. In the background symbol process process, the effect control CPU 90201 first executes the hold sequence effect control process that controls the hold sequence effect (step 90900A). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 performs any of steps S90900 to S90908 according to the value of the background symbol process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed.

Background symbol variation start waiting process (step S90900): It is determined whether or not the background symbol variation start condition is satisfied, and if the background symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the background symbol display unit 909c starts the variation. To control. The fluctuation start condition of the background symbol is satisfied when it is confirmed in the command analysis process that any fluctuation pattern command has been received. Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start processing (step S90901).

Background symbol variation start processing (step S90901): Control is performed so that the background symbol variation on the left, middle, and right is started. In addition, the stop symbol of the background symbol is determined according to the received display result command, and the fluctuation time of the background symbol is set. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S90902).

Background symbol change processing (step S90902): The end of the background symbol change time is monitored. When the fluctuation time ends, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol stop processing (step S90903). In the process of changing the background symbol, the effect control CPU 90201 may extend the variation time of the background symbol.

Background symbol stop processing (step S90903): Control is performed to finally stop the fluctuation of the background symbol and display the stopped symbol. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S90900), the big hit display process (step S90904), or the small hit medium process (step S90908). When updating to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S90904), the jackpot display process (step S90904) is performed on condition that the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command is received. Update to the value corresponding to. Further, when updating to the value corresponding to the small hit middle processing (step S90908), the value corresponding to the small hit middle display processing (step S90908) is set on the condition that the small hit start designation command is received. Update.

Big hit display process (step S90904): Controls the big hit display. Then, when the big winning opening opening display command (the big winning opening opening display command related to the first round) that indicates that the big hit game has actually started is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is processed during the round ( Update to the value corresponding to step S90905).

Processing during the round (step S90905): Display control during the round is performed. For example, when a large winning opening opening display command indicating that the large winning opening is open is received, the number of rounds is displayed and controlled.

Round post-processing (step S90906): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the large winning opening is received, which indicates that the large winning opening is open (closed), interval display is performed.

Big hit end effect processing (step S90907): Controls the big hit end display after the big hit game is finished. For example, when the ending designation command (first ending designation command, second ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot is received, the ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S90900).

Small hit middle processing (step S90908): Display control during the small hit game is performed. Then, when the small hit end designation command is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S90900).

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the hold continuous effect control process (step S90900A). In this embodiment, when the jackpot game is started, there is a hold memory that becomes a jackpot among the hold memories currently stored, that is, a hold sequence that suggests that the jackpot is continuously executed. The production can be performed.

In the hold continuous effect control process, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the jackpot game (step S903501). In step S903501, for example, if the value of the background symbol process flag is the jackpot display process (step S90304), it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot game.

If it is the start timing of the jackpot game (Y in step S903501), the effect control CPU 90201 receives a command at the time of starting winning (that is, a symbol designation command and a valid starting winning designation command (first valid starting winning designation command or second valid). It is confirmed whether or not the command indicating the jackpot is included in the set) of the start prize designation command) (step S903502).

When a command indicating a jackpot is included (Y in step S903502), the effect control CPU 90201 notifies that the jackpot is continuously executed (step S903502a). In step S903502a, for example, in the effect display device 909, the character display of "continuous jackpot confirmation" is displayed, so that there is a hold memory that becomes a jackpot among the currently stored hold memories, and the jackpot is continuous. Is notified that it will be executed.

In this embodiment, if there is a hold memory that is a big hit in the first hold memory for the variable display of the first special symbol that is currently stored, or the second hold for the variable display of the second special symbol. When there is a hold memory that becomes a big hit in the memory, it is configured to be able to notify that the big hit is continuously executed, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, for example, in the second hold memory. It is possible to notify that the jackpot is continuously executed only when there is a hold memory that becomes a big hit, and if there is a hold memory that becomes a jackpot in the first hold memory, the jackpot continues. It may be configured not to notify that it is executed. Further, it may be possible to notify that the jackpots are continuously executed only when there is a hold memory that becomes a specific jackpot (for example, 16R probability variation jackpot).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 sets a hold sequence execution flag indicating that the hold sequence effect is being executed (step S903503), and ends the process.

If it is not the start timing of the big hit game (N in step S903501), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is the timing during the big hit game (step S903504). In step S903504, for example, if the value of the background symbol process flag is either in-round processing (step S90905) or post-round processing (step S90906), it is determined that the timing is during the jackpot game.

If it is the timing during the big hit game (Y in step S903504), the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the hold continuous execution flag is set (step S903505), and if it is not set, the process ends. If the hold continuous execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not a new round has been started in the jackpot game (step S903506). For example, it can be confirmed by comparing the content of the received large winning opening opening display command with the content of the previously received large winning opening opening display command. When a new round is started, the effect control CPU 90201 adds 1 to the value of the total land number counter that counts the total number of rounds during the hold continuous production, and displays the effect based on the value of the total land number counter. The device 909 controls to display the number of rounds (steps S903507 and S903508). After that, the process ends.

If it is not the timing during the big hit game (N in step S903504), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the big hit game (step S903509). In step S903509, for example, if the value of the background symbol process flag is the jackpot end effect processing (step S903907), it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot game.

If it is the end timing of the jackpot game (Y in step S903504), the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the hold continuous execution flag is set (step S903510), and if it is set, the process ends as it is. .. If the hold continuous execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 notifies the game state after the big hit game (step S903511). In step S903511, for example, when the probabilistic change state is controlled after the big hit game, the effect display device 909 displays the character display of "probability change rush", and when the effect control is controlled to the KT state, the effect display device 909 is displayed. In, the character display of "small hit time rush" is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 80, the game state after the big hit game is notified at the end timing of the big hit game. For example, at the start timing and the executing timing of the big hit game, the characters "with second KT" may be displayed. Notification may be performed by displaying the character display of "No second KT". Further, also in this case, the notification may not be performed when the hold continuous effect is executed, and the notification may be performed only when the hold continuous effect is not executed.

If the command indicating the jackpot is not included (N in step S903502), the effect control CPU 90201 is reset if the hold continuous execution flag is set (step S903512), and the value of the total number of rounds counter is also reset. (Step S903513).

As shown in FIG. 80, in this embodiment, when the hold continuous effect is executed by the processing of steps S903502 to S903503, at the start of the previous big hit game, the effect display device 909 determines the "continuous big hit". By displaying the character display, it is notified that the jackpot is continuously executed. Further, by the processing of steps S903504 to S903508, the total number of rounds of the first big hit game and the subsequent big hit game is shown during the execution of the hold continuous production, and a series of big hit games are executed. It can be made to look like it is being done.

Further, by the processing of steps S903509 to S903511, when the hold continuous effect is not being executed, the game state (for example, the probability change state or the KT state) controlled after the end of the jackpot game is notified, but the hold continuous effect is executed. When it is inside, those notifications are not performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to weaken the impression that the big hit game ends and the normal game starts, and it is possible to make it appear that a series of big hit games are being executed by the previous big hit game and the later big hit game. ..

Further, as will be described in detail later, when the hold continuous production is being executed and the hold continuous execution flag is set, between the end of the previous big hit game and the start of the later big hit game. Even if a small hit occurs, the execution of effects related to the small hit (for example, small hit notification, display of prize ball increase display, winning effect, continuous small hit effect, etc.) is restricted. With such a configuration, it is possible to weaken the impression that the big hit game is completed and the normal game is being performed, and it is possible to make it appear that a series of big hit games are being executed by the previous big hit game and the later big hit game. it can.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a background symbol variation start process (step S90901). In the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 90201 determines the stop symbol of the background symbol (step S90920). In this embodiment, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be out of alignment), only the outlier symbol or the left and right background symbols in which the left, middle, and right background symbols are completely inconsistent are matched. Determine the combination of out-of-reach symbols. Further, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols in which the background symbols on the left, middle, and right are odd-numbered is determined. In addition, when a display result 3 designation command or a display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot), a combination of symbols in which the background symbols on the left, middle, and right are even numbers. To determine. In addition, when the display result 4 designation command or the display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot is determined), the same combination as the reach-off symbol in which only the left and right background symbols match. To determine. When the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), the combination of the background symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the variation display started this time is a small hit (step S90921a). Whether or not the variable display started this time is a small hit is determined by, for example, the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area (see step S90618) indicating the small hit. It can be determined by checking whether or not (whether or not the display result 7 designated command is stored).

If the variation display started this time is a small hit (Y in step S90921a), the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the hold continuous execution flag is set (step S90921b), and is set. For example, the process table for holding continuous time according to the fluctuation pattern of the background symbol to be used is selected according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command (step S90921c). Then, the process proceeds to step S90932. The process table for hold continuous time selected in step S90921c is configured so that the effect related to the small hit is not executed. With such a configuration, when the hold continuous effect is being executed and the hold continuous execution flag is set, a small hit occurs between the end of the previous big hit game and the start of the later big hit game. Even if it occurs, the execution of the effect related to the small hit (for example, the small hit notification, the continuous small hit effect, etc.) is restricted. In this embodiment, the execution of the effect related to the small hit is prohibited during the execution of the hold continuous effect, but for example, it is inconspicuous (for example, the display size is small and the color is small). It may be restricted by executing it in a form (thin, etc.).

If the hold continuous execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S90922). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S90931. If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the small hit flag was set last time (step S90923). If the small hit flag is not set last time (that is, if the display result of the variation display executed last time is not a small hit), the effect control CPU 90201 indicates that small hits have occurred continuously. As a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect to be notified, the continuous small hit effect determination table for the previous non-small hit is selected (step S90924). On the other hand, if the small hit flag is set last time (that is, if the display result of the variation display executed last time is a small hit and small hits occur continuously), the effect control CPU 90201 As a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect, a continuous small hit effect determination table according to the value of the small hit continuous number counter for counting the number of consecutive small hits is selected ( Step S90925).

In this embodiment, by executing the process of step S90922, the continuous small hit effect can be executed only in the second KT state, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the continuous small hit effect may be configured to be executable in both the first KT state and the second KT state.

Then, the effect control CPU 90201 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the continuous small hit effect determination table selected in steps S90924 and S90925, and determines the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect (step S90926).

FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the continuous small hit effect determination table. Of these, FIG. 82 (A) shows a specific example of the continuous small hit effect determination table for the previous non-small hit selected in step S90924. Further, FIG. 82B shows a case where the value of the small hit continuous number counter is 1 in the continuous small hit effect determination table selected in step S90925 (that is, 2 continuously in the variation display started this time). A specific example of the continuous small hit effect determination table (for two consecutive small hits) selected in (when a small hit occurs) is shown. Further, FIG. 82C shows a case where the value of the small hit continuous number counter is 2 in the continuous small hit effect determination table selected in step S90925 (that is, 3 continuously in the variation display started this time). A specific example of a continuous small hit effect determination table (for three consecutive small hits) selected for (when a small hit occurs) is shown. Further, FIG. 82 (D) shows the case where the value of the small hit continuous number counter is 3 or more in the continuous small hit effect determination table selected in step S90925 (that is, continuously in the variation display started this time). A specific example of a continuous small hit effect determination table (for a number of consecutive small hits of 4 times or more) selected for (when small hits occur 4 times or more) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 82, in the continuous small hit effect determination table, determination values are assigned to each of the continuous small hit effect, the continuous small hit effect A, the continuous small hit effect B, and the continuous small hit effect C. There is. In this embodiment, the continuous small hit effect A is, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character A appears on the effect display device 909 and a character display such as "one more time!" Is displayed as a line of the character A. .. Further, the continuous small hit effect B is, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character B appears on the effect display device 909 and a character display such as "one more time!" Is displayed as a line of the character B. Further, the continuous small hit effect C is, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character C appears on the effect display device 909 and a character display such as "one more time!" Is displayed as a line of the character C.

In this embodiment, the case where the type of the character is different depending on the type of the continuous small hit effect is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the type of character display may be different or the display color of character display may be different depending on the type of continuous small hit effect. Further, as the continuous small hit effect, the effect of lighting the decorative lamp 9025 and the frame lamps 28a to 28c may be executed, or the effect of outputting the effect sound from the speaker 9027 may be executed, and various as the continuous small hit effect. It is possible to produce various aspects.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which three types of continuous small hit effects A to C can be executed, but not limited to such a mode, four or more types of continuous small hit effects are continuously small. The hit effect may be configured to be executable, or only two types of continuous small hit effects may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured so that there is only one type of continuous small hit effect.

As shown in FIG. 82 (A), when the previous fluctuation display was not a small hit (that is, when continuous small hits did not occur), there was no continuous small hit effect at a rate of 100%. It is determined. In this embodiment, if the previous variation display is not a small hit, the continuous small hit effect is not executed. Therefore, when it is determined as N in step S90923, it is as it is. It may be configured to move to step S90931. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the need for the continuous small hit effect determination table for the previous non-small hit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), when small hits occur twice in succession in this variation display, it is determined at a rate of 20% without a continuous small hit effect, and at a rate of 80%. It is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect A. In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in this embodiment, the continuous small hit effect B and the continuous small hit effect C may be configured to be determinable at a low ratio.

Further, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), when small hits occur three times in a row in this variation display, it is determined at a rate of 20% without a continuous small hit effect, and at a rate of 30%. It is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect A, and it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect B at a rate of 50%. That is, the continuous small hit effect B is executed at a relatively high rate. In addition, not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, the continuous small hit effect C may be configured to be determinable at a low rate.

Further, as shown in FIG. 82 (D), when small hits occur four or more times in succession in the current fluctuation display, it is determined at a rate of 20% without a continuous small hit effect, and a rate of 10%. Is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect A, it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect B at a rate of 20%, and it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect C at a rate of 50%. .. That is, the continuous small hit effect C is executed at a relatively high rate.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), since the ratio of the continuous small hit effect A already being executed in the second continuous small hit fluctuation is high, FIGS. 82 (C) and 82 (D) are shown. As shown in the above, the execution rate of the continuous small hit effect A is set to be low in the small hit fluctuations of the third and subsequent times in a row. Further, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), since the ratio of the continuous small hit effect B already being executed in the third continuous small hit fluctuation is high, as shown in FIG. 82 (D), the fourth or more consecutive small hit effects are performed. In the small hit fluctuation, the execution rate of the continuous small hit effect B is set to be low. With such a configuration, in this embodiment, it becomes difficult to execute the same type of effect as the type of effect previously executed as the continuous small hit effect, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the allocation of the continuous small hit effect determination table shown in FIG. 82 makes it difficult to execute the same type of effect as the type of effect previously executed as the continuous small hit effect. Although shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the continuous small hit effect A is executed, a flag indicating that the continuous small hit effect A has been executed is set, and when the continuous small hit effect is continuously displayed, the flag is set. If the flag is set, a type of continuous small hit effect other than the continuous small hit effect A may be configured to be executable.

Further, in this embodiment, when the previous variation display is a small hit (when small hits occur continuously), the continuous small hit effect determination table shown in FIGS. 82 (B) to 82 (D) is used. Although the case is shown in which the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect are determined by executing the lottery process, the present invention is not limited to such a processing mode. For example, when the previous variation display is a small hit, the continuous small hit effect may be unconditionally executed without performing the lottery process.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82, a case is shown in which the type of the continuous small hit effect to be executed from the plurality of types of continuous small hit effects A to C is determined by the lottery process. It is not limited to the mode. For example, the type of continuous small hit effect may be fixedly determined according to the number of consecutive small hits. For example, if it is the second small hit in a row, the continuous small hit effect A is fixedly determined, and if it is the third small hit in a row, the continuous small hit effect B is fixedly determined. If it is a hit, the continuous small hit effect C may be fixedly determined.

When it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect (Y in step S90927), the effect control CPU 90201 determines the variation pattern and determination of the background symbol to be used according to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command. A process table is selected according to the type of continuous small hit effect (step S90928). Then, the process proceeds to step S90932.

In this embodiment, the process table selected in step S90928 is used to execute the processes of step S90933, which will be described later, and step S90944 of the background symbol variation processing, so that the effect display device 909 continuously displays the background symbol variation. A small hit effect is executed.

In this embodiment, when a small hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol during the second KT state, the rate of the variation display of the shortened variation is increased (this). In the example, as shown in FIGS. 58 (I) and 59, when a small hit occurs during the second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 27 of the shortening fluctuation is determined at a rate of 95%) is shortened. A fluctuation display other than the fluctuation may be performed (in this example, the second fluctuation pattern # 28 having a relatively long fluctuation time (for example, 30 seconds) may be determined). Therefore, for example, in the background symbol fluctuation start processing shown in FIG. 81, when the fluctuation display this time is a small hit fluctuation, it is further determined whether or not it is a fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation, and the fluctuation of the shortened fluctuation. By executing the processing of steps S9092 to S90928 only in the case of a pattern to enable the continuous small hit effect to be executed, when the continuous small hit effect is executed, it is always executed in the variation display of the shortened fluctuation. It is configured as follows.

Unless the fluctuation display started this time is a small hit (N in step S90921a), the effect control CPU 90201 resets the previous small hit flag (step S90929) if it is set, and the number of consecutive small hits. The value of the counter is cleared to 0 (step S90930).

After clearing the small hit continuous number counter in step S90930, if the second KT state flag is not set (N in step S90922), or if it is decided not to execute the continuous small hit effect (N in step S90927). The effect control CPU 90201 selects a process table according to the variation pattern of the background symbol to be used according to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command (step S90931). Then, the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the selected process table is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S90932). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect device (effect display device 909, various lamps, speaker 9027) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). (Step S90933). For example, the background symbol display unit 909c outputs a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP 90209 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 9035. Further, in order to output the sound from the speaker 9027, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 9070.

When the execution of the continuous effect is specified in the variation pattern (in the case of the second variation pattern # 26, # 28, # 29), step S90933 and the background described later are described according to the process table selected in steps S90928 and S90931. By executing the process of step S90944 of the process during the change of the symbol, the continuous effect is executed during the change display of the background symbol. Further, when the execution of the battle effect is specified in the fluctuation pattern (in the case of the second fluctuation pattern # 16, # 18, # 19, # 21, # 23, # 24, # 29), steps S90928 and S90931 By executing the processes of step S90933 and step S90944 of the background symbol changing process described later according to the process table selected in the above, the battle effect is executed during the background symbol variation display.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time in the background symbol fluctuation time timer and starts the background symbol fluctuation time timer (step S90934). Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S90902) (step S90935).

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the background symbol changing process (step S90902) in the background symbol process process. In the background symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 90201 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S90940) and 1 subtracts the value of the normal symbol variation time timer (step S90941). When the process timer times out (step S90942), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step S90943). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S90944).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 executes the background symbol variation time extension process (step S90950). That is, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is started, or when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the first There is a possibility that the variable display of the special symbol may be started, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in parallel. Therefore, in this embodiment, the background symbol variation time extension process of step S90950 is executed, so that when the background symbol variation display is executed in response to the variation display of one special symbol, the other special symbol is executed. When the variation display of the symbol is started, the variation pattern of the background symbol is replaced or the variation time is extended as necessary.

In step S90950, for example, when the effect control CPU 90201 executes the variation display of the background symbol in response to the variation display of one of the special symbols that is out of alignment, the variation display of the other special symbol that becomes a big hit is displayed. When it is started, it is replaced with the fluctuation pattern of the background symbol corresponding to the special symbol of the big hit, and the fluctuation time is extended. Further, for example, when the variable display of the background symbol is executed in response to the variable display of one special symbol that is a big hit, and the variable display of the other special symbol that is out of order is started, the background symbol is displayed. The fluctuation display of the background symbol currently being executed is executed as it is without replacing the fluctuation pattern or extending the fluctuation time. Further, for example, when the variable display of the background symbol is executed in response to the variable display of one special symbol that becomes a big hit, and the variable display of the other special symbol that becomes a big hit is started, it has already been described. As described above, in this embodiment, since the variation display of the special symbol that is started later is forcibly removed in the middle, the variation pattern of the background symbol is not replaced or the variation time is not extended, and the background currently being executed is not performed. The variable display of the symbol is executed as it is.

Then, if the background symbol variation time timer has timed out (step S90951), the effect control CPU 90201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation stop process (step S90903) (step S90952). ).

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a background symbol fluctuation stop process (step S90903) in the background symbol process process. In the background symbol fluctuation stop processing, the effect control CPU 90201 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set (step S90970A). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step S90974. In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step S90973. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S90971 is executed. Without doing so, the process proceeds to step S90974.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set. (Step S90970B). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step S90983. In this embodiment, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step S90982. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the effect during the small hit game is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the small hit game has not yet been executed. Therefore, the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S90971 is set. The process proceeds to step S90983 without executing the display process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 90201 uses the effect display device 909 to display the stop symbol of the left, middle, and right background symbols (missing symbol, jackpot symbol). , Small hit symbol) is controlled to be fixedly displayed (step S90971).

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S90971 (Y in step S90972), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S90973).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags (first jackpot start designation command reception flag, second jackpot start designation command reception flag) is set (step S90974). .. When any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags is set, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S90975). The effect control CPU 90201 also resets the set jackpot start designation command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 selects a process table according to the fanfare effect (step S90976). In step S90976, when the hold continuous execution flag is set, the process table for hold continuous execution may be selected. In this process table for continuous holding, for example, a fanfare effect that emphasizes that a new big hit game is started is not executed, a simple fanfare effect is executed, or a big hit game that replaces the fanfare effect is performed. It is configured so that an effect or the like indicating that it is restarted is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it appear that a series of big hit games are being executed by the first big hit game and the later big hit game.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S90977), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (effect display device 909 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speaker 9027 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step S90978).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to display the prize ball number display according to the jackpot pattern (step S90979). For example, the prize ball number display is displayed at the lower left portion of the display screen of the effect display device 909. In this case, if the prize ball number display according to any pattern is not yet displayed, the control is performed to newly start the prize ball number display by the jackpot pattern. Further, if the prize ball number display is already performed by the first KT pattern or the second KT pattern, the control is performed to switch to the display of the prize ball number display by the jackpot pattern.

In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the display of the number of prize balls by the jackpot pattern is started or switched (see step S90979) in the background symbol fluctuation stop processing shown in FIG. 84, but only in such a mode. Absent. For example, in the jackpot display process (step S90904), the process during the first round after starting the jackpot game (step S90905), and the like, the same process as in step S90979 is performed to start or switch the prize ball number display according to the jackpot pattern. It may be configured as follows.

After that, the effect control CPU 90201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S90904) (step S90980).

When the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S90971 (Y in step S90981), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S90982).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (step S90983). When the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit start designation command is received), the effect control CPU 90201 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S90984). The effect control CPU 90201 also resets the set small hit start designation command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 selects a process table according to the small hit medium effect (step S90985). In step S90985, when the hold continuous execution flag is set, the process table for hold continuous execution may be selected. The process table for the pending continuous time is configured such that, for example, the small hit medium effect is not executed, a simple small hit medium effect is executed, or an effect alternative to the small hit medium effect is executed. With such a configuration, when the hold continuous effect is being executed and the hold continuous execution flag is set, a small hit occurs between the end of the previous big hit game and the start of the later big hit game. Even if it occurs, the execution of the effect related to the small hit will be restricted.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S90986), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (effect display device 909 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speaker 9027 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step S90987).

Then, the effect control CPU 90201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit middle processing (step S90908) (step S90988).

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step S90971 (that is, when the missed symbol is displayed) (N in step S90972 and N in step S90981), the effect control CPU 90201 is the background symbol. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S90900) (step S90989).

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a small hit medium process (step S90908) in the background symbol process process. In the small hit middle process, the effect control CPU 90201 first confirms whether or not the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (step S909201). When the small hit end designation command reception flag is not set (that is, when the small hit end designation command has not been received yet), the effect control CPU 90201 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S909202). , The process of controlling the effect device (effect display device 909, speaker 9027, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n is executed (step S909203). That is, the production corresponding to the small hit game is continuously performed.

Then, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S909204), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S909205). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S909206).

When the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit end designation command is received), the effect control CPU 90201 ends the effect corresponding to the small hit game, and step S909207 Move to. In step S909207, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the previous small hit flag if it is not set (step S909207). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 adds 1 to the value of the small hit continuous number counter (step S909208).

In this embodiment, as described above, when the variation display other than the small hit is started, the previous small hit flag is reset and the value of the small hit continuous number counter is cleared to 0 (see steps S90929 and S90930). ). Therefore, if the small hit game is executed based on the first variation display that becomes the small hit after executing the fluctuation display other than the small hit, the processing of steps S909207 and S909208 is executed, so that the previous time. The small hit flag is set and 1 is set in the small hit continuous number counter. Therefore, if the small hit occurs again in the next fluctuation display, it can be determined that the small hit has occurred twice in succession based on the value of the small hit continuous number counter being 1. Then, when step S909208 is executed by ending the small hit game and the value of the small hit continuous number counter is updated to 2, and the small hit is made again in the next fluctuation display, the small hit is continuous. Based on the value of the number counter being 2, it can be determined that small hits have occurred three times in a row. After that, even if the small hits occur four times, five times, and so on, by checking the value of the small hit continuous number counter, it is possible to check how many times the small hits occur continuously. Can be determined.

Then, the effect control CPU 90201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S90900) (step S909209).

86 to 89 are flowcharts showing the prize ball number display process (step S90707). In the prize ball number display process, the effect control CPU 90201 first confirms whether or not the large prize opening winning flag is set (step S90500). If the big prize opening winning flag is set (that is, if the winning opening is winning), the effect control CPU 90201 resets the big winning opening winning flag (step S90501) and wins the first prize. It is confirmed whether or not the first prize ball increase effect executing flag indicating that the ball increase effect is being executed is set (step S90502). If the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is set (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S90506.

If the flag for executing the first prize ball increase effect is not set (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 90201 will perform the prize ball at the first speed on the effect display device 909. Control is performed to start the effect of increasing the number by 1 and to start the effect of increasing the number of first prize balls (step S90503). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the first prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S90504). Then, the process proceeds to step S90510.

In this embodiment, the prize ball number display is displayed during the big hit game or during the KT state (first KT state, second KT state), but when the prize ball number display is displayed, the big prize opening When a game ball wins a prize in the special winning opening 9024, a prize ball increasing effect is executed in such a manner that the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number display is increased one by one. In this embodiment, there are three types of prize ball increase effects: the first prize ball increase effect to the third prize ball increase effect. In the first prize ball increase effect, the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at a relatively high first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) when the prize ball number display by the jackpot pattern is displayed during the jackpot game. It is an effect that is executed in such a way as to do. In addition, the second prize ball increase effect is the number of prize balls at a relatively high first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) when the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is displayed in the first KT state. Is an effect that is executed in such a manner that is incremented by one. In addition, the third prize ball increase effect is the number of prize balls at a relatively low second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds) when the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern is displayed in the second KT state. Is an effect that is executed in such a manner that is incremented by one.

In this embodiment, the fact that the big winning opening winning flag is set (a winning in the big winning opening has occurred) means that the big hit game is in progress and the number of prize balls displayed by the big hit pattern is displayed. Therefore, in step S90503, in the prize ball number display displayed by the jackpot pattern, the first prize ball increase effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the first speed is started.

If the big winning opening winning flag is not set (that is, if no winning is generated in the big winning opening), the effect control CPU 90201 is set to whether or not the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is set. Is confirmed (step S90505). If the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, the first prize ball increase effect is not being executed), the process proceeds to step S90510.

If the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is set in step S90502 or step S90505 (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 wins the prize ball number display. It is confirmed whether or not the display for increasing the number of balls by 1 has been completed (that is, whether or not 0.1 seconds have passed since the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 has started) (step S90506). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is completed in the number of prize balls display, the effect control CPU 90201 displays the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 by the number of prize balls counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state matches with (step S90507). If the prize ball number display after the prize ball number is increased by 1 does not yet match the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 90201 again performs the prize ball at the first speed on the effect display device 909. Control is performed to start the effect of increasing the number by 1 and to start the effect of increasing the number of first prize balls (step S90508). Then, the process proceeds to step S90510.

If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 matches the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the first prize ball increase effect executing flag ( Step S90509), the first prize ball increase production is completed. Then, the process proceeds to step S90510.

In this embodiment, when a prize is entered in the big prize opening during the big hit game, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S9030), and 15 is immediately added to the prize ball count counter. However, by executing the processing of steps S90500 to S90509, the prize ball number display is not immediately updated to the value to which 15 is added, but the first speed (this example). Then, the prize ball number display is updated in such a manner that the prize ball number increases by 1 in 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in this embodiment, it takes 0.1 seconds x 15 = 1.5 seconds to complete the update of the number of all 15 prize balls for one prize in the large prize opening. The number display will be updated. In this case, it is possible that the next big prize opening will be won before the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. For example, the fifth of the 15 prize balls. Even if a prize is awarded to the next big prize opening at the stage where the increase in the number of prize balls is displayed only up to, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls will continue to increase is displayed. We will continue to execute the first prize ball increase effect until the increase display of all prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new prize is finished (in this case, addition). The prize ball number display will be updated over 3.0 seconds including the number of prize balls generated in.) However, in this embodiment, when the first prize ball increase effect is executed, the first speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively fast at 0.1 seconds, so at least the jackpot game is ended. By then, the production in which the number of all prize balls is increased is configured to be completed.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the special winning opening winning flag is set (step S90510). If the special winning opening winning flag is set (that is, if a winning is generated in the special winning opening 9024), the effect control CPU 90201 resets the special winning opening winning flag (step S90511), and holds the holding sequence. It is confirmed whether or not the execution flag is set (step S90511a). If the hold continuous execution flag is set, the process ends as it is. That is, even if a prize is generated in the special winning opening 9024 during the execution of the hold continuous production, the processing is terminated as it is without performing a small hit-related effect such as a prize ball increase effect or a prize-winning effect. If the hold continuous execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S90512). If the second KT flag is set (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S90523. If the second KT state flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag is set (step S90513). If the first KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the process ends as it is. That is, even if a prize is rarely generated in the special winning opening 9024 during the non-KT state, since the number of prize balls is not displayed in the first place, the process is terminated as it is without performing the prize ball increase effect.

If the first KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the first KT state), the effect control CPU 90201 is executing the second prize ball increase effect indicating that the second prize ball increase effect is being executed. It is confirmed whether or not the flag is set (step S90514). If the second prize ball increase effect executing flag is set (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S90519.

If the flag for executing the second prize ball increase effect is not set (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 90201 will perform the prize ball at the first speed on the effect display device 909. The effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and the control is performed to start the second prize ball increase effect (step S90515). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the second prize ball increase effect execution flag (step S90516). Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

In this embodiment, the fact that the first KT state flag is set (during the first KT state) means that the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is displayed. Therefore, in step S90515, the first KT pattern is used. In the displayed number of prize balls display, the second prize ball increase effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the first speed (0.1 seconds in this example) is started.

If the special winning opening winning flag is not set (that is, if no winning is generated in the special winning opening 9024), the third prize ball increase effect is executed, which indicates that the third prize ball increase effect is being executed. It is confirmed whether or not the middle flag is set (step S90517). If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S90533. If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is not executed), the effect control CPU 90201 is set with the second prize ball increase effect executing flag. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S90518). If the second prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, the second prize ball increase effect is not being executed), the process proceeds to step S90540.

If the second prize ball increase effect executing flag is set in step S90514 or step S90518 (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 wins the prize ball number display. It is confirmed whether or not the display for increasing the number of balls by 1 is completed (that is, whether or not 0.1 seconds have passed since the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is started) (step S90519). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is completed in the number of prize balls display, the effect control CPU 90201 displays the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 by the number of prize balls counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state matches with (step S90520). If the prize ball number display after the prize ball number is increased by 1 does not yet match the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 90201 again performs the prize ball at the first speed on the effect display device 909. The effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and the control is performed to start the second prize ball increase effect (step S90521). Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 matches the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the second prize ball increase effect executing flag ( Step S90522), the second prize ball increase production is completed. Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

In this embodiment, when a prize is generated in the special winning opening 9024 in the small hit game generated during the first KT state, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S9030), and immediately. 15 is added to the prize ball number counter (see step S90655), but the prize ball number display may be immediately updated to the value to which 15 is added by executing the processing of steps S90510 to S90522. Instead, the prize ball number display is updated in such a manner that the number of prize balls increases by 1 at the first speed (0.1 seconds in this example). Therefore, in this embodiment, for one prize in the special prize opening 9024 in the first KT state, 0.1 seconds x 15 = 1.5 until the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. The prize ball number display will be updated over a second. In this case, it is possible that the next special prize opening 9024 will be awarded before the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. For example, 5 out of 15 prize balls Even if a prize is awarded to the next special winning opening 9024 at the stage where the increase display of the number of prize balls is displayed only up to the eyes, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls continues to increase. Is performed, and the second prize ball increase effect is continuously executed until the increase display of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new prize is finished (in this case). , The prize ball number display will be updated over 3.0 seconds including the number of prize balls that were additionally generated). However, in this embodiment, when the second prize ball increase effect is executed, the first speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively fast at 0.1 seconds, so at least the small hit game is completed. By the time, the effect of increasing the number of prize balls is completed.

If the second KT state flag is set in step S90512 (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to start the effect effect (step S90523). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the winning effect executing flag indicating that the winning effect is being executed is set (step S90524). If the winning effect executing flag is set (that is, if the winning effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the value of the winning effect waiting number counter for counting the number of waiting winning effects. 1 is added (step S90525). Then, the process proceeds to step S90529.

If the winning effect executing flag is not set (that is, the winning effect is not being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 displays the prize ball increase on the effect display device 909 (for example, character display such as "+15"). (Step S90526) and control to start the winning effect on the effect display device 909 (step S90527). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the winning effect executing flag (step S90528). Then, the process proceeds to step S90529.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the third prize ball increase effect executing flag indicating that the third prize ball increase effect is being executed is set (step S90529). If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S90533.

If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 90201 is displayed in the effect display device 909 in the second KT pattern. Control is performed to start the enlarged display of the prize ball number display (step S90530). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to start the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the second speed and to start the third prize ball increase effect (step S90531). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the third prize ball increase effect execution flag (step S90532). Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

In this embodiment, the fact that the second KT state flag is set (during the second KT state) means that the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern is displayed. Therefore, in step S90531, the second KT pattern is used. In the displayed and enlarged display of the number of prize balls, the third prize ball increase effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the second speed (0.5 seconds in this example) is started.

If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is set in step S90517 or step S90529 (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 determines the end timing of the effect effect. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S90533). Whether or not it is the end timing of the effect effect is determined by, for example, when the effect effect is started in step S90523, a timer for measuring the effect period of the effect effect is set, and the timer times out. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is. If it is the end timing of the effect effect, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to end the effect effect (step S90534).

Next, whether or not the effect control CPU 90201 has completed the display of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 in the display of the number of prize balls (that is, 0.5 seconds have passed since the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 was started). Whether or not) is confirmed (step S90535). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is completed in the number of prize balls display, the effect control CPU 90201 displays the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 by the number of prize balls counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state matches with (step S90536). If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 does not yet match the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 90201 again performs the prize balls at the second speed on the effect display device 909. The effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and the control for starting the third prize ball increase effect is performed (step S90537). Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 matches the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 90201 is displayed in the second KT pattern on the effect display device 909. Control is performed to end the enlarged display of the prize ball number display (step S90538). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the third prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S90539), and ends the third prize ball increase effect. Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

In this embodiment, when a prize is generated in the special winning opening 9024 in the small hit game generated during the second KT state, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S9030), and immediately. Although 15 is added to the prize ball number counter (see step S90655), 15 is immediately added to the prize ball number display by executing the processes of steps S90510, S90517, S90529 to S90532, S90535 to S90359. The prize ball number display is enlarged and displayed as the effect effect is executed, and the prize ball number increases by 1 at the second speed (0.5 seconds in this example). The prize ball number display is updated in such a manner. Therefore, in this embodiment, for one prize in the special prize opening 9024 in the second KT state, 0.5 seconds x 15 = 7.5 until the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. The prize ball number display will be updated over a second. In this case, it is possible that the next special prize opening 9024 will be awarded before the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. For example, 5 out of 15 prize balls Even if a prize is awarded to the next special winning opening 9024 at the stage where the increase display of the number of prize balls is displayed only up to the eyes, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls continues to increase. Is performed, and the third prize ball increase production will be continuously executed until the increase display of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new prize is finished (in this case). , The prize ball number display will be updated over 15.0 seconds including the number of prize balls that were additionally generated).

Here, in this embodiment, when the third prize ball increase effect is executed, the second speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively slow at 0.5 seconds, so the small hit game is ended. In some cases, the effect of increasing the number of prize balls may not be completed. In this embodiment, the prize ball number display process (step S90707) is configured as an effect executed in the effect control main process, and the variable display is being executed, or the big hit game or the small hit game is in progress. Regardless of whether or not, it is executed every time the timer interrupt occurs, so if the 3rd prize ball increase effect is not completed during the small hit game, the 3rd prize will be displayed over the variable display after the small hit game is completed. The ball increase effect is continuously executed (furthermore, the third prize ball increase effect may be executed over a plurality of small hit games with a variable display in between).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the winning effect execution flag is set (step S90540). If the winning effect execution flag is set (that is, if the winning effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not it is the end timing of the winning effect (step S90541). Whether or not it is the end timing of the winning effect is determined by, for example, when the winning effect is started in step S90527, a timer for measuring the effect period of the winning effect is set, and the timer times out. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is. If it is the end timing of the winning effect, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to end the winning effect (step S90542).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is 0 (step S90543). If the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is not 0 (that is, if there is an unexecuted waiting winning effect), the effect control CPU 90201 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning effect waiting number counter (step S90544). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to display the prize ball increase display (for example, character display such as "+15") (step S90545), and starts the effect display device 909 to display the prize ball. Control is performed (step S90546).

If the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is 0 (that is, if there is no unexecuted waiting winning effect), the effect CPU 201 resets the winning effect executing flag (step S90547).

In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S90524 to S90528 and S90540 to S90547 is executed and a prize is generated in the special winning opening 9024 during the second KT state, the prize ball increase display is displayed. At the same time, a prize-winning effect is executed. In this case, a new prize may be generated for the next special prize opening 9024 during the execution of the prize production, but in such a case, the prize is waited until the execution of the prize production is completed, and the prize is generated. After the executing prize-winning effect is completed, the next prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are executed (the prize-ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are executed later).

Here, in this embodiment, since the display of the prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect may be executed with a delay, all the prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are displayed by the end of the small hit game. It may not be possible. In this embodiment, the prize ball number display process (step S90707) is configured as an effect executed in the effect control main process, and the variable display is being executed, or the big hit game or the small hit game is in progress. Regardless of whether or not, it is executed every time the timer interrupt occurs, so if the prize ball increase display or the winning effect is not completed during the small hit game, the fluctuation display after the small hit game is completed. The prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are executed (furthermore, the prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect may be executed over a plurality of small hit games with the variable display in between).

In this embodiment, the effect effect is also executed when the special winning opening 9024 is won, but the effect effect is immediately executed at the timing when the special winning opening 9024 is won. (See steps S90523, S90533, S90534).

Further, in this embodiment, the prize ball number display effect (step S90707) is configured as an effect to be executed in the effect control main process, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and for example, in the background symbol process process, a step is performed. The prize ball number display effect (step S90707) may be executed before the processes of S90900 to S90908 are executed.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a prize ball increase display is displayed or a prize production is executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 9024. For example, the special winning opening lamp 9024a is further used. It may be configured to be lit.

Further, in this embodiment, there is a case where the prize ball increase effect is executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the large prize opening or the special prize opening 9024, and the effect that the number of prize balls is increased by 1 is executed. Although shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a gaming machine configured to have a so-called general winning slot (a winning slot in which a predetermined number (for example, 5) of prize balls is paid out without opening the variable winning ball device even if a prize is won). In the above, even when a prize is won in the general winning opening, the prize ball increase effect may be executed to execute the effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by one. In this case, when a prize is won in the general winning opening, the number of prize balls is uniformly increased by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) in the prize ball increase effect. Alternatively, in the second KT state, even if a prize is entered in the general winning opening, the number of prize balls increases by 1 at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds) in the prize ball increase production. You may perform a directing effect. Further, even in the case of such a configuration, in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state), even if a prize is generated in the general winning opening, the prize ball is increased. May be configured not to execute.

Next, specific examples of KT notification and small hit notification in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of KT notification and small hit notification. Further, FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the limitation of the KT notification and the small hit notification. In addition, in FIGS. 90 and 91, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C) ....

FIG. 90 shows a specific example of the KT notification and the small hit notification when the hold continuous production is not being executed. As shown in FIG. 90 (A), during the big hit game, for example, the character 90301 is displayed on the effect display device 909, and the character display 90302 such as "Big hit!" Is displayed as the dialogue of the character 90301.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (B), when the big hit game is completed, a character display 90312 such as the line "small hit time rush" of the character 90301 is displayed as a KT notification notifying that the game is controlled to the second KT state. (See step S903511).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 90 (C) and 90 (D), when the effect display device 909 starts the variable display of the background symbol on the left, middle, and right, and the small hit symbol "135" is derived and displayed, the small hit is derived. As a notification, for example, a character display 90306 such as "small hit has occurred!" Is displayed. In addition, the prize ball number display 90305 by the second KT pattern is displayed.

FIG. 91 shows a specific example when the KT notification and the small hit notification are restricted while the hold continuous production is being executed. As shown in FIG. 91 (A), during the first big hit game, for example, the character 90301 is displayed on the effect display device 909, and the character display 90302 such as "Big hit!" Is displayed as the dialogue of the character 90301. Will be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), even if the big hit game is completed, the KT notification is not performed because the hold continuous production is being executed (that is, the character display 90312 such as "small hit time rush" is displayed. (See steps S903509 to S903510), character 90301 and character display 90302 continue to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (C), the small hit symbol "135" is derived and displayed as the display result of the variation display after the first big hit game, and even if a small hit occurs, the small hit notification is not performed. (That is, the character display 90306 such as "small hit occurs!" Is not displayed). At the same time, the prize ball increase display, the winning effect, the continuous small hit effect, etc. are not performed, and the execution of the effect related to the small hit is restricted. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 91 (C), the number of rounds (“Round 16” in this example) is continuously displayed from the time of the final round of the first jackpot game, and “Still more! Character display 90313 such as "" is displayed, and it seems that the jackpot game is continuing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (D), when the second big hit game is started, for example, the character 90301 is displayed on the effect display device 909, and a character such as "Big hit!" Is displayed as a line of the character 90301. Display 90302 is displayed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 91 (D), the number of rounds displayed (“round 17” in this example) is displayed by adding the number of rounds of the first big hit game to the number of rounds of the second big hit game. , It seems that a series of jackpot games are being executed (see steps S903504 to S903508). Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 91, a production in which a predetermined story such as a story is developed in order through the previous jackpot game period, the variable display period after the jackpot game ends, and the later jackpot game period is produced. It may be executed or displayed with a specific movie image (for example, an image of a video in which the character operates based on a specific story) to make it appear that a series of jackpot games are being executed. ..

Next, the relationship between the contents of the hold storage and the restrictions of the KT notification and the small hit notification will be described. FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the relationship between the contents of the hold storage and the restrictions of the KT notification and the small hit notification.

As shown in FIG. 92 (A), when the jackpot game is started, if the pending memory 4 that is the jackpot exists among the currently stored reserved memories 1 to 4, the jackpot is continuously executed. Notification of the pending ream is performed. In this case, after the jackpot game is completed, the KT notification regarding the KT state is not performed. Further, even if a small hit occurs based on the holds 1 to 3 after the big hit game, the small hit notification is not performed. At the same time, the prize ball increase display, the winning effect, the continuous small hit effect, etc. are not performed, and the execution of the effect related to the small hit is restricted.

When it is notified that a big hit occurs multiple times in a short period of time by the hold continuous production, at the same time, it is also notified that the period controlled to the KT state (particularly the second KT state) after the big hit game is short. There is a risk of degrading the interest. Therefore, in this embodiment, when notifying that the big hits are continuously executed by the hold continuous production, the KT notification regarding the KT state is not performed after the end of the big hit game, and even if a small hit occurs. By restricting the small hit notification (and the display related to the small hit such as the display of the prize ball increase display, the winning effect, and the continuous small hit effect), it makes the player feel that a series of big hit games are being executed. , It is prevented that the holding rendition will rather reduce the interest.

In this embodiment, regardless of the type of the first big hit or the second big hit, when the big hit game is started, if there is a hold memory that becomes a big hit, the hold continuous production can be executed. For example, the jackpot type of the later jackpot is a jackpot other than the 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, the 2R normal jackpot not controlled by the second KT state, the 2R probability variation jackpot, the 6R normal jackpot and the 6R probability variation jackpot), and the jackpot of the previous jackpot. If either of the types is a 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, a jackpot controlled by the second KT state), or if both are applicable, it is notified that the second KT state is for a short period of time. Therefore, the execution of the hold continuous effect may be restricted (for example, prohibited or the execution frequency may be reduced). Further, for example, when the configuration is such that the KT state (or the second KT state) is always controlled after the big hit game, the hold continuous effect may be executed.

Further, the situation in which the hold continuous effect can be executed is limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 92 (B), the jackpot type of the previous jackpot is a jackpot other than the 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, 2R normal that is not controlled to the second KT state). When the jackpot is 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot and 6R probability variation jackpot), and the jackpot type of the later jackpot is 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, the jackpot controlled in the second KT state), the hold continuous effect is executed. It may be possible. In this case, after the end of the previous jackpot game, it is not controlled to the second KT state, and it is desirable that the next jackpot occurs earlier. .. Therefore, along with the big hit game, it may be notified that the second KT state is not controlled after the end of the big hit game this time. In the example shown in FIG. 92 (B), the jackpot type of the later jackpot is 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, the jackpot controlled in the second KT state), but regardless of the jackpot type of the later jackpot. If the jackpot type of the previous jackpot is a jackpot other than the 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, a 2R normal jackpot that is not controlled in the second KT state, a 2R probability variation jackpot, a 6R normal jackpot, and a 6R probability variation jackpot), the hold continuous production can be executed. You may try to do it. Even in this case, it is desirable that the next big hit occurs early, so that the pending continuous production does not rather reduce the interest.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 92C, when both the first jackpot and the latter jackpot type are 16R probability variation jackpots (that is, jackpots controlled in the second KT state), the jackpot game starts. When the jackpot is played (or during the jackpot game or at the end of the jackpot game), after notifying that the second KT state is not controlled after the end of the jackpot game this time, a hold sequence that notifies that the jackpot is continuously executed May be notified. In this case, even if a small hit occurs based on the hold 1-3 after the big hit game, the small hit notification (and the effect related to the small hit such as the display of the prize ball increase display, the winning effect, and the continuous small hit effect) is performed. Restrict it so that it will not be damaged. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the same situation as in the case of FIG. 92 (B) above, and rather deteriorating the interest due to the hold continuous production.

In addition, when executing the hold continuous production, the control that makes it appear that a series of big hit games is being executed is not performed, and the normal game is performed between the previous big hit game and the subsequent big hit game. You may.

FIG. 93 shows a modified example of the hold continuous effect control process in the example shown in FIGS. 92 (B) and 92 (C) in which a normal game is performed between the first big hit game and the subsequent big hit game. It is a flowchart which shows.

In the hold continuous effect control process shown in FIG. 93, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the jackpot game (step S903501). In step S903501, for example, if the value of the background symbol process flag is the jackpot display process (step S90304), it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot game.

If it is the start timing of the jackpot game (Y in step S903501), the effect control CPU 90201 receives a command at the time of starting winning (that is, a symbol designation command and a valid starting winning designation command (first valid starting winning designation command or second valid). It is confirmed whether or not the set of the start prize designation command) includes a command indicating a 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, a jackpot controlled in the second KT state) (step S903510).

If the command indicating the 16R probability variation jackpot is not included (N in step S903510), whether or not the effect control CPU 90201 is controlled to the second KT state after the jackpot game this time according to the jackpot type this time. (Step S903516). For example, the effect display device 909 is notified by displaying the character display of "with second KT" and the character display of "without second KT". After that, if the hold continuous execution flag is set, it is reset (step S903515), and the process ends.

When a command indicating a 16R probability variation jackpot is included (Y in step S903510), if the jackpot this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, a jackpot controlled in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 90201 this time. After the big hit game of, the player is notified that the second KT state is not controlled (steps S903511, S903512). For example, the effect display device 909 is notified by displaying the character display of "no second KT".

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 notifies that the jackpot exists in the hold memory and the jackpot is continuously executed (step S903513). For example, in the effect display device 909, the character display of "continuous big hit confirmation" is displayed, so that it is notified that the big hits are continuously executed. After that, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the hold sequence execution flag indicating that the hold sequence effect is being executed (step S903514), and ends the process.

By executing the processes of steps S903510, S903511, and S903513, the jackpots other than the 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, the 2R normal jackpot, the 2R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, and the 6R probability variation jackpot that are not controlled by the second KT state) are controlled. Occasionally, if there is a hold memory that becomes a 16R probability variation big hit (that is, a big hit controlled in the second KT state), the hold continuous effect can be executed. Further, when the processing of steps S903510, S903511, S903512, and S903513 is executed to control the 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, the jackpot controlled in the second KT state), the 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, the second KT state) is controlled. If there is a hold memory that becomes a big hit controlled by the player, the hold continuous effect can be executed after notifying that the big hit controlled this time is a big hit that is not controlled in the second KT state. In the example of FIG. 93, the hold continuous effect is executed after notifying that the big hit controlled this time is a big hit that is not controlled in the second KT state. After executing (that is, after notifying that the jackpots are continuously executed), it may be notified that the jackpot controlled this time is a jackpot not controlled by the second KT state.

Next, a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect in this embodiment will be described. 94 to 97 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect. Of these, FIG. 94 shows a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game. Further, FIG. 95 shows a specific example of an effect mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 9024 in the small hit game in the first KT state. Further, FIGS. 96 and 97 show specific examples of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 9024 in the small hit game in the second KT state. In addition, in FIGS. 94 to 97, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C) ....

First, with reference to FIG. 94, a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 94 (A), when the jackpot game is in progress, the effect display device 909 displays the prize ball number display 90300 according to the jackpot pattern (see step S90979), and for example, the character 90301 is displayed. Then, a character display 90302 such as "Big hit!" Is displayed as a line of the character 90301. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94, a case is shown in which the prize ball number display 90300 is displayed at the lower left end of the display screen of the effect display device 909 as the prize ball number display 90300 by the jackpot pattern. There is.

Next, it is assumed that a prize is awarded to the big prize opening during the big hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 94B, the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the first speed is executed in the effect display device 909, and the first prize ball increase effect is executed (see steps S90500 to S90509). ). In this embodiment, in the first prize ball increase effect, the prize ball number display is updated at a relatively high speed (0.1 seconds in this example) as the first speed, and is shown in FIG. 94 (C). As described above, when the update of all the prize ball number displays is completed, the first prize ball increase effect ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a specific example of an effect mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 9024 in the small hit game in the first KT state will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 95 (A), when the first KT state is in progress, the effect display device 909 displays the prize ball number display 90303 according to the first KT pattern (see steps S90639 and S90644), and a small hit. When, for example, a character display 304 such as "Small hit occurred!" Is displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, as the prize ball number display 90303 by the first KT pattern, the case where the prize ball number display 90303 is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 909 is shown. ing.

Next, it is assumed that a prize is generated in the special winning opening 9024 during the small hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), the effect display device 909 executes an effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the first speed, and executes a second prize ball increase effect (see steps S90510 to S90522). ). In this embodiment, in the second prize ball increase effect, the prize ball number display is updated at a relatively high speed (0.1 seconds in this example) as the first speed, and is shown in FIG. 95 (C). As described above, when the update of all the prize ball number displays is completed, the second prize ball increase effect ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97, a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 9024 in the small hit game in the second KT state will be described. To do. In the example shown in FIG. 96A, when the second KT state is in progress, the effect display device 909 displays the prize ball number display 90305 according to the second KT pattern (see step S90649), and a small hit occurs. In this case, for example, a character display 90306 such as "Small hit occurred!" Is displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, the prize ball number display 90305 may be displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 909 as the prize ball number display 90305 by the second KT pattern. It is shown.

Next, it is assumed that a prize is generated in the special winning opening 9024 during the small hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 96 (B), the effect effect is started in the effect display device 909 (see step S90523), and the enlarged display of the prize ball number display 90305 is started (see step S90530). In the example shown in FIG. 96 (B), as an effect effect, a case where a predetermined effect image 90307 (for example, an image in a glittering manner) is displayed around the prize ball number display 90305 is shown. .. Further, when a prize is generated in the special prize opening 9024, as shown in FIG. 96 (B), a prize ball increase display is displayed (see step S90526) and a prize effect is started (see step S90527). In the example shown in FIG. 96B, there is a case where a predetermined character 90308 is displayed as a winning effect and a character display 90309 such as "+15" is displayed as a prize ball increase display. Has been done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 96C, the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the second speed is started in the effect display device 909, and the third prize ball increase effect is started (steps S90510, S90517, S90529). ~ S90539). In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 (C) to 97 (H), in the third prize ball increase effect, the second prize ball increase effect is compared with the first prize ball increase effect and the second prize ball increase effect. The prize ball number display is updated at a relatively slow speed (0.5 seconds in this example).

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (D), it is assumed that the effect effect has been completed (the winning effect is continuing), and a new prize is generated in the next special winning opening 9024 during the execution of the winning effect. And. In this case, as shown in FIG. 97 (E), the effect effect is started in the effect display device 909 (see step S90523). However, in this case, since the winning effect is still being executed, the new prize ball increase display and the winning effect are not yet executed.

Next, it is assumed that the effect effect has been completed as shown in FIG. 97 (F), and further, it is assumed that the winning effect has been completed as shown in FIG. 97 (G). Then, when the winning effect is completed, the prize ball increase display is displayed with a delay (see step S90526) and the prize is won, as shown in FIG. 97 (H), based on the fact that there is an unexecuted waiting prize effect. The production is started (see step S90527).

After that, until all the prize ball number displays including the number of prize balls based on the prizes to the special prize opening 9024 generated additionally in FIG. 97 (E) are updated, the second prize ball increase production is performed. Will be executed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, as an effect effect, a case is shown in which an effect image 90307 with a glittering mode is displayed around the prize ball number display 90305, but the effect is limited to such a mode. Absent. For example, as an effect effect, it may be configured to perform an effect of an aspect that acts on the prize ball number display 90305 in some form, such as displaying an image of an aspect that covers the prize ball number display 90305. By acting on the prize ball number display 90305 in this way, it is possible to perform an effect that makes the prize ball number display 90305 difficult to see.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game is added to the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state to display the number of prize balls. Not limited to this, the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game and the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state may be displayed separately. For example, when a big hit game is in progress, the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game is displayed on the lower left portion of the display screen of the effect display device 909 in the manner shown in FIG. 94, and the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. The number of prize balls acquired during the first KT state is also displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 909, and the second KT is near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 909 in the manner shown in FIG. 96 (A). The number of prize balls acquired during the state may also be displayed (the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state may be displayed separately and independently).

Further, for example, (1) when the KT state ends once and the big hit game starts, the prize ball number display of the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state is deleted, and the prize ball number display displayed during the big hit game. The number of prize balls acquired during the KT state may be continuously displayed until the KT state is terminated and the non-KT state is entered. It may be configured. According to the aspect (2), it is possible to improve the interest in the game by recognizing the number of prize balls acquired only in the KT state.

Next, the production timing of the production in the small hit game in the second KT state will be described. FIG. 98 is a timing chart for explaining the effect timing of the effect in the small hit game in the second KT state. As shown in FIG. 98, in the small hit game in the second KT state, when the first prize is generated while the special prize opening 9024 is in the open state, the enlarged display of the prize ball number display is started (step S90530). (See) The update display of the number of prize balls for the first prize is started, the third prize ball increase effect is started (see steps S90510, S90517, S90529 to S90539), and the effect effect is executed (step). See S90523). Further, as shown in FIG. 98, the winning effect for the first winning is started (see step S90527).

Next, as shown in FIG. 98, in the small hit game in the second KT state, if the second prize is generated while the second prize ball increase effect or the prize effect is being executed, the second prize is awarded. The original effect effect is immediately executed, and the number of prize balls increased by the second prize is taken over, and the third prize ball increase effect is continuously executed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 98, since the winning effect is still being executed when the second prize is generated, the winning effect for the second prize is not immediately executed, as shown in FIG. 98. In addition, after finishing the winning effect for the first prize, the winning effect for the second prize is executed later.

After that, even after the special winning opening 9024 (special variable winning ball device 9022) is controlled to be closed and the small hit game is completed, the display of all prize balls is updated in the third prize ball increase production. If it is not finished, or if all the winning productions are not finished, as shown in FIG. 98, after the special winning opening 9024 is closed, the fluctuation display after the small hit game is finished, and even in the next small hit game, It is possible to continuously execute the third prize ball increase effect and the prize-winning effect.

Next, a specific example of the production mode of the continuous small hit effect in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous small hit effect. In FIG. 99, for example, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (A) and (B-1). At the start timing of the variable display that is a small hit, as shown in FIG. 99 (A), the variable display of the background symbol on the left, middle, and right is started. In this case, the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect are determined when the variable display is started (see step S90926).

When it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect A, when the execution timing of the continuous small hit effect is reached during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 99 (B-1), a predetermined character is displayed on the effect display device 909. Along with the appearance of the A90310, the continuous small hit effect A is executed in a mode of displaying the character display 90311 such as "one more time!" As the dialogue of the character A90310.

Further, when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect B, the execution timing of the continuous small hit effect during the variable display is determined by the effect display device 909 as shown in FIG. 99 (B-2). Along with the appearance of the character B90312, the continuous small hit effect B is executed in a manner of displaying the character display 90311 such as "one more time!" As the dialogue of the character B90312.

Further, when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect C, the execution timing of the continuous small hit effect during the variable display is determined by the effect display device 909 as shown in FIG. 99 (B-3). Along with the appearance of the character C90313, the continuous small hit effect C is executed in a mode of displaying the character display 90311 such as "one more time!" As the dialogue of the character C90313.

Next, the production timing of the continuous small hit effect will be described. FIG. 100 is a timing chart for explaining the effect timing of the continuous small hit effect. As shown in FIG. 100 (A), in this embodiment, even if a small hit occurs, if small hits are not continuously generated in a plurality of fluctuation displays (before and after the fluctuation display that has become a small hit). The continuous small hit effect is configured to be infeasible (see steps S90929 and S90930).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), when small hits are continuously generated in a plurality of fluctuation displays, a continuous small hit effect is produced in the second and subsequent fluctuation displays in which small hits are continuously generated. It is feasible (see steps S90921a-S90928). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect are determined when the second and subsequent variable displays in which small hits are continuously generated are started (step). (See S90926), when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect, the continuous small hit effect can be executed during the variable display.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), a case is shown in which a continuous small hit effect can be executed during the fluctuation display in which a small hit occurs, but only in such an embodiment. Instead, the continuous small hit effect may be executed over the small hit game period after the end of the variation display in which the small hit occurs.

Further, in this embodiment, the case where the presence / absence and the type of the continuous small hit effect is determined at the start of the variation display when the small hits occur continuously is shown, but it is not limited to such a processing mode. .. For example, the effect control microphone computer 90200 determines that when a small hit occurs, the small hit game is started (for example, after determining Y in step S90983 of the background symbol fluctuation stop processing shown in FIG. 84). Based on the winning judgment result command received from the game control microcomputer 90560, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display to be started next is also a small hit, and the fluctuation display to be started next is also small. If it is a hit, the same process as in steps S90922 to S90926 shown in this embodiment is executed to determine the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect. Then, when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect, the continuous small hit effect can be executed over the period from the start of the small hit game to the next variable display.

Further, for example, when a small hit occurs, the effect control microphone computer 90200 has a timing during which a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the small hit game during the small hit game (for example, during the small hit game). At any timing in the middle of the small hit game, such as the timing when the start prize is generated during the small hit game), the next start is based on the look-ahead judgment result command received from the game control microcomputer 90560. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation display is also a small hit, and if the fluctuation display to be started next is also a small hit, the same process as in step S90926 shown in this embodiment is followed. The presence / absence and type of continuous small hit effect may be determined. Then, when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect, the continuous small hit effect may be executed from the timing in the middle of the small hit game to the next variation display.

Further, in this embodiment, when the plate on which the game ball is paid out (the hitting ball supply plate 903 or the surplus ball receiving plate 904) becomes full, the full tank notification may be executed. For example, the amount of game balls stored in the hit ball supply plate 903 and the surplus ball receiver 904 can be detected by a detection means such as a sensor, and when the detection means detects that the stored amount is equal to or more than a predetermined amount, the effect is produced. The display device 909 displays the character "full tank error" or outputs an error sound to execute the full tank notification. Here, in this embodiment, the prize balls are paid out more frequently in the jackpot game state and the second KT state, but in the second KT state, the prize balls are not paid out as much as in the jackpot game state at one time. The full tank condition is easily resolved. Therefore, the execution mode of the full tank notification may be different between the jackpot game state and the second KT state. For example, in the second KT state, the full tank notification may be executed in a modest manner (for example, the character size of the "full tank error" is small, the error volume is small, etc.) as compared with the jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, when the stored amount exceeds the first predetermined amount, the full tank notification is executed, and in the second KT state, when the stored amount exceeds the second predetermined amount, which is larger than the first predetermined amount, the full tank notification is executed. You may want to do it. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable full tank notification according to the situation.

As described above, in this embodiment, the variable winning means (for example, the variable winning ball device 9015) that can change between the first state in which the game medium can win and the second state in which the game medium cannot win or is difficult to win. And the special variable winning ball device 9022), which is a state different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) including the change of the variable winning means to the first state. And a special state control means capable of controlling a special state (for example, a KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) that is frequently controlled to a special state as compared with the normal state. Then, the variable winning means is provided so that the game medium launched toward the variable winning means cannot be won after being notified that the special state is controlled (for example, the flow of the game ball is delayed). It is realized by providing a nail group 55 as a delay means and setting the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game to 0.8 seconds). Further, the variable display that does not trigger the control to the advantageous state in the special state is the first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period (for example, the second variable display patterns # 25 and # 27 of shortened variation). It can be executed by the second variable display pattern (for example, the second variable display patterns # 26 and # 28 including the continuous effect) in which the variable display period is a second period longer than the first period. Then, in the special state, the ratio of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is higher than the ratio of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. Low (for example, in the case of a small hit, the ratio determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 28, which has a relatively long fluctuation time, is low (or not determined). See FIG. 59). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the hobby from being lowered and enhance the effect of the production.

Further, in this embodiment, when the special state is controlled in the special state, the related effects related to the special state (for example, small hit notification, continuous small hit effect, display of prize ball increase display, winning effect, etc.) The related effect executing means that can execute (the effect related to) and the hold related to the variable display that triggers the control of the advantageous state among the hold information stored by the hold storage means when controlled to the advantageous state. A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a pending continuous effect) suggesting that information is included, and when the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means, the earlier advantageous state and the later Restricting means that restricts the execution of related effects when controlled to a special state with the advantageous state (for example, small hit notification, continuous small hit effects, display of prize ball increase display during execution of hold continuous effects, The execution of productions related to small hits, such as winning productions, is restricted). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being lowered.

Further, in this embodiment, when the suggestion effect executing means is controlled to the second advantageous state, it is a variable that triggers the control to the first advantageous state among the hold information stored by the hold storage means. The suggestion effect can be executed when the pending information regarding the display is included (see, for example, FIG. 92B). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being lowered.

Further, in this embodiment, when the first advantageous state is controlled, the hold information stored by the hold storage means includes the hold information related to the variable display that triggers the control to the first advantageous state. In this case, the suggestion effect can be executed after notifying that the advantageous state controlled this time is the second advantageous state (see, for example, FIG. 92C). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being lowered.

Further, in this embodiment, promotion notification means (for example, effect display) capable of executing promotion notification (for example, right-handed notification) for promoting the launch of the game medium to a predetermined route when controlled to a special state. The device 909 is provided with a character display of "right-handed", an arrow display indicating the right direction, etc.), and the promotion notification means is when the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. , The promotion notification may be executed in a different manner from the time when the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time in the KT state (that is, the fluctuation pattern). , 2nd variation pattern # 26, # 28) than when the variation display is executed by the shortened variation variation pattern (that is, the second variation pattern # 25, # 27). , The character display of "right-handed" and the arrow display indicating the right direction may be reduced or made transparent so as not to actively encourage right-handed.) With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable promotion notification according to the situation.

Further, in this embodiment, a storage means capable of storing the game medium (for example, a hitting ball supply plate 903 or a surplus ball receiving plate 904) and a full tank notification indicating that the storage means is in a full tank state can be executed. The tongue notification means (for example, realized by displaying the character "full tank error" in the effect display device 909 or outputting an error sound) is provided, and the tongue notification means is controlled to an advantageous state. It may be possible to make the execution mode of the full tank notification different between when the player is in the game and when the game is controlled in the special state (for example, in the second KT state, the game mode is modest as compared with the jackpot game state. The full tank notification may be executed depending on the mode (for example, the character size of the "full tank error" is small, the error volume is small, etc.), or when the stored amount exceeds the first predetermined amount in the big hit game state. , The full tank notification may be executed, and in the second KT state, when the stored amount exceeds the second predetermined amount, which is larger than the first predetermined amount, the full tank notification may be executed.) With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable full tank notification according to the situation.

Further, in this embodiment, when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific result (in this example, the jackpot symbol), the advantageous state (in this example, the jackpot game) has a higher degree of advantage for the player than the special state. It is possible to control the state), and when the display result of the variable display becomes a special result (in this example, a small hit symbol), it is possible to control the special state. Further, in the special state, the frequency of being controlled to the special state is higher than that of the normal state (in this example, since the right-handed operation is performed in the KT state, the variation display of the second special symbol is frequently executed, and the second 2 Small hits may occur only when the variable display of special symbols is executed). Therefore, the monotonousness of the gametability related to the special state can be eliminated, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In this embodiment, "high degree of advantage" means, for example, when the game is controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) or a special state (in this example, a small hit game state). It means that the degree of expectation for acquiring game media per game is high. For example, a variable winning ball device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 9020, a special variable winning ball device 9022) may be opened for a long time or may be opened many times to obtain many prizes. By increasing the number of prize balls, it is possible to obtain a lot of game value, such as getting a lot of balls.

Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to control a special state (in this example, a small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied (in this example, a big hit). Therefore, it is possible to control to a special state (in this example, the KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) in which the frequency of being controlled to the special state is increased as compared with before the special condition is satisfied. Further, in the special state, when the next variable display after being controlled to the special state is executed and the special state is controlled again, the special effect (in this example, the continuous small hit effect) is executed. It is possible. Therefore, the monotonousness of the gametability related to the special state can be eliminated, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in this embodiment, the counting display (in this example, the number of prize balls is displayed) is updated and displayed based on a predetermined opportunity (in this example, the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening or the special winning opening 9024). It is possible, and the first display mode (in this example, the prize ball number display by the jackpot pattern) and the second display mode (in this example, the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern) that is highlighted more than the first display mode. ), The count display can be updated and displayed (in this example, in the big hit pattern during the big hit game state, the prize ball number display 90300 is updated and displayed at the lower left end of the effect display device 909. As shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, in the second KT pattern in the second KT state, the prize ball number display 90305 is enlarged and displayed and the effect image 90307 is displayed and updated near the center of the effect display device 909). Therefore, by providing a plurality of types of display modes for updating and displaying the counting display, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the counting display is updated and displayed.

In this embodiment, the case where the number of prize balls is displayed as the counting display is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when performing some kind of gauge display or countdown display in the effect as the count display, the configuration shown in this embodiment may be applied. Further, in this embodiment, the case where the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening or the special winning opening 9024 has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, some gauge display level. It may be the one that the condition of up is satisfied. Further, for example, in the case of applying to a slot machine, it may be assumed that a predetermined opportunity occurs based on the occurrence of a small winning combination or the like.

Further, in this embodiment, the prize ball number display is additionally displayed as an update display, but not limited to such an embodiment, when some count display is subtracted and displayed, this implementation is performed. It may be configured to apply the configuration shown in the form.

In each of the above embodiments, when the variation is started in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 90200 of the variation pattern indicating the variation time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, and the like. Although an example of transmitting one variation pattern command is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 90200 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 90560 uses the first command to indicate the presence / absence of a pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of a sliding effect, etc. A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop is sent, and the second command indicates the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. after reaching the reach (if it does not reach the so-called first). 2 After the stop, a command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 90200 may perform the effect control in the variation display based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 90560 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 90200 selects the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. You may do it. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, "different ratios" are not limited to those having different ratios due to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: 0%, and the ratios are different (that is, one is 100% allocated and the other is 0%).

Further, in each of the above embodiments, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols "1" to "9", a background symbol (effect symbol), and a normal symbol are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed is shown. The variable display is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variably displayed symbol and the derived symbol do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the effect control board 9080, the audio output board 9070, and the lamp driver board 9035 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted, but the circuit for controlling the effect device is provided. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 909 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 9027, etc.) are mounted. Two boards may be provided with the effect control board of 2.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 90200, but the game control microcomputer 90560 is another substrate (for example, the figure). For the audio output board 9070, the lamp driver board 9035, etc. shown in 48, or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the voice output board 9070 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 9035). The effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90200 on the effect control board 9080 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 9070, the lamp driver board 9035, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. The effect control microcomputer 90200 controls the effect display device 909 by executing the control related to the voice control and the lamp control according to the operation, and further changing the received command to the command as it is or, for example, a simplified command. It may be sent to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 90200 performs display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 90560 in each of the above embodiments, and similarly, the sound output board 9070 and the lamp Display control can be performed according to a command received from the driver board 9035 or the sound / lamp board.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine, but in the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are used according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible to do.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, an example is obtained in which a gaming medium is used as a gaming machine, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes. It can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine in which a gaming medium such as a ball is enclosed and a score is given when the conditions for giving a prize are satisfied.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, there are probabilistic jackpots and normal jackpots as jackpot types, and based on the determination that the jackpot types are probabilistic jackpots, a gaming machine that is controlled to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game is completed is shown. However, it is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined probability variation region inside (a probability variation region may be provided in only one special variable winning ball device, or a plurality of special variable winning balls provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the jackpot game. It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in each of the above embodiments to the gaming machine controlled to the probabilistic state after the end.

The present invention is applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

1 Pachinko game machine 12 Production control board 120 Production control CPU
250 Movable body 275 LED board 601 Motor drive IC
602 LED drive IC
603 Connector 800 1st effector 803 Decorative member 820-822 Rear LED
844A to 844E Boss 850 Conductive part 851 Non-conductive part 900 Second effect body 901 Pachinko game machine 908a First special symbol display 908b Second special symbol display 909 Effect display device 909a First variable display unit 909b Second variable Display 909c Background symbol display 9013 1st start winning opening 9013a 1st starting opening switch 9014 2nd starting winning opening 9014a 2nd starting opening switch 9015 Variable winning ball device 9017 Acting gate 9017a Acting gate switch 9018c Symbol holding storage display section 9020 Special variable winning ball device 9022 Special variable winning ball device 9023 Bottom member 9024 Special winning opening 9023a 1st count switch 9025a 2nd count switch 9031 Main board 9032 Gate 9056 CPU
9080 Production control board 90200 Production control microcomputer 90201 Production control CPU
90560 Microcomputer for game control

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can play games,
A variable approach means that can change between a first state in which the game medium can enter and a second state in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult.
A state different from the advantageous state including the change of the variable approach means to the first state, and a special state control means capable of controlling the special state including the change of the variable approach means to the first state. ,
The game value is given based on the special state control means capable of controlling the special state, which is more frequently controlled to the special state than the normal state, and the game medium entering the predetermined area with the control of the special state. It is equipped with a granting effect executing means that can execute the granting effect when it is performed.
The variable approach means is provided so as not to enter the game medium launched toward the variable approach means after being notified that the special state is controlled.
The variable display that does not trigger the control of the advantageous state in the special state is a first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period, and a second period in which the variable display period is longer than the first period. It is feasible with the second variable display pattern and
In the special state, the ratio controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. Lower than the percentage,
The special state includes a first special state and a second special state that is more advantageous than the first special state.
The granting effect executing means
In the second special state, when the game value is given based on the fact that the game medium has entered the predetermined area in accordance with the control of the special state, the granting effect is executed.
In the first special state, when the game value is given based on the fact that the game medium has entered the predetermined area in accordance with the control of the special state, the granting effect is not executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images